Trane TR200 Programming Guide

Programming Guide
TR200
Literature order number BAS-SVP04A-EN

Date May 2009
Substitutes
www.trane.com
For more information, contact your local Trane Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to
office or e-mail us at comfort@trane.com change design and specifications without notice.
BAS-SVP04B-EN
130R0449 MG12J122 Rev. 2009-05-29
*MG12J122*
Table of Contents
Safety 1-1
High Voltage Warning 1-1
Before commencing repair work 1-4
Special conditions 1-4
IT line power 1-5
Introduction 2-1
Copyright, limitation of liability and revision rights 2-1
Abbreviations 2-2
Definitions 2-3
How to Program 3-1
Local Control Panel 3-1

How to operate the Graphical keypad 3-1
Quick Menu mode 3-8
Function Set-ups 3-10
Main Menu Mode 3-15
Parameter Description 4-1
Parameter Selection 4-1

Main Menu Structure 4-1
Main Menu - Operation and Display - Group 0 4-1
Main Menu - Load and Motor - Group 1 4-22
Main Menu - Brakes - Group 2 4-34
Main Menu - Reference/Ramps - Group 3 4-37
Main Menu - Limits/Warnings - Group 4 4-46
Main Menu - Digital In/Out - Group 5 4-51

Digital Inputs, 5-1* continued 4-57
5-3* Digital Outputs 4-66
TR200 Programming Guide -1

Main Menu - Analog In/Out - Group 6 4-83
Main Menu - Communications and Options - Group 8 4-92
Main Menu - LonWorks - Group 11 4-102
Main Menu - Smart Logic - Group 13 4-104
Main Menu - Special Functions -Group 14 4-120
Main Menu - Adjustable Frequency Drive Information - Group

15 4-130
Main Menu - Data Readouts - Group 16 4-140
Main Menu - Data Readouts 2 - Group 18 4-151
Main Menu - Adjustable Frequency Drive Closed-loop - Group

20 4-153
Main Menu - Extended Closed-loop - TR200 - Group 21 4-169
Main Menu - Application Functions - TR200 - Group 22 4-184
Main Menu - Time-based Functions - TR200 - Group 23 4-192
Main Menu - Application Functions 2 - Group 24 4-209
Troubleshooting 5-1
Troubleshooting 5-1
Alarms and Warnings 5-1
Alarm Words 5-5
Warning Words 5-6
Extended Status Words 5-7
Fault messages 5-8
Parameter Lists 6-1
Parameter Lists TR200 6-1

Default settings 6-1
0-** Operation and Display 6-2
1-** Load / Motor 6-3
2-** Brakes 6-4
-2 TR200 Programming Guide

3-** Reference / Ramps 6-4
4-** Limits / Warnings 6-5
5-** Digital In / Out 6-6
6-** Analog In / Out 6-7
8-** Communication and Options 6-8
11-** LonWorks 6-9
13-** Smart Logic Controller 6-9
14-** Special Functions 6-10
15-** Adjustable Frequency Drive Information 6-11
16-** Data Readouts 6-12
18-** Info & Readouts 6-13
20-** FC Closed-loop 6-14
21-** Ext. Closed-loop 6-15
22-** Application Functions 6-16
23-** Time-based Functions 6-17
24-** Application Functions 2 6-18
Index 7-1
TR200 Programming Guide -3

-4 TR200 Programming Guide
Safety
Warnings, cautions and notices
Note that warnings, cautions and notices appear at appropriate intervals throughout this manual. Warnings are
provide to alert installing contractors to potential hazards that could result in personal injury or death. Cautions
are designed to alert personnel to hazardous situations that could result in personal injury, while notices indicate
a situation that could result in equipment or property-damage-only accidents.
Your personal safety and the proper operation of this machine depend upon the strict observance of these
precautions.
Warnings, Cautions and Notices appear at appropriate sections throughout this literature. Read these carefully.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It could also
be used to alert against unsafe practices.
NOTE
Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or property-damage only accidents.
Indicates default setting
High Voltage Warning
WARNING
The voltage of the adjustable frequency drive and the MCO 101 option card is dangerous whenever it is connected to
line power. Incorrect installation of the motor or adjustable frequency drive may cause damage to the equipment,
serious injury or death. Consequently, it is essential to comply with the instructions in this manual as well as local and
national rules and safety regulations.
Safety Note
WARNING
The voltage of the adjustable frequency drive is dangerous whenever connected to line power. Incorrect installation of
the motor, adjustable frequency drive or serial communication bus could result in death, serious personal injury or
damage to the equipment. Consequently, the instructions in this manual, as well as national and local rules and safety
regulations, must be complied with.
WARNING
Failure to follow instructions below could result in death or serious injury.
TR200 Programming Guide 1-1

Safety
Safety Regulations
1. The adjustable frequency drive must be disconnected from line power if repair work is to be carried out.
Make sure that the line power supply has been disconnected and that the necessary time has passed before
removing motor and line power plugs.
2. The [STOP/RESET] key on the keypad of the adjustable frequency drive does not disconnect the equipment
from line power and is thus not to be used as a safety switch.
3. Correct protective grounding of the equipment must be established, the user must be protected against
supply voltage, and the motor must be protected against overload in accordance with applicable national
and local regulations.
4. The ground leakage currents are higher than 3.5 mA.
5. Protection against motor overload is set by par.1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. If this function is desired,
set par.1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to data value [ETR trip] (default value) or data value [ETR warning].
Note: The function is initialized at 1.16 x rated motor current and rated motor frequency. For the North
American market: The ETR functions provide class 20 motor overload protection in accordance with NEC.
6. Do not remove the plugs for the motor and line power supply while the adjustable frequency drive is con-
nected to line power. Make sure that the line power supply has been disconnected and that the necessary
time has passed before removing motor and line power plugs.
7. Please note that the adjustable frequency drive has more voltage inputs than L1, L2 and L3, when load
sharing (linking of DC intermediate circuit) and external 24 Vdc have been installed. Make sure that all
voltage inputs have been disconnected and that the necessary time has passed before commencing repair
work.
Installation at high altitudes
WARNING
Installation at high altitude:
380500 V, enclosure A, B and C: At altitudes above 6,561 ft [2 km], please contact Trane regarding PELV/Class II.
380500 V, enclosure D, E and F: At altitudes above 9,842 ft [3 km], please contact Trane regarding PELV/Class II.
If the drive is to be installed over 6,561 ft, [2 km] altitude, then the PELV specifications are not fulfilled anymore, i.e.,
the distances between components and critical parts become too small. To maintain the clearance for functional insu-
lation anyway, the risk for overvoltage must be reduced by means of external protective devices or some kind of galvanic
isolation. De-rating should also be taken into consideration, since cooling the drive is more difficult at high altitude.
Please contact Trane in such cases.
WARNING
Warning against Unintended Start
1. The motor can be brought to a stop by means of digital commands, bus commands, references or a local stop,
while the adjustable frequency drive is connected to line power. If personal safety considerations make it necessary
to ensure that no unintended start occurs, these stop functions are not sufficient.
2. While parameters are being changed, the motor may start. Consequently, the stop key [STOP/RESET] must always
be activated, following which data can be modified.
3. A motor that has been stopped may start if faults occur in the electronics of the adjustable frequency drive, or if a
temporary overload or a fault in the supply line power or the motor connection ceases.
WARNING
Touching the electrical parts could result in death or serious injury - even after the equipment has been disconnected
from line power.
1-2 TR200 Programming Guide

Safety
Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been disconnected, such as external 24 VDC, load sharing (linkage
of DC intermediate circuit), as well as the motor connection for kinetic backup. Refer to the Instruction Manual
for further safety guidelines.
Failure to follow recommendations could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
The adjustable frequency drive DC link capacitors remain charged after power has been disconnected. To avoid an
electrical shock hazard, disconnect the adjustable frequency drive from line power before carrying out maintenance.
Wait at least as follows before doing service on the adjustable frequency drive:
Voltage (V) Min. Waiting Time (Minutes)

4 15 20 30 40
200 - 240 1.55 hp [1.13.7 7.560 hp [5.5 45
kW] kW]
380 - 480 1.510 hp [1.17.5 15125 hp [1190 150350 hp [110 4501350 hp
kW] kW] 250 kW] [3151000 kW]
525-600 1.510 hp [1.17.5 15125 hp [1190
kW] kW]
525-690 15125 hp [1190 60550 hp [45 6001875 hp
kW] 400 kW] [4501400 kW]
Be aware that there may be high voltage on the DC link even when the LEDs are turned off.

Safety
Before commencing repair work
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
1. Disconnect the adjustable frequency drive from line power.
2. Disconnect DC bus terminals 88 and 89
3. Wait at least the time mentioned above in the section General Warning.
4. Remove motor cable
Special conditions
Electrical ratings:
The rating indicated on the nameplate of the adjustable frequency drive is based on a typical 3-phase line power
supply within the specified voltage, current and temperature ranges, which are expected to be used in most
applications.
The adjustable frequency drives also support other special applications, which affect the electrical ratings of the
adjustable frequency drive.
Special conditions that affect the electrical ratings might be:
Single phase applications.

High temperature applications that require derating of the electrical ratings.
Marine applications with more severe environmental conditions.
Other applications might also affect the electrical ratings.
Consult the relevant sections in this manual and in the for information about the electrical ratings.
Installation requirements:
The overall electrical safety of the adjustable frequency drive requires special installation considerations re-
garding:
Fuses and circuit breakers for overcurrent and short-circuit protection

Selection of power cables (line power, motor, brake, load sharing and relay)
Grid configuration (grounded delta transformer leg, IT,TN, etc.)
Safety of low-voltage ports (PELV conditions).
Consult the relevant clauses in these instructions and in the for information about the installation requirements.

Safety
IT line power
WARNING
Do not connect adjustable frequency drives with RFI filters to line power supplies with a voltage between phase and
ground of more than 440 V for 400 V drives and 760 V for 690 V drives.
For 400 VT IT line power and delta ground (grounded leg), AC line voltage may exceed 440 V between phase and ground.
For 690 VT IT line power and delta ground (grounded leg), AC line voltage may exceed 760 V between phase and ground.
par.14-50 RFI 1 can be used to disconnect the internal RFI capacitors from the RFI filter to ground.
Software Version and Approvals: TR200
TR200
Software version: 1.1.x
This manual can be used with all TR200 adjustable frequency drives with software version 1.1.x.
The software version number can be seen from par.15-43 Software Version.
Disposal instructions
Equipment containing electrical components may not be disposed of together

with domestic waste.
It must be separately collected with electrical and electronic waste according to
local and currently valid legislation.

Safety

Introduction
Copyright, limitation of liability and revision rights
This publication contains information proprietary to Trane. By accepting and using this manual, the user agrees
that the information contained herein will be used solely for operating equipment from Trane or equipment
from other vendors provided that such equipment is intended for communication with Trane equipment over
a serial communication link. This publication is protected under the copyright laws of most countries.
Trane does not warrant that a software program produced according to the guidelines provided in this manual
will function properly in every physical, hardware or software environment.
Although Trane has tested and reviewed the documentation within this manual, Trane makes no warranty or
representation, neither expressed nor implied, with respect to this documentation, including its quality, per-
formance, or fitness for a particular purpose.
In no event shall Trane be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages arising out of
the use, or the inability to use information contained in this manual, even if advised of the possibility of such
damages. In particular, Trane is not responsible for any costs, including but not limited to those incurred as a
result of lost profits or revenue, loss or damage of equipment, loss of computer programs, loss of data, the costs
to substitute these, or any claims by third parties.
Trane reserves the right to revise this publication at any time and to make changes to its contents without prior
notice or any obligation to notify former or present users of such revisions or changes.

Introduction
Abbreviations
Alternating current AC
American wire gauge AWG
Ampere/AMP A
Automatic Motor Adaptation AMA
Current limit ILIM
Degrees Celsius C
Direct current DC
Drive Dependent D-TYPE
Electro Magnetic Compatibility EMC
Electronic Thermal Relay ETR
Adjustable Frequency Drive FC
Gram g
Hertz Hz
Kilohertz kHz
Local Control Panel keypad
Meter m
Millihenry Inductance mH
Milliampere mA
Millisecond ms
Minute min
Trane Drive Utility TDU
Nanofarad nF
Newton Meters Nm
Nominal motor current IM,N
Nominal motor frequency fM,N
Nominal motor power PM,N
Nominal motor voltage UM,N
Parameter par.
Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV
Printed Circuit Board PCB
Rated Inverter Output Current IINV
Revolutions Per Minute RPM
Regenerative terminals Regen
Second s
Synchronous Motor Speed ns
Torque limit TLIM
Volt V
The maximum output current IDRIVE,MAX
The rated output current supplied by the adjustable frequency drive IDRIVE,N
Available literature for TR200

x = Revision number
yy = Language code
Trane technical literature is available in print from your local Trane Sales Office or online at:
www.danfoss.com/BusinessAreas/DrivesSolutions/Documentations/Technical+Documentation.htm

Introduction
Definitions
Adjustable frequency drive:
D-TYPE
Size and type of the connected adjustable frequency drive (dependencies).
IDRIVE,MAX
The maximum output current.
IDRIVE,N
The rated output current supplied by the adjustable frequency drive.
UDRIVE, MAX
The maximum output voltage.
Input: Group 1 Reset, Coasting stop, Reset and Coasting

stop, Quick-stop, DC braking, Stop and
Control command the "Off" key.
You can start and stop the connected motor by means Group 2 Start, Pulse start, Reversing, Start revers-
ing, Jog and Freeze output
of keypad and the digital inputs.
Functions are divided into two groups.
Functions in group 1 have higher priority than func-
tions in group 2.
Motor:
fJOG
The motor frequency when the jog function is activated (via digital terminals).
fM
The motor frequency.
fMAX
The maximum motor frequency.
fMIN
The minimum motor frequency.
fM,N
The rated motor frequency (nameplate data).
IM
The motor current.
IM,N
The rated motor current (nameplate data).
M-TYPE
Size and type of the connected motor (dependencies).
nM,N
The rated motor speed (nameplate data).
ns
Synchronous motor speed
2 par . 1 23 60 s
ns =
par . 1 39
PM,N
The rated motor power (nameplate data).

Introduction
TM,N
The rated torque (motor).
UM
The instantaneous motor voltage.
UM,N
The rated motor voltage (nameplate data).
Break-away torque
DRIVE
The efficiency of the adjustable frequency drive is defined as the ratio between the power output and the power
input.
Start-disable command
A stop command belonging to the group 1 control commands - see this group.
Stop command
See Control commands.
References:
Analog Reference
A signal transmitted to the analog inputs 53 or 54, can be voltage or current.
Binary Reference
A signal transmitted to the serial communication port.
Preset Reference
A defined preset reference to be set from -100% to +100% of the reference range. Selection of eight preset
references via the digital terminals.
Pulse Reference
A pulse frequency signal transmitted to the digital inputs (terminal 29 or 33).
RefMAX
Determines the relationship between the reference input at 100% full scale value (typically 10 V, 20mA) and the
resulting reference. The maximum reference value set in par.3-03 Maximum Reference.
RefMIN
Determines the relationship between the reference input at 0% value (typically 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA) and the resulting
reference. The minimum reference value set in par.3-02 Minimum Reference.

Introduction
Miscellaneous:
Analog Inputs
The analog inputs are used for controlling various functions of the adjustable frequency drive.
There are two types of analog inputs:
Current input, 020 mA and 420 mA
Voltage input, 010 V DC ()
Voltage input, -10+10 V DC (TR200).
Analog Outputs
The analog outputs can supply a signal of 020 mA, 420 mA.
Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA
AMA algorithm determines the electrical parameters for the connected motor at standstill.
Brake Resistor
The brake resistor is a module capable of absorbing the braking energy generated in regenerative braking. This
regenerative braking energy increases the intermediate circuit voltage and a brake chopper ensures that the
power is transmitted to the brake resistor.
CT Characteristics
Constant torque characteristics used for all applications such as conveyor belts, displacement pumps and
cranes.
Digital Inputs
The digital inputs can be used for controlling various adjustable frequency drive functions.
Digital Outputs
The adjustable frequency drive features two solid state outputs that can supply a 24 V DC (max. 40 mA) signal.
DSP
Digital Signal Processor.
ETR
Electronic Thermal Relay is a thermal load calculation based on present load and time. Its purpose is to estimate
the motor temperature.
Hiperface
Hiperface is a registered trademark by Stegmann.
Initializing
If initialization is carried out (par.14-22 Operation Mode), the adjustable frequency drive returns to the default
setting.
Intermittent Duty Cycle
An intermittent duty rating refers to a sequence of duty cycles. Each cycle consists of an on-load and an off-load
period. The operation can be either periodic duty or non-periodic duty.
keypad
The Local Control Panel (keypad) makes up a complete interface for control and programming of the adjustable
frequency drive. The control panel is detachable and can be installed up to 10 ft [3 m] from the adjustable
frequency drive, i.e., in a front panel by means of the installation kit option.
lsb
Least significant bit.
msb
Most significant bit.
MCM
Short for Mille Circular Mil, an American measuring unit for cable cross-sections. 1 MCM = 0.5067 mm2.

Introduction
On-line/Off-line Parameters
Changes to on-line parameters are activated immediately after the data value is changed. Changes to off-line
parameters are not activated until you enter [OK] on the keypad.
Process PID
The PID regulator maintains the desired speed, pressure, temperature, etc. by adjusting the output frequency
to match the varying load.
PCD
Process Data
Pulse Input/Incremental Encoder
An external, digital pulse transmitter used for feeding back information on motor speed. The encoder is used
in applications where great accuracy in speed control is required.
RCD
Residual Current Device.
Set-up
You can save parameter settings in four set-ups. Change between the four parameter set-ups, and edit one set-
up, while another set-up is active.
SFAVM
Switching pattern called Stator Flux-oriented Asynchronous Vector Modulation (par.14-00 Switching Pattern).
Slip Compensation
The adjustable frequency drive compensates for the motor slip by giving the frequency a supplement that fol-
lows the measured motor load keeping the motor speed almost constant..
Smart Logic Control (SLC)
The SLC is a sequence of user defined actions executed when the associated user defined events are evaluated
as true by the Smart Logic Controller. (Parameter group 13-xx Smart Logic Control (SLC).
STW
Status Word
FC Standard Bus
Includes RS 485 bus with FC protocol or MC protocol. See par.8-30 Protocol.
Thermistor:
A temperature-dependent resistor placed where the temperature is to be monitored (adjustable frequency drive
or motor).
Trip
A state entered in fault situations, e.g., if the adjustable frequency drive is subject to an overtemperature or
when the adjustable frequency drive is protecting the motor, process or mechanism. Restart is prevented until
the cause of the fault has disappeared and the trip state is canceled by activating reset or, in some cases, by
being programmed to reset automatically. Trip may not be used for personal safety.
Trip Locked
A state entered in fault situations when the adjustable frequency drive is protecting itself and requiring physical
intervention, e.g., if the adjustable frequency drive is subject to a short circuit on the output. A locked trip can
only be canceled by cutting off line power, removing the cause of the fault, and reconnecting the adjustable
frequency drive. Restart is prevented until the trip state is canceled by activating reset or, in some cases, by
being programmed to reset automatically. Trip may not be used for personal safety.
VT Characteristics
Variable torque characteristics used for pumps and fans.
VVCplus
If compared with standard voltage/frequency ratio control, Voltage Vector Control (VVCplus) improves the dy-
namics and the stability, both when the speed reference is changed and in relation to the load torque.

Introduction
60 AVM
Switching pattern called 60Asynchronous Vector Modulation (par.14-00 Switching Pattern).
Power Factor 3 x U x I 1 cos

The power factor is the relation between I1 and Power factor =
3 x U x I RMS
IRMS.
The power factor for 3-phase control: I 1 x cos 1 I1

= = since cos 1 = 1
I RMS I RMS
The power factor indicates to which extent the ad- I RMS = I 12 + I 52 + I 72 + .. + I n2
justable frequency drive imposes a load on the line
power supply.
The lower the power factor, the higher the IRMS for
the same kW performance.
In addition, a high power factor indicates that the different harmonic currents are low.
The adjustable frequency drive's built-in DC coils produce a high power factor, which minimizes the imposed
load on the line power supply.
Safety Precautions
WARNING
The voltage of the adjustable frequency drive is dangerous whenever connected to line power. Incorrect installation of
the motor, adjustable frequency drive or serial communication bus may cause damage to the equipment, serious per-
sonal injury or death. Consequently, the instructions in this manual, as well as national and local rules and safety
regulations, must be complied with.
Safety Regulations
1. The line power supply to the adjustable frequency drive must be disconnected whenever repair work is to
be carried out. Make sure that the line power supply has been disconnected and that the necessary time
has elapsed before removing motor and line power supply plugs.
2. The [OFF] button on the control panel of the adjustable frequency driver does not disconnect the line power
supply and consequently it must not be used as a safety switch.
3. The equipment must be properly grounded, the user must be protected against supply voltage and the
motor must be protected against overload in accordance with applicable national and local regulations.
4. The ground leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA.
5. Protection against motor overload is not included in the factory setting. If this function is desired, set par.
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to data value ETR trip 1 [4] or data value ETR warning 1 [3].
6. Do not remove the plugs for the motor and line power supply while the adjustable frequency drive is con-
nected to line power. Make sure that the line power supply has been disconnected and that the necessary
time has elapsed before removing motor and line power plugs.
7. Please note that the adjustable frequency drive has more voltage sources than L1, L2 and L3, when load
sharing (linking of DC intermediate circuit) or external 24 V DC are installed. Make sure that all voltage
sources have been disconnected and that the necessary time has elapsed before commencing repair work.
Warning against unintended start
1. The motor can be brought to a stop by means of digital commands, bus commands, references or a local
stop, while the adjustable frequency drive is connected to line power. If personal safety considerations (e.g.,
risk of personal injury caused by contact with moving machine parts following an unintentional start) make

Introduction
it necessary to ensure that no unintended start occurs, these stop functions are not sufficient. In such cases,
the line power supply must be disconnected or the Safe Stop function must be activated.
2. The motor may start while setting the parameters. If this means that personal safety may be compromised
(e.g., personal injury caused by contact with moving machine parts), motor starting must be prevented, for
instance by use of the Safe Stop function or secure disconnection of the motor connection.
3. A motor that has been stopped with the line power supply connected, may start if faults occur in the elec-
tronics of the adjustable frequency drive, through temporary overload or if a fault in the power supply grid
or motor connection is remedied. If unintended start must be prevented for personal safety reasons (e.g.,
risk of injury caused by contact with moving machine parts), the normal stop functions of the adjustable
frequency drive are not sufficient. In such cases, the line power supply must be disconnected or the Safe
Stop function must be activated.
NOTE
When using the Safe Stop function, always follow the instructions in the Safe Stop section of the Design Guide.
4. Control signals from, or internally within, the adjustable frequency drive may in rare cases be activated in
error, be delayed or fail to occur entirely. When used in situations where safety is critical, e.g., when con-
trolling the electromagnetic brake function of a hoist application, these control signals must not be relied
on exclusively.
WARNING
Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after the equipment has been disconnected from line power.
Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been disconnected, such as external 24 V DC, load sharing (linkage
of DC intermediate circuit), as well as the motor connection for kinetic backup.
Systems where adjustable frequency drives are installed must, if necessary, be equipped with additional mon-
itoring and protective devices according to the valid safety regulations, e.g., law on mechanical tools, regulations
for the prevention of accidents, etc. Modifications on the adjustable frequency drives by means of the operating
software are allowed.
Hoisting applications:
The adjustable frequency drive functions for controlling mechanical brakes cannot be considered as a primary
safety circuit. There must always be a redundancy for controlling external brakes.
Protection Mode
Once a hardware limit on motor current or DC link voltage is exceeded, the drive will enter Protection mode.
Protection mode means a change of the PWM modulation strategy and a low switching frequency to minimize
losses. This continues 10 sec after the last fault and increases the reliability and the robustness of the drive while
re-establishing full control of the motor.
In hoist applications, Protection mode is not usable because the drive will usually not be able to leave this
mode again, and therefore it will extend the time before activating the brake which is not recommended.
"Protection mode can be disabled by setting par.14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault to zero, which means that
the drive will trip immediately if one of the hardware limits is exceeded.
NOTE
It is recommended to disable protection mode in hoisting applications (par.14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault = 0)

How to Program
Local Control Panel
How to operate the Graphical keypad
The keypad is divided into four functional groups:
1. Graphical display with Status lines.

2. Menu keys and LEDs - selecting mode, changing parameters and switching between display functions.
3. Navigation keys and LEDs (LEDs).
4. Operation keys and LEDs.
Graphical display:
The LCD display is back lit with a total of 6 alpha-numeric lines. All data is displayed on the keypad which can
show up to five operating variables while in [Status] mode.
Display lines:
a. Status line: Status messages displaying icons

and graphics.
b. Line 1-2: Operator data lines displaying data and
variables defined or chosen by the user. By
pressing the [Status] key, up to one extra line can
be added.
c. Status line: Status messages displaying text.

How to Program
The display is divided into 3 sections:
The top section (a) shows the status when in status mode or up to 2 variables when not in status mode and in
case of an alarm/warning.
The number of the Active Set-up (selected as the Active Set-up in par.0-10 Active Set-up) is shown. When pro-
gramming in another set-up than the Active Set-up, the number of the set-up being programmed appears to the
right in brackets.
The Middle section (b) shows up to 5 variables with related unit, regardless of status. In the case of an alarm/
warning, the warning is shown instead of the variables.
The bottom section (c) always shows the state of the adjustable frequency drive in status mode.
It is possible to toggle between three status read-out displays by pressing the [Status] key.
Operating variables with different formatting are shown in each status screen - see below.
Several values or measurements can be linked to each of the displayed operating variables. The values / meas-
urements to be displayed can be defined via par.0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, par.0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small,
par.0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small, par.0-23 Display Line 2 Large and par.0-24 Display Line 3 Large, which can be
accessed via [QUICK MENU], "Q3 Function Set-ups", "Q3-1 General Settings", "Q3-13 Display Settings".
Each value/measurement readout parameter selected in par.0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small to par.0-24 Display Line
3 Large has its own scale and number of digits after a possible decimal point. Larger numeric values are dis-
played with few digits after the decimal point.
Ex.: Current readout
5.25 A; 15.2 A 105 A.
Status display I:
130BP041.10
This readout state is standard after start-up or initial-
ization.
Use [INFO] to obtain information about the value/ 1.1
measurement linked to the displayed operating vari-
ables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2, and 3).
See the operating variables shown in the display in 1.2
this figure. 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 are shown in small size. 2
and 3 are shown in medium size.
2
3 1.3

How to Program
Status display II:

See the operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, and 2)
shown in the display in this illustration.
In the example, Speed, Motor current, Motor power
and Frequency are selected as variables in the first
and second lines. 1.3
1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 are shown in small size. 2 is shown in
1.1
large size.
1.2
2
Status display III:
130BP063.10
This state displays the event and action of the Smart
Logic Control. For further information, see section
Smart Logic Control.
Display Contrast Adjustment
Press [status] and [] for darker display

Press [status] and [] for brighter display
Top section
Middle section
Bottom section
LEDs:
If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or warning LED lights up. A status and alarm text appear
on the control panel.
The On LED is activated when the adjustable frequency drive receives power from AC line voltage, a DC bus
terminal, or an external 24 V supply. At the same time, the back light is on.

How to Program
Green LED/On: Control section is working.

Yellow LED/Warn.: Indicates a warning.
Flashing Red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm.
Keys
Menu keys
The menu keys are divided into functions. The keys
below the display and indicator lamps are used for
parameter set-up, including choice of display indica-
tion during normal operation.
[Status]
indicates the status of the adjustable frequency drive and/or the motor. Three different readouts can be chosen
by pressing the [Status] key:
5 line readouts, 4 line readouts or Smart Logic Control.
Use [Status] for selecting the mode of display or for changing back to display mode from either the quick menu
mode, main menu mode or alarm mode. Also use the [Status] key to toggle single or double readout mode.
[Quick Menu]
allows quick set-up of the adjustable frequency drive. The most common TR200 functions can be program-
med here.
The [Quick Menu] consists of:

- My Personal Menu
- Quick Set-up
- Function Set-up
- Changes Made
- Loggings
The Function Set-up provides quick and easy access to all parameters required for the majority of TR200 appli-
cations including most VAV and CAV supply and return fans, cooling tower fans, primary, secondary and
condenser water pumps and other pump, fan and compressor applications. Among other features, it also in-
cludes parameters for selecting which variables to display on the keypad, digital preset speeds, scaling of analog
references, closed-loop single zone and multi-zone applications and specific functions related to fans, pumps
and compressors.
The Quick Menu parameters can be accessed immediately unless a password has been created via par.
0-60 Main Menu Password, par.0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password, par.0-65 Personal Menu Password or
par.0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Password.
It is possible to switch directly between Quick Menu mode and Main Menu mode.
[Main Menu]
is used for programming all parameters. The main menu parameters can be accessed immediately unless a
password has been created via par.0-60 Main Menu Password, par.0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Pass-

How to Program
word,par.0-65 Personal Menu Password or par.0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Password. For the majority
of TR200 applications, it is not necessary to access the Main Menu parameters but instead the Quick Menu,
Quick Set-up and Function Set-up provide the simplest and quickest access to parameters that are typically
required.
It is possible to switch directly between Main Menu mode and Quick Menu mode.
A parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The parameter shortcut
allows direct access to any parameter.
[Alarm Log]
displays an Alarm list of the five latest alarms (numbered A1-A5). To obtain additional details about an alarm,
use the arrow keys to navigate to the alarm number and press [OK]. Information is displayed about the condition
of the adjustable frequency drive before it enters alarm mode.
The alarm log button on the keypad allows access to both alarm log and maintenance log.
[Back]
reverts to the previous step or layer in the navigation structure.
[Cancel]
last change or command will be cancelled as long as the display has not been changed.
[Info]
displays information about a command, parameter, or function in any display window. [Info] provides detailed
information when needed.
Exit Info mode by pressing either [Info], [Back], or [Cancel].
Navigation Keys
The four navigation arrows are used to navigate be-
tween the different choices available in [Quick
Menu], [Main Menu] and [Alarm Log]. Use the keys
to move the cursor.
[OK] is used for choosing a parameter marked by the

cursor and for enabling the change of a parameter.

How to Program
Operation Keys for local control are found at the bot-

tom of the control panel.
[Hand On]
enables control of the adjustable frequency drive via the GLCP. [Hand On] also starts the motor, and it is now
possible to enter the motor speed data by means of the arrow keys. The key can be selected as Enable [1] or
Disable [0] via par.0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP.
The following control signals will still be active when [Hand On] is activated:
[Hand On] - [Off] - [Auto on]
Reset
Coasting stop inverse
Reversing
Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb
Stop command from serial communication
Quick stop
DC brake
NOTE: External stop signals activated by means of control signals or a serial bus will override a start command
via the keypad.
[Off]
stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as Enable [1] or Disable [0] via par.0-41 [Off] Key on LCP. If
no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is inactive the motor can only be stopped by disconnecting
the line power supply.
[Auto on]
enables the adjustable frequency drive to be controlled via the control terminals and/or serial communication.
When a start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the bus, the adjustable frequency drive will start.
The key can be selected as Enable [1] or Disable [0] via par.0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP.
NOTE: An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs has higher priority than the control keys [Hand
on] [Auto on].
[Reset]
is used for resetting the adjustable frequency drive after an alarm (trip). It can be selected as Enable [1] or
Disable [0] via par.0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.
The parameter shortcut can be carried out by holding down the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The parameter
shortcut allows direct access to any parameter.

How to Program
Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings between Multiple Adjustable Frequency Drives
Once the set-up of an adjustable frequency drive is

complete, we recommend that you store the data in
the keypad or on a PC via MCT 10 Set-up Software
Tool.
Data storage in keypad:

1. Go to par.0-50 LCP Copy
2. Press the [OK] key.
3. Select All to keypad
All parameter settings are now stored in the keypad indicated by the progress bar. When 100% is reached, press
[OK].
NOTE
Stop the motor before performing this operation.
You can now connect the keypad to another adjustable frequency drive and copy the parameter settings to this
adjustable frequency drive as well.
Data transfer from the keypad to the adjustable frequency drive:

1. Go to par.0-50 LCP Copy
3. Select All from keypad
The parameter settings stored in the keypad are now transferred to the adjustable frequency drive indicated by
the progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].
NOTE
Stop the motor before performing this operation.

How to Program
Parameter Set-up
The adjustable frequency drive can be used for practically all assignments, thus offering a significant number
of parameters. The series offers a choice between two programming modes - the Quick Menu mode and the
Main Menu mode.
The latter provides access to all parameters. The former takes the user through a few parameters making it
possible to program the majority of TR200 applications.
Regardless of the mode of programming, you can change a parameter both in quick menu mode and in main
menu mode.
Quick Menu mode

Parameter data
The keypad provides access to all parameters listed under the quick menus. To set parameters using the [Quick
Menu] button - enter or change parameter data or settings in accordance with the following procedure:
1. Press Quick Menu button
2. Use the [] and [] buttons to find the parameter you want to change
3. Press [OK]
4. Use [] and [] buttons to select the correct parameter setting
5. Press [OK]
6. To move to a different digit within a parameter setting, use the [] and [] buttons
7. Highlighted area indicates digit selected for change
8. Press [Cancel] button to disregard change, or press [OK] to accept change and enter the new setting
Example of changing parameter data

Assume parameter 22-60 is set to [Off]. However, you want to monitor the fan belt condition - non-broken or
broken - according to the following procedure:
1. Press Quick Menu key

2. Choose Function Set-ups with the [] button
3. Press [OK]
4. Choose Application Settings with the [] button
5. Press [OK]
6. Press [OK] again for Fan Functions
7. Choose Broken Belt Function by pressing [OK]
8. With [] button, choose [2] Trip
The adjustable frequency drive will now trip if a broken fan belt is detected.
Select [My Personal Menu] to display personal parameters:

Select [My Personal Menu] to display only the parameters, which have been pre-selected and programmed as
personal parameters. For example, you may have pre-programmed personal parameters to be in My Personal
Menu during factory commissioning to make on-site commissioning/fine tuning simpler. These parameters are
selected in par.0-25 My Personal Menu. Up to 20 different parameters can be programmed in this menu.

How to Program
Select [Changes Made] to get information about:

The last 10 changes. Use the up/down navigation keys to scroll between the last 10 changed parameters.
The changes made since default setting.
Select [Loggings]:
to get information about the display line readouts. The information is shown as graphs.
Only display parameters selected in par.0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small and par.0-24 Display Line 3 Large can be
viewed. It is possible to store up to 120 samples in the memory for later reference.
Quick Setup
Efficient Parameter Set-up for TR200 Applications:
The parameters can easily be set up for the vast majority of the TR200 applications only by using the [Quick
Set-up] option.
After pressing [Quick Menu], the different choices in the quick menu are listed. See also figure 6.1 below and
tables Q3-1 to Q3-4 in the following Function Set-ups section.
Example of using the Quick Set-up option:

Assume you want to set the ramp-down time to 100 seconds!
1. Select [Quick Setup]. The first par.0-01 Language in Quick Set-up appears
2. Press [] repeatedly until par.3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time appears with the default setting of 20 seconds
3. Press [OK]
4. Use the [] button to highlight the third digit before the comma
5. Change '0' to '1' by using the [] button
6. Use the [] button to highlight the digit '2'
7. Change '2' to '0' with the [] button
8. Press [OK]
The new ramp-down time is now set to 100 seconds.
It is recommended to do the set-up in the order listed.
NOTE: A complete description of the function is found in the parameter sections of this manual.
Figure 3. 6: Quick Menu view.
The Quick Set-up menu gives access to the 18 most important set-up parameters of the adjustable frequency
drive. After programming, the adjustable frequency drive will, in most cases, be ready for operation. The 18
Quick Set-up parameters are shown in the table below. A complete description of the function is given in the
parameter description sections of this manual.

How to Program
Parameter [Units]
par.0-01 Language
par.1-20 Motor Power [kW] [kW]
par.1-21 Motor Power [HP] [HP]
par.1-22 Motor Voltage* [V]
par.1-23 Motor Frequency [Hz]
par.1-24 Motor Current [A]
par.1-25 Motor Nominal Speed [RPM]
par.1-28 Motor Rotation Check [Hz]
par.3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time [s]
par.3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time [s]
par.4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] [RPM]
par.4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]* [Hz]
par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] [RPM]
par.4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]* [Hz]
par.3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] [RPM]
par.3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]* [Hz]
Par.5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
par.5-40 Function Relay**
Table 3. 1: Quick Set-up parameters
*The display showing depends on choices made in ** par.5-40 Function Relay, is an array, where one
par.0-02 Motor Speed Unit and par.0-03 Regional Set- may choose between Relay1 [0] or Relay2 [1]. Stand-
tings. The default settings of par.0-02 Motor Speed ard setting is Relay1 [0] with the default choice Alarm
Unit and par.0-03 Regional Settings depend on which [9].
region of the world the adjustable frequency drive is See the parameter description in the section Com-
supplied to but can be re-programmed as required. monly Used Parameters.
For a detailed information about settings and programming, please see the TR200 Programming Guide
NOTE: If [No Operation] is selected in par.5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input, no connection to +24 V on terminal 27
is necessary to enable start.
If [Coast Inverse] (factory default value) is selected in par.5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input, a connection to +24 V
is necessary to enable start.
Function Set-ups
The Function set-up provides quick and easy access to all parameters required for the majority of TR200 appli-
cations including most VAV and CAV supply and return fans, cooling tower fans, primary, secondary and
condenser water pumps and other pump, fan and compressor applications.

How to Program
How to access Function set-up - example
130BT110.10
130BT114.10
Figure 3. 7: Step 1: Turn on the adjustable frequency Figure 3. 11: Step 5: Use the up/down navigation
drive (yellow LED lights) keys to scroll down to i.e. 03-11 Analog Outputs. Press
[OK].
130BT111.10
130BT115.10
Figure 3. 8: Step 2: Press the [Quick Menus] button
(quick menu choices appear). Figure 3. 12: Step 6: Choose par. 6-50. Press [OK].
130BT112.10
130BT116.10
Figure 3. 9: Step 3: Use the up/down navigation keys Figure 3. 13: Step 7: Use the up/down navigation
to scroll down to Function set-ups. Press [OK]. keys to select between the different choices. Press
[OK].
130BT113.10
Figure 3. 10: Step 4: Function set-ups choices appear.

Choose 03-1 General Settings. Press [OK].

How to Program
Function Set-ups parameters

The Function Set-ups parameters are grouped in the following way:
Q3-1 General Settings

Q3-10 Adv. Motor Set- Q3-11 Analog Output Q3-12 Clock Settings Q3-13 Display Settings
tings
par.1-90 Motor Thermal par.6-50 Terminal 42 Out- par.0-70 Date and Time par.0-20 Display Line 1.1
Protection put Small
par.1-93 Thermistor par.6-51 Terminal 42 Out- par.0-71 Date Format Par.0-21 Display Line 1.2
Source put Min Scale Small
par.1-29 Automatic Mo- par.6-52 Terminal 42 Out- par.0-72 Time Format Par.0-22 Display Line 1.3
tor Adaptation (AMA) put Max Scale Small
par.14-01 Switching Fre- par.0-74 DST/Summer- Par.0-23 Display Line 2
quency time Large
par.4-53 Warning Speed par.0-76 DST/Summer- Par.0-24 Display Line 3
High time Start Large
par.0-77 DST/Summer- par.0-37 Display Text 1
time End
par.0-38 Display Text 2
par.0-39 Display Text 3
Q3-2 Open-loop Settings

Q3-20 Digital Reference Q3-21 Analog Reference
par.3-02 Minimum Reference par.3-02 Minimum Reference
par.3-03 Maximum Reference par.3-03 Maximum Reference
par.3-10 Preset Reference par.6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
par.5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input par.6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
par.5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input par.6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
Par.5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input par.6-13 Terminal 53 High Current
par.6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
par.6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value

How to Program
Q3-3 Closed-loop Settings

Q3-30 Single Zone Int. Setpoint Q3-31 Single Zone Ext. Setpoint
par.1-00 Configuration Mode par.1-00 Configuration Mode
Par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit Par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit
par.20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb. par.20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb.
par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb. par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.
par.6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current par.6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
par.6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value par.6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
par.6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value par.6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
par.6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant par.6-13 Terminal 53 High Current
par.6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero par.6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
par.6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time par.6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value
par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function par.6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current
par.20-21 Setpoint 1 par.6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
par.20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control par.6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
par.20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM] par.6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant
par.20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz] par.6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero
par.20-93 PID Proportional Gain par.6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time
par.20-94 PID Integral Time par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
par.20-70 Closed-loop Type par.20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control
par.20-71 PID Performance par.20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM]
par.20-72 PID Output Change par.20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz]
par.20-73 Minimum Feedback Level par.20-93 PID Proportional Gain
par.20-74 Maximum Feedback Level par.20-94 PID Integral Time
par.20-79 PID Autotuning par.20-70 Closed-loop Type
par.20-71 PID Performance
par.20-72 PID Output Change
par.20-73 Minimum Feedback Level
par.20-74 Maximum Feedback Level
par.20-79 PID Autotuning

How to Program
Q3-32 Multi Zone / Adv

par.1-00 Configuration Mode
par.3-15 Reference 1 Source
par.3-16 Reference 2 Source
par.20-00 Feedback 1 Source
par.20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion
par.20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit
Par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit
par.20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb.
par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.
par.6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
par.6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
par.6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
par.6-13 Terminal 53 High Current
par.6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant
par.6-17 Terminal 53 Live Zero
par.6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage
par.6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage
par.6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current
par.6-23 Terminal 54 High Current
par.6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant
par.6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero
par.6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time
par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
par.4-56 Warning Feedback Low
par.4-57 Warning Feedback High
par.20-20 Feedback Function
par.20-21 Setpoint 1
par.20-22 Setpoint 2
par.20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control
par.20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM]
par.20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz]
par.20-93 PID Proportional Gain
par.20-94 PID Integral Time
par.20-70 Closed-loop Type
par.20-71 PID Performance
par.20-72 PID Output Change
par.20-73 Minimum Feedback Level
par.20-74 Maximum Feedback Level
par.20-79 PID Autotuning

How to Program
Q3-4 Application Settings

Q3-40 Fan Functions Q3-41 Pump Functions Q3-42 Compressor Functions
par.22-60 Broken Belt Function par.22-22 Low Speed Detection par.1-03 Torque Characteristics
par.22-61 Broken Belt Torque par.22-23 No-Flow Function par.1-71 Start Delay
par.22-62 Broken Belt Delay par.22-24 No-Flow Delay par.22-75 Short Cycle Protection
par.4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set- par.22-40 Minimum Run Time par.22-76 Interval between Starts
up
par.1-03 Torque Characteristics par.22-41 Minimum Sleep Time par.22-77 Minimum Run Time
par.22-22 Low Speed Detection par.22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM] par.5-01 Terminal 27 Mode
par.22-23 No-Flow Function par.22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz] par.5-02 Terminal 29 Mode
par.22-24 No-Flow Delay par.22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Differ- Par.5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
ence
par.22-40 Minimum Run Time par.22-45 Setpoint Boost par.5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input
par.22-41 Minimum Sleep Time par.22-46 Maximum Boost Time par.5-40 Function Relay
par.22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM] par.1-73 Flying Start
par.22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz] par.1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM]
par.22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Differ- par.1-03 Torque Characteristics par.1-87 Trip Speed Low [Hz]
ence
par.22-45 Setpoint Boost par.1-73 Flying Start
par.22-46 Maximum Boost Time
par.2-10 Brake Function
Par.2-16 AC Brake Max. Current
par.2-17 Over-voltage Control
par.1-73 Flying Start
par.1-71 Start Delay
par.1-80 Function at Stop
par.2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current
par.4-10 Motor Speed Direction
See also for a detailed description of the Function Setups parameter groups.
Main Menu Mode

Select main menu mode by pressing the [Main Menu]
key. The readout below appears on the display.
The middle and bottom sections on the display show
a list of parameter groups which can be chosen by
toggling the up and down buttons.
Each parameter has a name and number which remain the same regardless of the programming mode. In main
menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups. The first digit of the parameter number (from the left)
indicates the parameter group number.
All parameters can be changed in the main menu. However, depending on the choice of configuration (par.
1-00 Configuration Mode), some parameters can be hidden.

How to Program
Parameter Selection
In main menu mode, the parameters are divided into Group no. Parameter group:
groups. You select a parameter group by means of 0 Operation/Display
the navigation keys. 1 Load/Motor
2 Brakes
The following parameter groups are accessible: 3 References/Ramps
4 Limits/Warnings
5 Digital In/Out
6 Analog In/Out
8 Comm. and Options
11 LonWorks
13 Smart Logic
14 Special Functions
15 Drive Information
16 Data Readouts
18 Data Readouts 2
20 Drive Closed-loop
21 Ext. Closed-loop
22 Application Functions
23 Time-based Functions
24 Application Functions 2
After selecting a parameter group, choose a param-

eter by means of the navigation keys.
The middle section on the display shows the param-
eter number and name as well as the selected pa-
rameter value.
Changing Data
The procedure for changing data is the same whether you select a parameter in the quick menu or the main
menu mode. Press [OK] to change the selected parameter.
The procedure for changing data depends on whether the selected parameter represents a numerical data value
or a text value.

How to Program
Changing a Text Value

If the selected parameter is a text value, change the
text value by means of the [] [] navigation keys.
The up key increases the value, and the down key de-
creases the value. Place the cursor on the value you
want to save and press [OK].
Changing a Group of Numeric Data Values

If the chosen parameter represents a numeric data
value, change the chosen data value by means of the
[] [] navigation keys as well as the [] [] naviga-
tion keys. Use the [] [] navigation keys to move the
cursor horizontally.
Use the [] [] navigation keys to change the data

value. The up key enlarges the data value, and the
down key reduces the data value. Place the cursor on
the value you want to save and press [OK].
Changing a Data Value, Step-by-Step

Certain parameters can be changed step by step or infinitely varying. This applies to par.1-20 Motor Power
[kW], par.1-22 Motor Voltage and par.1-23 Motor Frequency.
The parameters are changed both as a group of numeric data values and as numeric data values infinitely
varying.
Readout and Programming of Indexed Parameters

Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack.
par.15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code to par.15-33 Alarm Log: Date and Time contain a fault log which can be read
out. Choose a parameter, press [OK], and use the up/down navigation keys to scroll through the value log.
Use par.3-10 Preset Reference as another example:

Choose the parameter, press [OK], and use the up/down navigation keys to scroll through the indexed values.
To change the parameter value, select the indexed value and press [OK]. Change the value by using the up/down
keys. Press [OK] to accept the new setting. Press [CANCEL] to abort. Press [Back] to leave the parameter.

How to Program
Initialization to Default Settings

Initialize the adjustable frequency drive to default settings in two ways:
Recommended initialization (via par.14-22 Operation Mode)
1. Select par.14-22 Operation Mode

2. Press [OK]
3. Select Initialization
4. Press [OK]
5. Cut off the line power supply and wait until the display turns off.
6. Reconnect the line power supply - the adjustable frequency drive is now reset.
7. Change par.14-22 Operation Mode back to Normal Operation.
NOTE
Resets parameters selected in Personal Menu with default factory setting.
par.14-22 Operation Mode initializes all except:

par.14-50 RFI 1
par.8-30 Protocol
par.8-31 Address
par.8-32 Baud Rate
par.8-35 Minimum Response Delay
par.8-36 Maximum Response Delay
par.8-37 Maximum Inter-Char Delay
par.15-00 Operating Hours to par.15-05 Over Volts
par.15-20 Historic Log: Event to par.15-22 Historic Log: Time
par.15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code to par.15-32 Alarm Log: Time
Manual initialization
1. Disconnect from the line power and wait until the display turns off.
2a. Press [Status] - [Main Menu] - [OK] at the same time while powering up for LCP 102, Graphical Display
2b. Press [Menu] while powering up for LCP 101, Numerical Display
3. Release the keys after 5 s.
4. The adjustable frequency drive is now programmed according to default settings.
This procedure initializes all except: par.15-00 Operating Hours; par.15-03 Power-ups; par.15-04 Over Temps; par.15-05 Over Volts.
NOTE
When you carry out manual initialization, you also reset serial communication, par.14-50 RFI 1 and fault log settings.
Removes parameters selected in par.25-00 Cascade Controller.
NOTE
After initialization and power cycling, the display will not show any information until after a couple of minutes.

Parameter Description
Parameter Selection
Main Menu Structure
Parameters for the adjustable frequency drive are grouped into various parameter groups for easy selection of
the correct parameters for optimized operation of the adjustable frequency drive.
The vast majority of TR200 applications can be programmed using the Quick Menu button and selecting the
parameters under Quick Set-up and Function Set-ups.
Descriptions and default settings of parameters may be found under the section Parameter Lists at the back of
this manual.
0-xx Operation/Display 10-xx CAN Serial Communication Bus

1-xx Load/Motor 11-xx LonWorks
2-xx Brakes 13-xx Smart Logic Controller
3-xx Reference/Ramps 14-xx Special Functions
4-xx Limits/ Warnings 15-xx Adjustable Frequency Drive Information
5-xx Digital In/Out 16-xx Data Readouts
6-xx Analog In/Out 18-xx Info & Readouts
8-xx Comm. and Options 20-xx Adjustable Frequency Drive Closed-loop
9-xx Profibus 21-xx Ext. Closed-loop
22-xx Application Functions
23-xx Time Based Functions
24-xx Application Functions 2
Main Menu - Operation and Display - Group 0

0-** Operation / Display
Parameters related to the fundamental functions of the adjustable frequency drive, function of the keypad but-
tons and configuration of the keypad display.
0-0* Basic Settings

Parameter group for basic adjustable frequency drive settings.

0-01 Language
Option: Function:
Defines the language to be used in the display.
The adjustable frequency drive can be delivered with 2 different lan-
guage packages. English and German are included in both packages.
English cannot be erased or manipulated.
[0] * English Part of Language packages 1 - 2
[1] Deutsch Part of Language packages 1 - 2
[2] Francais Part of Language package 1
[3] Dansk Part of Language package 1
[4] Spanish Part of Language package 1
[5] Italiano Part of Language package 1
[6] Svenska Part of Language package 1
[7] Nederlands Part of Language package 1
[10] Chinese Language package 2
[20] Suomi Part of Language package 1
[22] English US Part of Language package 1
[27] Greek Part of Language package 1
[28] Bras.port Part of Language package 1
[36] Slovenian Part of Language package 1
[39] Korean Part of Language package 2
[40] Japanese Part of Language package 2
[41] Turkish Part of Language package 1
[42] Trad.Chinese Part of Language package 2
[43] Bulgarian Part of Language package 1
[44] Srpski Part of Language package 1
[45] Romanian Part of Language package 1
[46] Magyar Part of Language package 1
[47] Czech Part of Language package 1
[48] Polski Part of Language package 1
[49] Russian Part of Language package 1
[50] Thai Part of Language package 2
[51] Bahasa Indonesia Part of Language package 2
[99] Unknown

0-02 Motor Speed Unit

Option: Function:
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
The display showing depends on settings in par.0-02 Motor Speed Unit
and par.0-03 Regional Settings. The default setting of par.0-02 Motor
Speed Unit and par.0-03 Regional Settings depends on which region of
the world the adjustable frequency drive is supplied to, but can be re-
programmed as required.
NOTE
Changing the Motor Speed Unit will reset certain parameters to their initial
value. It is recommended to select the motor speed unit first before modifying
other parameters.
[0] RPM Selects display of motor speed variables and parameters (i.e. references,
feedbacks and limits) in terms of motor speed (RPM).
[1] * Hz Selects display of motor speed variables and parameters (i.e., referen-
ces, feedbacks and limits) in terms of output frequency to the motor (Hz).
0-03 Regional Settings

Option: Function:
The display showing depends on settings in par.0-02 Motor Speed Unit
and par.0-03 Regional Settings. The default setting of par.0-02 Motor
Speed Unit and par.0-03 Regional Settings depends on which region of
the world the adjustable frequency drive is supplied to but can be re-
programmed as required.
[0] * International Sets par.1-20 Motor Power [kW] units to [kW] and the default value of
par.1-23 Motor Frequency [50 Hz].
[1] North America Sets par.1-21 Motor Power [HP] units to HP and the default value of par.
1-23 Motor Frequency to 60 Hz.
The setting not used is made invisible.
0-04 Operating State at Power-up

Option: Function:
Select the operating mode upon reconnection of the adjustable frequen-
cy drive to AC line voltage after power-down when operating in hand
(local) mode.
[0] * Resume Resumes operation of the adjustable frequency drive maintaining the
same local reference and the same start/stop condition (applied by [Hand
On]/[Off] on the keypad or Hand Start via a digital input as before the
adjustable frequency drive was powered down.
[1] Forced stop, ref=old Uses saved reference [1] to stop the adjustable frequency drive but at the
same time retain in memory the local speed reference prior to power-
down. After AC line voltage is reconnected and after receiving a start
command (using the keypad [Hand On] button or Hand Start command
via a digital input), the adjustable frequency drive restarts and operates
at the retained speed reference.

0-05 Local Mode Unit

Option: Function:
Defines if the local reference unit should be displayed in terms of the
motor shaft speed (in RPM/Hz) or as percent.
[0] * As Motor Speed Unit

[1] %
0-1* Set-up Operations

Define and control the individual parameter set-ups.
The adjustable frequency drive has four parameter set-ups that can be programmed independently of each
other. This makes the adjustable frequency drive very flexible and able to meet the requirements of many dif-
ferent TR200 system control schemes often saving the cost of external control equipment. For example, these
can be used to program the adjustable frequency drive to operate according to one control scheme in one set-
up (e.g., daytime operation) and another control scheme in another set-up (e.g., night set back). Alternatively,
they can be used by an AHU or packaged unit OEM to identically program all their factory-fitted adjustable
frequency drives to the same parameters on different equipment models within a range, and then during pro-
duction/commissioning, only need a specific set-up selection depending on which model the adjustable fre-
quency drive is installed on within that range.
The active set-up (i.e., the set-up in which the adjustable frequency drive is currently operating) can be selected
in par.0-10 Active Set-up and is displayed in the keypad. Using Multi set-up, it is possible to switch between set-
ups with the adjustable frequency drive running or stopped, via digital input or serial communication commands
(e.g., for night set back). If it is necessary to change set-ups while running, ensure par.0-12 This Set-up Linked
to is programmed as required. For the majority of TR200 applications, it will not be necessary to program par.
0-12 This Set-up Linked to even if a set-up must be changed while running. For very complex applications which
use the full flexibility of the multiple set-ups, it may be required. Using par.0-11 Programming Set-up, it is pos-
sible to edit parameters in any of the set-ups during adjustable frequency drive operation in its active set-up;
this set-up can be different than the one being edited. Using par.0-51 Set-up Copy, it is possible to copy param-
eter settings between the set-ups to enable quicker commissioning if similar parameter settings are required in
different set-ups.

0-10 Active Set-up

Option: Function:
Select the set-up in which the adjustable frequency drive is to operate.
Use par.0-51 Set-up Copy to copy a set-up to one or all other set-ups. To
avoid conflicting settings of the same parameter within two different set-
ups, link the set-ups together using par.0-12 This Set-up Linked to. Stop
the adjustable frequency drive before switching between set-ups, where
parameters marked not changeable during operation have different
values.
Parameters that are not changeable during operation are marked
FALSE in the parameter lists in the section Parameter Lists.
[0] Factory setup Cannot be changed. It contains the Trane data set, and can be used as a
data source when returning the other set-ups to a known state.
[1] * Set-up 1 Set-up 1 [1] to Set-up 4 [4] are the four separate parameter set-ups within
which all parameters can be programmed.
[2] Set-up 2
[3] Set-up 3
[4] Set-up 4
[9] Multi setup Is used for remote selection of set-ups using digital inputs and the serial
communication port. This set-up uses the settings from par.0-12 This
Set-up Linked to.
0-11 Programming Set-up

Option: Function:
Select the set-up to be edited (i.e., programmed) during operation; either
the active set-up or one of the inactive set-ups. The set-up number being
edited is displayed in the keypad in (brackets).
[0] Factory setup cannot be edited, but it is useful as a data source to return the other set-
ups to a known state.
[1] Set-up 1 Set-up 1 [1] to Set-up 4 [4] can be edited freely during operation, inde-
pendently of the active set-up.
[2] Set-up 2
[3] Set-up 3
[4] Set-up 4
[9] * Active Set-up (i.e., the set-up in which the adjustable frequency drive is operating) can
also be edited during operation. Editing parameters in the chosen set-up
would normally be done from the keypad but it is also possible from any
of the serial communication ports.
0-12 This Set-up Linked to

Option: Function:
This parameter only needs to be programmed if changing set-ups is re-
quired while the motor is running. It ensures that parameters that are
'not changeable during operation' have the same setting in all relevant
set-ups.

To enable conflict-free changes from one set-up to another while the ad-
justable frequency drive is running, link set-ups containing parameters
that are not changeable during operation. The link will ensure the proper
synchronization of the not changeable during operation parameter val-
ues when moving from one set-up to another during operation. Not
changeable during operation parameters can be identified by the label
FALSE in the parameter lists in the section Parameter Lists.
The par.0-12 This Set-up Linked to feature is used when Multi set-up in
par.0-10 Active Set-up is selected. Multi set-up can be used to move from
one set-up to another during operation (i.e., while the motor is running).
Example:
Use Multi set-up to shift from Set-up 1 to Set-up 2 while the motor is
running. Program parameters in Set-up 1 first, then ensure that Set-up 1
and Set-up 2 are synchronized (or linked). Synchronization can be per-
formed in two ways:
1. Change the edit set-up to Set-up 2 [2] in par.0-11 Programming Set-
up and set par.0-12 This Set-up Linked to to Set-up 1 [1]. This will start
the linking (synchronizing) process.
OR 130BP075.10
2. While still in Set-up 1, using par.0-50 LCP Copy, copy Set-up 1 to Set-
up 2. Then set par.0-12 This Set-up Linked to to Set-up 2 [2]. This will start
the linking process.
130BP076.10
After the link is complete, par.0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups will read {1,2}
to indicate that all not changeable during operation parameters are now
the same in Set-up 1 and Set-up 2. If there are changes to a not change-
able during operation parameter, e.g. par.1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) in
Set-up 2, they will also be changed automatically in Set-up 1. A switch
between Set-up 1 and Set-up 2 during operation is now possible.
[0] * Not linked

[1] Set-up 1
[2] Set-up 2
[3] Set-up 3
[4] Set-up 4
0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups

Array [5]
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 255 N/A] View a list of all the set-ups linked by means of par.0-12 This Set-up
Linked to. The parameter has one index for each parameter set-up. The
parameter value displayed for each index represents which set-ups are
linked to that parameter set-up.
Index keypad value

0 {0}
1 {1,2}
2 {1,2}
3 {3}
4 {4}
Table 4. 2: Example: Set-up 1 and Set-up 2 are linked
0-14 Readout: Prog. Set-ups / Channel

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [-2147483648 - View the setting of par.0-11 Programming Set-up for each of the four
2147483647 N/A] different communication channels. When the number is displayed in
hex, as it is in the keypad, each number represents one channel.
Numbers 1-4 represent a set-up number; F means factory setting; and
A means active set-up. The channels are, from right to left: keypad, Ad-
justable Frequency Drive bus, USB, HPFB1.5.
Example: The number AAAAAA21h means that the Adjustable Frequen-
cy Drive bus selected Set-up 2 in par.0-11 Programming Set-up, the
keypad selected Set-up 1 and all others used the active set-up.
0-2* keypad Display

Define the variables displayed in the Graphical Local Control Panel.
NOTE
Refer to par.0-37 Display Text 1, par.0-38 Display Text 2 and par.0-39 Display Text 3 for information on how to write
display texts.
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

Option: Function:
Select a variable for display in line 1, left position.
[0] None No display value selected

[37] Display Text 1 Enables an individual text string to be written, for display in the keypad
or to be read via serial communication.
[89] Date and Time Readout Displays the current date and time.
[953] Profibus Warning Word Displays Profibus communication warnings.
[1005] Readout Transmit Error View the number of CAN control transmission errors since the last pow-
Counter er-up.
[1006] Readout Receive Error View the number of CAN control receipt errors since the last power-up.
Counter
[1007] Readout Bus Off Counter View the number of Bus Off events since the last power-up.
[1013] Warning Parameter View a DeviceNet-specific warning word. One separate bit is assigned to
every warning.
[1115] LON Warning Word Shows the LON-specific warnings.
[1117] XIF Revision Shows the version of the external interface file of the Neuron C chip on
the LON option.
[1118] LonWorks Revision Shows the software version of the application program of the Neuron C
chip on the LON option.
[1501] Running Hours View the number of running hours of the motor.
[1502] kWh Counter View the line power consumption in kWh.
[1600] Control Word View the control word sent from the adjustable frequency drive via the
serial communication port in hex code.
[1601] Reference [Unit] Total reference (sum of digital/analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch up and

slow-down) in selected unit.
[1602] * Reference % Total reference (sum of digital/analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch up and

slow-down) in percent.
[1603] Status Word Present status word
[1605] Main Actual Value [%] View the two-byte word sent with the status word to the bus master re-
porting the main actual value.
[1609] Custom Readout View the user-defined readouts as defined in par.0-30 Custom Readout
Unit, par.0-31 Custom Readout Min Value and par.0-32 Custom Readout
Max Value.
[1610] Power [kW] Actual power consumed by the motor in kW.
[1611] Power [hp] Actual power consumed by the motor in HP.
[1612] Motor voltage Voltage supplied to the motor.
[1613] Frequency Motor frequency, i.e., the output frequency from the adjustable frequen-
cy drive in Hz.

[1614] Motor Current Phase current of the motor measured as effective value.
[1615] Frequency [%] Motor frequency, i.e., the output frequency from the adjustable frequen-
cy drive in percent.
[1616] Torque [Nm] Present motor load as a percentage of the rated motor torque.
[1617] Speed [RPM] Motor speed reference. Actual speed will depend on slip compensation
being used (compensation set in par.1-62 Slip Compensation). If not
used, actual speed will be the value read in the display minus motor slip.
[1618] Motor Thermal Thermal load on the motor, calculated by the ETR function. See also pa-
rameter group 1-9* Motor Temperature.
[1622] Torque [%] Shows the actual torque produced, in percentage.
[1626] Power Filtered [kW]

[1627] Power Filtered [hp]
[1630] DC Link Voltage Intermediate circuit voltage in the adjustable frequency drive.
[1632] Brake Energy /s Present braking energy transferred to an external brake resistor.
Stated as an instantaneous value.
[1633] Brake Energy /2 min Braking energy transferred to an external brake resistor. The mean pow-
er is calculated continuously for the most recent 120 seconds.
[1634] Heatsink Temp. Present heatsink temperature of the adjustable frequency drive. The cut-
out limit is 203 41F [95 5C]; cutting back in occurs at 158 41F
[70 5C].
[1635] Inverter Thermal Percentage load of the inverters
[1636] Inv. Nom. Current Nominal current of the adjustable frequency drive.
[1637] Inv. Max. Current Maximum current of the adjustable frequency drive.
[1638] SL Controller State State of the event executed by the control
[1639] Control Card Temp. Temperature of the control card.
[1650] External Reference Sum of the external reference as a percentage, i.e., the sum of analog/
pulse/bus.
[1652] Feedback [Unit] Reference value from programmed digital input(s).
[1653] Digi Pot Reference View the contribution of the digital potentiometer to the actual reference
Feedback.
[1654] Feedback 1 [Unit] View the value of Feedback 1. See also par. 20-0*.
[1658] PID Output [%] Returns the Drive Closed-loop PID controller output value in percent.
[1660] Digital Input Displays the status of the digital inputs. Signal low = 0; Signal high = 1.
Regarding order, see par.16-60 Digital Input. Bit 0 is at the extreme right.
[1661] Terminal 53 Switch Set- Setting of input terminal 53. Current = 0; Voltage = 1.
ting

[1662] Analog Input 53 Actual value at input 53 either as a reference or protection value.
[1663] Terminal 54 Switch Set- Setting of input terminal 54. Current = 0; Voltage = 1.
ting
[1664] Analog Input 54 Actual value at input 54 either as reference or protection value.
[1665] Analog Output 42 [mA] Actual value at output 42 in mA. Use par.6-50 Terminal 42 Output to se-
lect the variable to be represented by output 42.
[1666] Digital Output [bin] Binary value of all digital outputs.
[1667] Pulse Input #29 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency applied at terminal 29 as a pulse input.
[1668] Pulse Input #33 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency applied at terminal 33 as a pulse input.
[1669] Pulse Output #27 [Hz] Actual value of pulses applied to terminal 27 in digital output mode.
[1670] Pulse Output #29 [Hz] Actual value of pulses applied to terminal 29 in digital output mode.
[1671] Relay Output [bin] View the setting of all relays.
[1672] Counter A View the present value of Counter A.
[1673] Counter B View the present value of Counter B.
[1675] Analog In X30/11 Actual value of the signal on input X30/11 (General Purpose I/O Card.
Option)
[1676] Analog In X30/12 Actual value of the signal on input X30/12 (General Purpose I/O Card.
Optional)
[1677] Analog Out X30/8 [mA] Actual value at output X30/8 (General Purpose I/O Card. Optional) Use
Par. 6-60 to select the variable to be shown.
[1680] Fieldbus CTW 1 Control word (CTW) received from the bus master.
[1682] Fieldbus REF 1 Main reference value sent with control word via the serial communica-
tions network, e.g., from the BMS, PLC or other master controller.
[1684] Comm. Option Status Extended serial communication option status word.
[1685] FC Port CTW 1 Control word (CTW) received from the bus master.
[1686] FC Port REF 1 Status word (STW) sent to the bus master.
[1690] Alarm Word One or more alarms in a Hex code (used for serial communications)
[1691] Alarm word 2 One or more alarms in a Hex code (used for serial communications)
[1692] Warning Word One or more warnings in a Hex code (used for serial communications)
[1693] Warning word 2 One or more warnings in a Hex code (used for serial communications)
[1694] Ext. Status Word One or more status conditions in a Hex code (used for serial communi-
cations)
[1695] Ext. Status Word 2 One or more status conditions in a Hex code (used for serial communi-
cations)
[1696] Maintenance Word The bits reflect the status for the programmed preventive maintenance
events in parameter group 23-1*

[1830] Analog Input X42/1 Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/1 on the Analog I/
O card.
O card.
O card.
[1833] Analog Out X42/7 [V] Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/7 on the Analog I/
O card.
[1834] Analog Out X42/9 [V] Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/9 on the Analog I/
O card.
[1835] Analog Out X42/11 [V] Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/11 on the Analog
I/O card.
[1850] Sensorless Readout [unit]

[2117] Ext. 1 Reference [Unit] The value of the reference for extended Closed-loop Controller 1
[2118] Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit] The value of the feedback signal for extended Closed-loop Controller 1
[2119] Ext. 1 Output [%] The value of the output from extended Closed-loop Controller 1
[2230] No-Flow Power The calculated No-Flow Power for the actual operating speed
[2316] Maintenance Text

[2580] Cascade Status Status for the operation of the cascade controller
[2581] Pump Status Status for the operation of each individual pump controlled by the cas-
cade controller
[3110] Bypass Status Word

[3111] Bypass Running Hours
[9913]
[9914]
[9920] HS Temp. (PC1)
[9921] HS Temp. (PC2)
[9922] HS Temp. (PC3)
[9923] HS Temp. (PC4)
[9924] HS Temp. (PC5)
[9925] HS Temp. (PC6)
[9926] HS Temp. (PC7)
[9927] HS Temp. (PC8)


Select a variable for display in line 1, middle position.
Option: Function:
[1614] * Motor Current
The options are the same as those listed in par.0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.

Option: Function:
Select a variable for display in line 1, right position.
The options are the same as those listed under 0-20.
0-23 Display Line 2 Large

Option: Function:
Select a variable for display in line 2.
The options are the same as those listed under 0-20.
0-24 Display Line 3 Large

Select a variable for display in line 3.
Option: Function:
[1502] * kWh Counter
The options are the same as listed for par.0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.
0-25 My Personal Menu

Array [20]
Range: Function:
Applica- [0 - 9999 N/A] Define up to 20 parameters to appear in the Q1 Personal Menu, accessi-
tion de- ble via the [Quick Menu] key on the keypad. The parameters will be
pend- displayed in the Q1 Personal Menu in the order they are programmed
ent* into this array parameter. Delete parameters by setting the value to
0000.
For example, this can be used to provide quick, simple access to just one
or up to 20 parameters which require changing on a regular basis (e.g.,
for plant maintenance reasons) or by an OEM to enable simple commis-
sioning of their equipment.
0-3*keypad Custom Readout

It is possible to customize the display elements for various purposes: *Custom Readout. Value proportional to
speed (linear, squared or cubed depending on unit selected in par.0-30 Custom Readout Unit) *Display Text.
Text string stored in a parameter.

Custom Readout
The calculated value to be displayed is based on settings in par.0-30 Custom Readout Unit, par.0-31 Custom
Readout Min Value (linear only), par.0-32 Custom Readout Max Value, par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
[RPM], par.4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] and actual speed.
The relation will depend on the type of unit selected in par.0-30 Custom Readout Unit:
Unit Type Speed Relation

Dimensionless Linear
Speed
Flow, volume
Flow, mass
Velocity
Length
Temperature
Pressure Quadratic
Power Cubic
0-30 Custom Readout Unit

Option: Function:
Program a value to be shown in the display of the keypad. The value has
a linear, squared or cubed relation to speed. This relation depends on
the unit selected (see table above). The actual calculated value can be
read in par.16-09 Custom Readout, and/or shown in the display by se-
lecting Custom Readout [16-09] in par.0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small to par.
0-24 Display Line 3 Large.
[0]
[1] * %
[5] PPM
[10] min
[11] RPM
[12] PULSE/s
[20] liter / sec.
[21] liter / min
[22] liter / hr.
[23] m / sec.

[24] m/min
[25] m / hr.
[30] kg / sec.
[31] kg/min
[32] kg / hr.
[33] ton / min
[34] ton / hr.
[40] m / sec.
[41] m/min
[45] m
[60] C
[70] mbar
[71] bar
[72] Pa
[73] kPa
[74] m WG
[75] mm Hg
[80] kW
[120] GPM
[121] gal / sec.
[122] gal/min
[123] gal / hr.
[124] CFM
[125] ft/s
[126] ft/min
[127] ft/h
[130] lbs / sec.
[131] lbs / min.
[132] lbs / hr.
[140] ft/s
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
[160] F
[170] psi
[171] lb/in
[172] in. wtr. gage
[173] ft WG
[174] in Hg
[180] HP

0-31 Custom Readout Min Value

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant]
tion de-
pend-
ent*
0-32 Custom Readout Max Value

Range: Function:
100.00 [Application dependant] This parameter sets the max value to be shown when the speed of the
Custom- motor has reached the set value for par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
Readou- [RPM] or par.4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] (depends on setting in
tUnit* par.0-02 Motor Speed Unit).
0-37 Display Text 1

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] In this parameter, it is possible to write an individual text string for dis-
play in the keypad or to be read via serial communication. If it is to be
displayed permanently, select Display Text 1 in par.0-20 Display Line 1.1
Small, par.0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small, par.0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
par.0-23 Display Line 2 Large or par.0-24 Display Line 3 Large. Use the
or buttons on the keypad to change a character. Use the and
buttons to move the cursor. When a character is highlighted by the cur-
sor, it can be changed. Use the or buttons on the keypad to change
a character. A character can be inserted by placing the cursor between
two characters and pressing or .
0-38 Display Text 2

Range: Function:
play in the keypad or to be read via serial communication. If to be
displayed permanently select Display Text 2 in par.0-20 Display Line 1.1
Small, par.0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small, par.0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
sor, this character can be changed. A character can be inserted by placing
the cursor between two characters and pressing or .

0-39 Display Text 3

Range: Function:
play in the keypad or to be read via serial communication. If it is to be
displayed permanently, select Display Text 3 in par.0-20 Display Line 1.1
Small,par.0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small, par.0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
sor, this character can be changed. A character can be inserted by placing
the cursor between two characters and pressing or .
keypad, 0-4*
Enable, disable and password-protect individual keys on the keypad.
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP

Option: Function:
[0] Disabled No function
[1] * Enabled [Hand on] Key enabled
[2] Password Avoid unauthorized start in hand mode. If par.0-40 [Hand on] Key on
LCPis included in the My Personal Menu, then define the password in
par.0-65 Personal Menu Password. Otherwise, define the password in
par.0-60 Main Menu Password.
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP

Option: Function:
[1] * Enabled [Off] Key is enabled
[2] Password Avoid unauthorized stop. If par.0-41 [Off] Key on LCP is included in the
My Personal Menu, then define the password in par.0-65 Personal Menu
Password. Otherwise, define the password in par.0-60 Main Menu Pass-
word.
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]

0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP

Option: Function:
[1] * Enabled [Auto on] Key is enabled
[2] Password Avoid unauthorized start in auto mode. If par.0-42 [Auto on] Key on
LCP is included in the My Personal Menu, then define the password in
par.0-65 Personal Menu Password. Otherwise, define the password in
par.0-60 Main Menu Password.
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP

Option: Function:
[1] * Enabled [Reset] Key is enabled
[2] Password Avoid unauthorized resetting. If par.0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP is included
in the par.0-25 My Personal Menu, then define the password in par.
0-65 Personal Menu Password. Otherwise, define the password in par.
0-60 Main Menu Password.
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP

Option: Function:
Press [Off] and select Disabled [0] to avoid accidental stop of the drive.
Press [Off] and select Password [2] to avoid unauthorized stop and reset
of the drive. If par.0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP is included in the quick
menu, define the password in par.0-65 Personal Menu Password.
[1] * Enabled [Off/Reset] Key is enabled
[2] Password
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]

0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP

Option: Function:
Press [Off] and select Disabled [0] to avoid accidental stop of the drive.
Press [Off] and select Password [2] to avoid unauthorized stop and reset
of the drive. If par.0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP is included in the quick
menu, define the password in par.0-65 Personal Menu Password.
[1] * Enabled [Off/Reset] Key is enabled
[2] Password
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
0-5* Copy / Save

Copy parameter settings between set-ups and to/from the keypad.
0-50 LCP Copy

Option: Function:
[0] * No copy No function
[1] All to LCP Copies all parameters in all set-ups from the adjustable frequency drive
memory to the keypad memory. For service purposes, it is recommen-
ded to copy all parameters to the keypad after commissioning.
[2] All from LCP Copies all parameters in all set-ups from the keypad memory to the ad-
justable frequency drive memory.
[3] Size indep. of LCP Copies only the parameters that are independent of the motor size. The
latter selection can be used to program several adjustable frequency
drives with the same function without disturbing motor data which are
already set.

0-51 Set-up Copy

Option: Function:
[0] * No copy No function
[1] Copy to set-up 1 Copies all parameters in the present Programming Set-up (defined in
par.0-11 Programming Set-up) to Set-up 1.
[9] Copy to all Copies the parameters in the present set-up over to each of the set-ups
1 to 4.
0-6* Password
Define password access to menus.
0-60 Main Menu Password

Range: Function:
100 N/ [0 - 999 N/A] Define the password for access to the main menu via the [Main Menu]
A* key. If par.0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password is set to Full access
[0], this parameter will be ignored.
0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password

Option: Function:
[0] * Full access Disables password defined in par.0-60 Main Menu Password.
[1] Read-only Prevent unauthorized editing of main menu parameters.
[2] No access Prevent unauthorized viewing and editing of main menu parameters.
If Full access [0] is selected then par.0-60 Main Menu Password, par.0-65 Personal Menu Password and par.
0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Password will be ignored.
0-65 Personal Menu Password

Range: Function:
200 N/ [0 - 999 N/A] Define the password for access to the My Personal Menu via the [Quick
A* Menu] key. If par.0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Password is set to
Full access [0], this parameter will be ignored.
0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Password

Option: Function:
[0] * Full access Disables password defined in par.0-65 Personal Menu Password.
[1] Read-only Prevents unauthorized editing of My Personal Menu parameters.
[2] No access Prevents unauthorized viewing and editing of My Personal Menu pa-
rameters.

If par.0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password is set to Full access [0], this parameter will be ignored.
Clock Settings, 0-7*

Set the time and date of the internal clock. The internal clock can be used, for example, for timed actions, energy
log, trend analysis, date/time stamps on alarms, logged data and preventive maintenance.
It is possible to program the clock for Daylight Saving Time/summertime, weekly working days/non-working
days including 20 exceptions (holidays, etc.). Although the clock settings can be set via the keypad, they can
also be set along with timed actions and preventative maintenance functions using the MCT10 software tool.
NOTE
The adjustable frequency drive has no backup of the clock function and the set date/time will reset to default (2000-01-01
00:00) after a power-down unless a Real Time Clock module with backup is installed. If no module with backup is
installed, it is recommended the clock function is only used if the adjustable frequency drive is integrated into the BMS
using serial communications, with the BMS maintaining synchronization of control equipment clock times. In par.
0-79 Clock Fault, it is possible to program for a warning in case the clock has not been set properly, e.g., after a power-
down.
NOTE
If mounting an Analog I/O MCB 109 option card, a battery backup of the date and time is included.
0-70 Date and Time

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
0-71 Date Format

Option: Function:
Sets the date format to be used in the keypad.
[0] * YYYY-MM-DD
[1] * DD-MM-YYYY
[2] MM/DD/YYYY
0-72 Time Format

Option: Function:
Sets the time format to be used in the keypad.
[0] * 24 h
[1] 12 h
0-74 DST/Summertime
Option: Function:
Choose how Daylight Saving Time/Summertime should be handled. For
manual DST/Summertime enter the start date and end date in par.
0-76 DST/Summertime Start and par.0-77 DST/Summertime End.
[0] * OFF
[2] Manual

0-76 DST/Summertime Start

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
0-77 DST/Summertime End

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
0-79 Clock Fault

Option: Function:
Enables or disables the clock warning when the clock has not been set,
or has been reset due to a power-down and no backup is installed.
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled
0-81 Working Days

Array with 7 elements [0] - [6] displayed below parameter number in display. Press OK and step between elements by means of
and buttons on the keypad.

Option: Function:
Specify whether each weekday is a workday or a non-workday. First el-
ement of the array is Monday. The workdays are used for timed actions.
[0] * No
[1] Yes
0-82 Additional Working Days

Array with 5 elements [0] - [4] displayed below parameter number in display. Press OK and step between elements by means of
and buttons on the keypad.

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
0-83 Additional Non-Working Days

Array with 15 elements [0] - [14] displayed below parameter number in display. Press OK and step between elements by means
of and buttons on the keypad.

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*

0-89 Date and Time Readout

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] Displays the current date and time. The date and time is updated con-
tinuously.
The clock will not begin counting until a setting different from default has
been made in par.0-70 Date and Time.
Main Menu - Load and Motor - Group 1

General Settings, 1-0*
Define whether the adjustable frequency drive operates in open-loop or closed-loop.
1-00 Configuration Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * Open-loop Motor speed is determined by applying a speed reference or by setting
desired speed when in Hand Mode.
Open-loop is also used if the adjustable frequency drive is part of a
closed-loop control system based on an external PID controller providing
a speed reference signal as output.
[3] Closed-loop Motor speed will be determined by a reference from the built-in PID con-
troller varying the motor speed as part of a closed-loop control process
(e.g., constant pressure or flow). The PID controller must be configured
in par. 20-** or via the function set-ups accessed by pressing the [Quick
Menu] button.
NOTE: This parameter cannot be changed when motor is running.
NOTE: When set for Closed-loop, the commands Reversing and Start Reversing will not reverse the direction of
the motor.
1-03 Torque Characteristics

Option: Function:
[0] * Compressor torque Compressor [0]: For speed control of screw and scroll compressors. Pro-
vides a voltage which is optimized for a constant torque load character-
istic of the motor in the entire range down to 10 Hz.
[1] Variable torque Variable Torque [1]: For speed control of centrifugal pumps and fans. Also
to be used when controlling more than one motor from the same ad-
justable frequency drive (e.g., multiple condenser fans or cooling tower
fans). Provides a voltage which is optimized for a squared torque load
characteristic of the motor.
[2] Auto Energy Optim. CT Auto Energy Optimization Compressor [2]: For optimum energy-efficient
speed control of screw and scroll compressors. Provides a voltage that
is optimized for a constant torque load characteristic of the motor in the
entire range down to 15 Hz. In addition, the AEO feature will adapt the
voltage exactly to the current load situation, thereby reducing energy
consumption and audible noise from the motor. To obtain optimal per-
formance, the motor power factor cos phi must be set correctly. This
value is set in par.14-43 Motor Cos-Phi. The parameter has a default value
which is automatically adjusted when the motor data is programmed.

These settings will typically ensure optimum motor voltage but if the
motor power factor cos phi requires tuning, an AMA function can be
carried out using par.1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA). It is very
rarely necessary to adjust the motor power factor parameter manually.
[3] * Auto Energy Optim. VT Auto Energy Optimization VT [3]: For optimum energy efficient speed con-
trol of centrifugal pumps and fans. Provides a voltage which is optimized
for a squared torque load characteristic of the motor but in addition the
AEO feature will adapt the voltage exactly to the current load situation,
thereby reducing energy consumption and audible noise from the motor.
To obtain optimal performance, the motor power factor cos phi must be
set correctly. This value is set in par.14-43 Motor Cos-Phi. The parameter
has a default value and is automatically adjusted when the motor data is
programmed. These settings will typically ensure optimum motor volt-
age but if the motor power factor cos phi requires tuning, an AMA
function can be carried out using par.1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation
(AMA). It is very rarely necessary to adjust the motor power factor pa-
rameter manually.
1-2* Motor Data

Parameter group 1-2* comprises input data from the nameplate on the connected motor.
Parameters in parameter group 1-2* cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
NOTE
Changing the value of these parameters affects the setting of other parameters.
1-20 Motor Power [kW]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
1-21 Motor Power [HP]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
1-22 Motor Voltage

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*

1-23 Motor Frequency

Range: Function:
Applica- [20 - 1000 Hz] Select the motor frequency value from the motor nameplate data.For 87
tion de- Hz operation with 230/400 V motors, set the nameplate data for 230 V/50
pend- Hz. Adapt par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] and par.3-03 Maxi-
ent* mum Reference to the 87 Hz application.
NOTE: This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
1-24 Motor Current

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
NOTE
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed

Range: Function:
Applica- [100 - 60000 RPM] Enter the nominal motor speed value from the motor nameplate data.
tion de- This data is used for calculating automatic motor compensations.
pend-
ent*
NOTE
This parameter cannot be changed while the motor is running.
1-28 Motor Rotation Check

Option: Function:
Following installation and connection of the motor, this function allows
the correct motor rotation direction to be verified. Enabling this function
overrides any bus commands or digital inputs, except External Interlock
and Safe Stop (if included).
[0] * OFF Motor Rotation Check is not active.
[1] Enabled Motor Rotation Check is enabled. Once enabled, display shows:
"Please Note! Motor may run in wrong direction".
Pressing [OK], [Back] or [Cancel] will dismiss the message and display a new message: Press [Hand on] to start
the motor. Press [Cancel] to abort. Pressing [Hand on] starts the motor at 5 Hz in forward direction and the
display shows: Motor is running. Check if motor rotation direction is correct. Press [Off] to stop the motor.
Pressing [Off] stops the motor and resets par.1-28 Motor Rotation Check. If motor rotation direction is incorrect,
two motor phase cables should be interchanged. IMPORTANT:
CAUTION
Line power must be removed before disconnecting motor phase cables.

1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

Option: Function:
The AMA function optimizes dynamic motor performance by automati-
cally optimizing the advanced motor parameters par.1-30 Stator Resist-
ance (Rs) to par.1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)) while the motor is stationary.
[0] * Off No function
[1] Enable complete AMA performs AMA of the stator resistance RS, the rotor resistance Rr, the
stator leakage reactance X1, the rotor leakage reactance X2 and the main
reactance Xh.
[2] Enable reduced AMA performs a reduced AMA of the stator resistance Rs in the system only.
Select this option if an LC filter is used between the adjustable frequency
drive and the motor.
Activate the AMA function by pressing [Hand on] after selecting [1] or [2]. See also the section Automatic Motor
Adaptation. After a normal sequence, the display will read: Press [OK] to finish AMA. After pressing the [OK]
key, the adjustable frequency drive is ready for operation.
Note:
For the best adaptation of the adjustable frequency drive, run AMA on a cold motor
AMA cannot be performed while the motor is running.
NOTE
It is important to set motor par. 1-2* Motor Data correctly, since these form part of the AMA algorithm. An AMA must
be performed to achieve optimum dynamic motor performance. It may take up to 10 min., depending on the motor
power rating.
NOTE
Avoid generating external torque during AMA
NOTE
If one of the settings in par. 1-2* Motor Data is changed, par.1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to par.1-39 Motor Poles, the
advanced motor parameters, will return to the default setting.
NOTE
Full AMA should be run without filter only while reduced AMA should be run with filter.
See section: Application Examples > Automatic Motor Adaptation in the Design Guide.
1-3* Adv. Motor Data

Parameters for advanced motor data. The motor data in par.1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to par.1-39 Motor
Poles must match the relevant motor in order to run the motor optimally. The default settings are figures based
on common motor parameter values from normal standard motors. If the motor parameters are not set correctly,
a malfunction of the adjustable frequency drive system may occur. If the motor data is not known, running an

AMA (Automatic Motor Adaptation) is recommended. See the Automatic Motor Adaptation section. The AMA
sequence will adjust all motor parameters except the moment of inertia of the rotor and the iron loss resistance
(par.1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)).
Par. 1-3* and par. 1-4* cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
Figure 4. 1: Motor equivalent diagram for an asynchronous motor
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while running.
1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
NOTE

1-39 Motor Poles

Range: Function:
Applica- [2 - 100 N/A] Enter the number of motor poles.
tion de-
pend- Poles ~nn@ 50 Hz ~nn@60 Hz
ent* 2 2700 - 2880 3250 - 3460
4 1350 - 1450 1625 - 1730
6 700 - 960 840 - 1153
The table shows the number of poles for normal speed ranges of various
motor types. Define motors designed for other frequencies separately.
The motor pole value is always an even number, because it refers to the
total number of poles, not pairs of poles. The adjustable frequency drive
creates the initial setting of par.1-39 Motor Poles based on par.1-23 Motor
Frequency and par.1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.
1-5* Load Indep. Setting

Parameters for setting the load-independent motor settings.
1-50 Motor Magnetization at Zero Speed

Range: Function:
100 %* [0 - 300 %] Use this parameter along with par.1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetizing
[RPM] to obtain a different thermal load on the motor when running at
low speed.
Enter a value which is a percentage of the rated magnetizing current. If
the setting is too low, the torque on the motor shaft may be reduced.
1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetizing [RPM]

Range: Function:
Applica- [10 - 300 RPM] Set the required speed for normal magnetizing current. If the speed is
tion de- set lower than the motor slip speed, par.1-50 Motor Magnetization at
pend- Zero Speed and par.1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetizing [RPM] are of
ent* no significance.
Use this parameter along with par.1-50 Motor Magnetization at Zero
Speed. See drawing for par.1-50 Motor Magnetization at Zero Speed.

1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetizing [Hz]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
1-6* Load Depend. Setting

Parameters for adjusting the load-dependent motor settings.
1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation

Range: Function:
100 %* [0 - 300 %] Enter the % value to compensate voltage in relation to load while the
motor is running at low speed, and obtain the optimum U/f characteristic.
The motor size determines the frequency range within which this pa-
rameter is active.
Motor size Change-over

0.310 hp [0.257.5 kW] < 10 Hz
1560 hp [1145 kW] < 5 Hz
75750 hp [55 kW550 kW] < 34 Hz
1-61 High Speed Load Compensation

Range: Function:
100 %* [0 - 300 %] Enter the % value to compensate voltage in relation to load while the
motor is running at high speed, and obtain the optimum U/f character-
istic. The motor size determines the frequency range within which this
parameter is active.
Motor size Change-over

0.310 hp [0.257.5 kW] > 10 Hz
1560 hp [1145 kW] < 5 Hz
75750 hp [55 kW550 kW] < 34 Hz

1-62 Slip Compensation

Range: Function:
0 %* [-500 - 500 %] Enter the % value for slip compensation to compensate for tolerances in
the value of nM,N. Slip compensation is calculated automatically, i.e., on
the basis of the rated motor speed nM,N.
1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant

Range: Function:
Applica- [0.05 - 5.00 s] Enter the slip compensation reaction speed. A high value results in slow
tion de- reaction, and a low value results in quick reaction. If low-frequency res-
pend- onance problems arise, use a longer time setting.
ent*
1-64 Resonance Dampening

Range: Function:
100 %* [0 - 500 %] Enter the resonance dampening value. Set par.1-64 Resonance Damp-
ening and par.1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant to help elimi-
nate high-frequency resonance problems. To reduce resonance oscilla-
tion, increase the value of par.1-64 Resonance Dampening.
1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant

Range: Function:
5 ms* [5 - 50 ms] Set par.1-64 Resonance Dampening and par.1-65 Resonance Dampening
Time Constant to help eliminate high-frequency resonance problems.
Enter the time constant that provides the best dampening.
1-7* Start Adjustments

Parameters for setting special motor start features.
1-71 Start Delay

Range: Function:
0.0 s* [0.0 - 120.0 s] The function selected in par.1-80 Function at Stop is active in the delay
period.
Enter the time delay required before commencing acceleration.
1-73 Flying Start

Option: Function:
This function makes it possible to catch a motor that is spinning freely
due to a line drop-out.
When par.1-73 Flying Start is enabled, par.1-71 Start Delay has no func-
tion.
Search direction for flying start is linked to the setting in par.4-10 Motor
Speed Direction.
Clockwise [0]: Flying start search in clockwise direction. If not successful,
a DC brake is carried out.
Both Directions [2]: The flying start will first make a search in the direction
determined by the last reference (direction). If unable to find the speed,
it will search in the other direction. If not successful, a DC brake will be

activated in the time set in par.2-02 DC Braking Time. Start will then take
place from 0 Hz.
[0] * Disabled Select Disable [0] if this function is not required
[1] Enabled Select Enable [1] to enable the adjustable frequency drive to catch and
control a spinning motor.
1-8* Stop Adjustments

Parameters for setting special stop features for the motor.
1-80 Function at Stop

Option: Function:
Select the adjustable frequency drive function after a stop command or
after the speed is ramped down to the settings in par.1-81 Min Speed for
Function at Stop [RPM].
[0] * Coast Leaves motor in free mode.
[1] DC Hold/Motor Preheat Energizes motor with a DC holding current (see par.2-00 DC Hold/Preheat
Current).
1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM]

Range: Function:
Applica- [0 - 600 RPM] Set the speed at which to activate par.1-80 Function at Stop.
tion de-
pend-
ent*
1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
Trip at Motor Speed Low Limit

In par.4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] and par.4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz], it is possible to set a min-
imum speed for the motor in order to ensure proper oil distribution.
In some cases, e.g., if operating in current limit because of a defect in the compressor, the output motor speed
can be suppressed below Motor Speed Low Limit. To prevent damage to the compressor, it is possible to set
trip limit. If the motor speed drops below this limit, the adjustable frequency drive will trip and issue an alarm
(A49).
Reset will take place according to the selected function in par.14-20 Reset Mode.
If the trip must take place at a rather exact speed (RPM), it is recommended to set par.0-02 Motor Speed Unit
for RPM and use slip compensation, which can be set in par.1-62 Slip Compensation.

NOTE
To achieve the highest accuracy with the slip compensation, an Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) should be per-
formed. To be enabled in par.1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA).
NOTE
Trip will not be active when using a normal stop or coast command.
1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM]

Range: Function:
0 RPM* [Application dependant] If the trip speed is set to 0, the function is not active.
If the speed after the start (or during a stop) falls below the value in the
parameter at any time, the drive will trip with an alarm [A49] Speed Limit.
Function at stop.
NOTE: This parameter is only available if par.0-02 Motor Speed Unit is set to [RPM].
1-87 Trip Speed Low [Hz]

Range: Function:
0.0 Hz* [Application dependant] If the trip speed is set to 0, the function is not active.
If the speed after the start (or during a stop) falls below the value in the
parameter at any time, the drive will trip with an alarm [A49] Speed Limit.
Function at stop.
NOTE: This parameter is only available if par.0-02 Motor Speed Unit is set to [Hz].
1-9* Motor Temperature

Parameters for setting the temperature protection features for the motor.
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection

Option: Function:
The adjustable frequency drive determines the motor temperature for
motor protection in two different ways:
Via a thermistor sensor connected to one of the analog or digital
inputs (par.1-93 Thermistor Source).
Via calculation (ETR = Electronic Thermal Relay) of the thermal
load, based on the actual load and time. The calculated ther-
mal load is compared with the rated motor current IM,N and
the rated motor frequency fM,N. The calculations estimate the
need for a lower load at lower speed due to less cooling from
the fan incorporated in the motor.
[0] No protection If the motor is continuously overloaded and no warning or trip of ad-
justable frequency drive is wanted.
[1] Thermistor warning Activates a warning when the connected thermistor in the motor reacts
in the event of motor overtemperature.
[2] Thermistor trip Stops (trips) the adjustable frequency drive when the connected ther-
mistor in the motor reacts in the event of motor overtemperature.

[3] ETR warning 1

[4] * ETR trip 1
[5] ETR warning 2
[6] ETR trip 2
[7] ETR warning 3
[8] ETR trip 3
[9] ETR warning 4
[10] ETR trip 4
ETR (Electronic Thermal Relay) functions 1-4 will calculate the load when the set-up where they were selected
is active. For example, ETR-3 starts calculating when Set-up 3 is selected. For the North American market: The
ETR functions provide class 20 motor overload protection in accordance with NEC.
NOTE: Trane recommends using 24 VDC as thermistor supply voltage.
1-91 Motor External Fan

Option: Function:
[0] * No No external fan is required, i.e. the motor is derated at low speed.
[1] Yes Applies an external motor fan (external ventilation), so that no derating
of the motor is required at low speed. The graph below is followed if the
motor current is lower than nominal motor current (see par.1-24 Motor
Current). If the motor current exceeds nominal current, the operation
time still decreases as if no fan were installed.


1-93 Thermistor Source
Option: Function:
Select the input to which the thermistor (PTC sensor) should be connec-
ted. An analog input option [1] or [2] cannot be selected if the analog
input is already in use as a reference source (selected in par.3-15 Refer-
ence 1 Source, par.3-16 Reference 2 Source or par.3-17 Reference 3
Source).
When using MCB112, choice [0] None must always be selected.
[0] * None
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[3] Digital input 18

Main Menu - Brakes - Group 2

2-0* DC Brakes
Parameter group for configuring the DC brake and DC hold functions.
2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current

Range: Function:
50 %* [Application dependant] Enter a value for holding current as a percentage of the rated motor cur-
rent IM,N set in par.1-24 Motor Current. 100% DC holding current corre-
sponds to IM,N.
This parameter holds the motor (holding torque) or pre-heats the motor.
This parameter is active if [1] DC hold/Preheat is selected in par.
1-80 Function at Stop.
NOTE
The maximum value depends on the rated motor current.
Avoid 100% current for too long. It may damage the motor.
2-01 DC Brake Current

Range: Function:
50 %* [Application dependant] Enter a value for current as a percentage of the rated motor current
IM,N, see par.1-24 Motor Current. 100% DC braking current corresponds
to IM,N.
DC brake current is applied on a stop command, when the speed is lower
than the limit set in par.2-03 DC Brake Cut-in Speed [RPM]; when the DC
Brake Inverse function is active; or via the serial communication port.
The braking current is active during the time period set in par.2-02 DC
Braking Time.
NOTE
The maximum value depends on the rated motor current.
Avoid 100% current for too long, as it may damage the motor. It may damage the motor.
2-02 DC Braking Time

Range: Function:
10.0 s* [0.0 - 60.0 s] Set the duration of the DC braking current set in par.2-01 DC Brake Cur-
rent, once activated.
2-03 DC Brake Cut-in Speed [RPM]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*

2-04 DC Brake Cut-in Speed [Hz]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
2-1* Brake Energy Funct.

Parameter group for selecting dynamic braking parameters. Only valid for drives with brake chopper.
2-10 Brake Function

Option: Function:
[0] * Off No brake resistor installed.
[1] Resistor brake Brake resistor incorporated in the system, for dissipation of surplus brak-
ing energy as heat. Connecting a brake resistor allows a higher DC link
voltage during braking (generating operation). The resistor brake func-
tion is only active in adjustable frequency drives with an integral dynamic
brake.
[2] AC brake AC Brake will only work in Compressor Torque mode in par.1-03 Torque
Characteristics.
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm)

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
For 200240 V units: 3902 dutytime

Presistor =
R 120
For 380480 V units 7782 dutytime
Presistor =
R 120
Presistor =
R 120
Presistor =
R 120
This parameter is only active in adjustable frequency drives with an integral dynamic brake.

2-13 Brake Power Monitoring

Option: Function:
This parameter is only active in adjustable frequency drives with an in-
tegral dynamic brake.
This parameter enables monitoring of the power to the brake resistor.
The power is calculated on the basis of the resistance (par.2-11 Brake
Resistor (ohm), the DC-link voltage, and the resistor duty time.
[0] * Off No braking energy monitoring is required.
[1] Warning Activates a warning on the display when the power transmitted over 120
s exceeds 100% of the monitoring limit (par.2-12 Brake Power Limit
(kW)).
The warning disappears when the transmitted power falls below 80% of
the monitoring limit.
[2] Trip Trips the adjustable frequency drive and displays an alarm when the cal-
culated power exceeds 100% of the monitoring limit.
[3] Warning and trip Activates both of the above, including warning, trip and alarm.
If power monitoring is set to Off [0] or Warning [1], the brake function remains active even if the monitoring limit
is exceeded. This may lead to thermal overload of the resistor. It is also possible to generate a warning via a
relay/digital output. The measuring accuracy of the power monitoring depends on the accuracy of the resistance
of the resistor (better than 20%).
2-15 Brake Check

Option: Function:
Select type of test and monitoring function to check the connection to
the brake resistor, or whether a brake resistor is present, and then display
a warning or an alarm in the event of a fault. The brake resistor discon-
nection function is tested during power-up. However, the brake IGBT test
is performed when there is no braking. A warning or trip disconnects the
brake function.
The testing sequence is as follows:
1. The DC link ripple amplitude is measured for 300 ms without braking.
2. The DC link ripple amplitude is measured for 300 ms with the brake
turned on.
3. If the DC link ripple amplitude while braking is lower than the DC link
ripple amplitude before braking + 1%. Brake check failed, return a
warning or alarm.
4. If the DC link ripple amplitude while braking is higher than the DC
link ripple amplitude before braking + 1%. Brake check OK.
[0] * Off Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a short-circuit during opera-
tion. If a short-circuit occurs, a warning appears.
[1] Warning Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a short-circuit, and to run a
test for brake resistor disconnection during power-up.
[2] Trip Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of the brake resistor, or a

short-circuit of the brake IGBT. If a fault occurs, the adjustable frequency
drive cuts out while displaying an alarm (trip locked).

[3] Stop and trip Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of the brake resistor, or a
short-circuit of the brake IGBT. If a fault occurs, the adjustable frequency
drive ramps down to coast and then trips. A trip lock alarm is displayed.
[4] AC brake
NOTE
NB!: Remove a warning arising in connection with Off [0] or Warning [1] by cycling the line power supply. The fault
must be corrected first. For Off [0] or Warning [1], the adjustable frequency drive keeps running even if a fault is
located.
2-16 AC Brake Max. Current

Range: Function:
100.0 [Application dependant]
%*
2-17 Over-voltage Control

Option: Function:
Overvoltage control (OVC) reduces the risk of the adjustable frequency
drive tripping due to overvoltage on the DC link caused by generative
power from the load.
[0] Disabled No OVC required.
[2] * Enabled Activates OVC.
NOTE: The ramp time is automatically adjusted to avoid tripping of the adjustable frequency drive.
Main Menu - Reference/Ramps - Group 3

3-0* Reference Limits
Parameters for setting the reference unit, limits and ranges.
Please also see par. 20-0* for information on settings

in closed-loop.
3-02 Minimum Reference

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
3-03 Maximum Reference

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*

3-04 Reference Function

Option: Function:
[0] * Sum Sums both external and preset reference sources.
[1] External/Preset Use either the preset or the external reference source.
Shift between external and preset via a command on a digital input.
3-1* References
Parameters for setting up the reference sources.
Select the preset reference(s). Select Preset ref. bit 0 / 1 / 2 [16], [17] or [18] for the corresponding digital inputs
in par. group 5-1*.
3-10 Preset Reference

Array [8]
Range: Function:
0.00 %* [-100.00 - 100.00 %]
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*

3-13 Reference Site

Option: Function:
Select which reference site to activate.
[0] * Linked to Hand / Auto Use local reference when in hand mode; or remote reference when in
auto mode.
[1] Remote Use remote reference in both hand mode and auto mode.
[2] Local Use local reference in both hand mode and auto mode.
NOTE
When set to Local [2], the adjustable frequency drive will start with this setting
again following a 'power-down'.
3-14 Preset Relative Reference

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [-100.00 - 100.00 %]
3-15 Reference 1 Source

Option: Function:
Select the reference input to be used for the first reference signal. par.
3-15 Reference 1 Source, par.3-16 Reference 2 Source and par.3-17 Ref-
erence 3 Source define up to three different reference signals. The sum
of these reference signals defines the actual reference.
[0] No function
[1] * Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[7] Pulse input 29
[8] Pulse input 33
[20] Digital pot.meter
[21] Analog input X30/11


[23] Analog Input X42/1
[30] Ext. Closed-loop 1

Option: Function:
Select the reference input to be used for the second reference signal.
par.3-15 Reference 1 Source, par.3-16 Reference 2 Source and par.
3-17 Reference 3 Source define up to three different reference signals.
The sum of these reference signals defines the actual reference.
[0] No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[7] Pulse input 29
[8] Pulse input 33
[20] * Digital pot.meter


Option: Function:
Select the reference input to be used for the third reference signal. par.
3-15 Reference 1 Source, par.3-16 Reference 2 Source and par.3-17 Ref-
erence 3 Source define up to three different reference signals. The sum
of these reference signals defines the actual reference.
[0] * No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[7] Pulse input 29
[8] Pulse input 33
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
3-4* Ramp 1
Configure the ramp parameter, ramping times, for each of the two ramps (par. 3-4* and par. 3-5*).

3-40 Ramp 1 Type

Option: Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on requirements for acceleration/de-
celeration.
A linear ramp will give constant acceleration during ramping. An S-ramp
will give non-linear acceleration, compensating for jerk in the applica-
tion.
[0] * Linear
[1] S-ramp Acceleration with lowest possible jerk.
[2] S-ramp Const Time S-ramp based on the values set in par.3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time and
par.3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time.
NOTE
If S-ramp [1] is selected and the reference during ramping is changed, the ramp time may be prolonged in order to
realize a jerk-free movement, which may result in a longer start or stop time.
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching initiators may be necessary.
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
3-45 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start

Range: Function:
50 %* [Application dependant] Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time (par.3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-
up Time) in which the acceleration torque increases. The larger the
percentage value, the greater the jerk compensation achieved, and thus
the lower the torque jerks occurring in the application.
3-46 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End

Range: Function:
up Time) in which the acceleration torque decreases. The larger the
the lower the torque jerks in the application.

3-47 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start

Range: Function:
50 %* [Application dependant] Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down time (par.3-42 Ramp 1
Ramp-down Time) where the deceleration torque increases. The larger
the percentage value, the greater the jerk compensation achieved, and
thus the lower the torque jerks in the application.
3-48 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End

Range: Function:
Ramp-down Time) where the deceleration torque decreases. The larger
3-5* Ramp 2
Choosing ramp parameters, see 3-4*.
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp-up Time

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
3-55 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start

Range: Function:
up Time) in which the acceleration torque increases. The larger the
3-56 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End

Range: Function:
up Time) in which the acceleration torque decreases. The larger the
3-57 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start

Range: Function:
Ramp-down Time) where the deceleration torque increases. The larger

3-58 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End

Range: Function:
3-8* Other Ramps

Configure parameters for special ramps such as jog or quick stop, for example.
3-80 Jog Ramp Time

Range: Function:
Applica- [1.00 - 3600.00 s] Enter the jog ramp time, i.e., the acceleration/deceleration time between
tion de- 0 RPM and the rated motor speed (nM,N) (set in par.1-25 Motor Nominal
pend- Speed). Ensure that the resultant output current required for the given
ent* jog ramp time does not exceed the current limit in par.4-18 Current Lim-
it. The jog ramp time starts upon activation of a jog signal via the control
panel, a selected digital input, or the serial communication port.
tjog nnorm par . 1 25
par . 3 80 = s
jog speed par . 3 19
3-80 Jog Ramp Time

Range: Function:
Applica- [1.00 - 3600.00 s]
tion de-
pend-
ent*
3-84 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End

Range: Function:

3-9* Digital Pot.Meter

The digital potentiometer function allows the user to increase or decrease the actual reference by adjusting the
set-up of the digital inputs using the functions INCREASE, DECREASE or CLEAR. To activate the function, at
least one digital input must be set up to INCREASE or DECREASE.
3-90 Step Size

Range: Function:
0.10 %* [0.01 - 200.00 %]
3-91 Ramp Time

Range: Function:
1.00 s [0.00 - 3600.00 s] Enter the ramp time, i.e., the time for adjustment of the reference from
0% to 100% of the specified digital potentiometer function (INCREASE,
DECREASE or CLEAR).
If INCREASE / DECREASE is activated for longer than the ramp delay
period specified in par.3-95 Ramp Delay, the actual reference will be
ramped up / down according to this ramp time. The ramp time is defined
as the time used to adjust the reference by the step size specified in par.
3-90 Step Size.
3-92 Power Restore

Option: Function:
[0] * Off Resets the Digital Potentiometer reference to 0% after power-up.
[1] On Restores the most recent Digital Potentiometer reference at power-up.
3-93 Maximum Limit

Range: Function:
100 %* [-200 - 200 %] Set the maximum permissible value for the resultant reference. This is
advisable if the Digital Potentiometer is used for fine tuning of the re-
sulting reference.
3-94 Minimum Limit

Range: Function:
0 %* [-200 - 200 %] Set the minimum permissible value for the resultant reference. This is
advisable if the Digital Potentiometer is used for fine tuning of the re-
sulting reference.
3-95 Ramp Delay

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*

Main Menu - Limits/Warnings - Group 4

4-** Limits and Warnings
Parameter group for configuring limits and warnings.
4-1* Motor Limits

Define torque, current and speed limits for the motor, and the reaction of the adjustable frequency drive when
the limits are exceeded.
A limit may generate a message on the display. A warning will always generate a message on the display or on
the serial communication bus. A monitoring function may initiate a warning or a trip, upon which the adjustable
frequency drive will stop and generate an alarm message.
4-10 Motor Speed Direction

Option: Function:
Selects the motor speed direction required.
Use this parameter to prevent unwanted reversing.
[0] Clockwise Only operation in a clockwise direction will be allowed.
[2] * Both directions Operation in both a clockwise and anti-clockwise direction will be al-
lowed.
NOTE: The setting in par.4-10 Motor Speed Direction has impact on the Flying Start in par.1-73 Flying Start.

4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
NOTE: Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the inverter switching frequency (par.14-01 Switching Fre-
quency).
NOTE: Any changes in par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] will reset the value in par.4-53 Warning Speed
High to the same value as set in par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
NOTE: Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the inverter switching frequency (par.14-01 Switching Fre-
quency).
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode

Range: Function:
100.0 [Application dependant]
%*

4-18 Current Limit

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
4-19 Max Output Frequency

Range: Function:
Applica- [1.0 - 1000.0 Hz] Enter the maximum output frequency value. par.4-19 Max Output Fre-
tion de- quency specifies the absolute limit on the adjustable frequency drive
pend- output frequency for improved safety in applications where accidental
ent* overspeeding must be avoided. This absolute limit applies to all config-
urations and is independent of the setting in par.1-00 Configuration
Mode. This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
4-5* Adj. Warnings

Define adjustable warning limits for current, speed, reference and feedback.
NOTE
Not visible in display, only in Trane Drive Utility.
Warnings are shown on display, programmed output or serial bus.
4-50 Warning Current Low

Range: Function:
0.00 A* [Application dependant] Enter the ILOW value. When the motor current falls below this limit
(ILOW), the display reads CURRENT LOW. The signal outputs can be
programmed to produce a status signal on terminal 27 or 29, and on relay
output 01 or 02. Refer to the drawing in this section.

4-51 Warning Current High

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
4-53 Warning Speed High

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
NOTE: Any changes in par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] will reset the value in par.4-53 Warning Speed
High to the same value as set in par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].
If a different value is needed in par.4-53 Warning Speed High, it must be set after programming of par.
4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]!
4-54 Warning Reference Low

Range: Function:
-999999. [Application dependant] Enter the lower reference limit. When the actual reference falls below this
999 N/ limit, the display indicates Ref Low. The signal outputs can be program-
A* med to produce a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on relay output
01 or 02.
4-55 Warning Reference High

Range: Function:
999999. [Application dependant] Enter the upper reference limit. When the actual reference exceeds this
999 N/ limit, the display reads Ref High. The signal outputs can be programmed
A* to produce a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on relay output 01 or
02.
4-56 Warning Feedback Low

Range: Function:
-999999. [Application dependant] Enter the lower feedback limit. When the feedback falls below this limit,
999 the display reads Feedb Low. The signal outputs can be programmed to
Proc- produce a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on relay output 01 or
essCtrlU- 02.
nit*
4-57 Warning Feedback High

Range: Function:
999999. [Application dependant] Enter the upper feedback limit. When the feedback exceeds this limit, the
999 display reads Feedb High. The signal outputs can be programmed to
Proc- produce a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on relay output 01 or
essCtrlU- 02.
nit*

4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function

Option: Function:
Displays an alarm in the event of a missing motor phase.
[0] Disabled No alarm is displayed if a missing motor phase occurs.
[2] * Trip 1000 ms
NOTE
4-6* Speed Bypass

Define the speed bypass areas for the ramps.
Some systems call for avoiding certain output frequencies or speeds due to resonance problems in the system.
A maximum of four frequency or speed ranges can be avoided.
4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM]

Array [4]
Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz]

Array [4]
Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
4-62 Bypass Speed to [RPM]

Array [4]
Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz]

Array [4]
Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*

Semi-Automatic Bypass Speed Set-up

The Semi-Automatic Bypass Speed Set-up can be used to facilitate the programming of the frequencies to be
skipped due to resonances in the system.
The following process is to be carried out:

1. Stop the motor.
2. Select Enabled in par.4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up.
3. Press Hand On on the keypad to start the search for frequency bands causing resonances. The motor will
ramp up according to the ramp set.
4. When sweeping through a resonance band, press OK on the keypad when leaving the band. The current
frequency will be stored as the first element in par.4-62 Bypass Speed to [RPM] or par.4-63 Bypass Speed
To [Hz] (array). Repeat this for each resonance band identified at the ramp-up (maximum four can be ad-
justed).
5. When maximum speed has been reached, the motor will automatically begin to ramp-down. Repeat the
above procedure when speed is leaving the resonance bands during the deceleration. The current frequen-
cies registered when pressing OK will be stored in par.4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] or par.4-61 Bypass
Speed From [Hz].
6. When the motor has ramped down to stop, press OK. The par.4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up will automat-
ically reset to Off. The adjustable frequency drive will stay in Hand mode until Off or Auto On are pressed on
the keypad.
If the frequencies for a certain resonance band are not registered in the right order (frequency values stored in
By Pass Speed To are higher than those in By Pass Speed From) or if they do not have the same numbers of
registrations for the By Pass From and By Pass To, all registrations will be canceled and the following message
is displayed: Collected speed areas overlapping or not completely determined. Press [Cancel] to abort.
4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up

Option: Function:
[0] * OFF No function
[1] Enabled Starts the semi-automatic bypass set-up and continue with the proce-
dure described above.
Main Menu - Digital In/Out - Group 5

5-** Digital In/Out
Parameter group for configuring the digital input and output.
5-0* Digital I/O Mode

Parameters for configuring the input and output using NPN and PNP.
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * Input Defines terminal 27 as a digital input.
[1] Output Defines terminal 27 as a digital output.
Please note that this parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.

5-02 Terminal 29 Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * Input Defines terminal 29 as a digital input.
[1] Output Defines terminal 29 as a digital output.

5-1* Digital Inputs

Parameters for configuring the input functions for the input terminals.
The digital inputs are used for selecting various functions in the adjustable frequency drive. All digital inputs
can be set to the following functions:
Digital input function Select Terminal

No operation [0] All *terminal 19, 32, 33
Reset [1] All
Coast inverse [2] 27
Coast and reset inverse [3] All
DC brake inverse [5] All
Stop inverse [6] All
External interlock [7] All
Start [8] All *terminal 18
Latched start [9] All
Reversing [10] All
Start reversing [11] All
Jog [14] All *terminal 29
Preset reference on [15] All
Preset ref bit 0 [16] All
Freeze reference [19] All
Freeze output [20] All
Speed up [21] All
Slow [22] All
Set-up select bit 0 [23] All
Set-up select bit 1 [24] All
Pulse input [32] terminal 29, 33
Ramp bit 0 [34] All
Mains failure inverse [36] All
Fire mode [37] All
Run Permissive [52] All
Hand start [53] All
Auto-start [54] All
DigiPot Increase [55] All
DigiPot Decrease [56] All
DigiPot Clear [57] All
Counter A (up) [60] 29, 33
Counter A (down) [61] 29, 33
Reset Counter A [62] All
Counter B (up) [63] 29, 33
Counter B (down) [64] 29, 33
Reset Counter B [65] All
Sleep Mode [66] All
Reset Maintenance Word [78] All
Lead Pump Start [120] All
Lead Pump Alternation [121] All
Pump 1 Interlock [130] All

Digital Inputs, 5-1* continued

All = Terminals 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33, X30/2, X30/3, X30/4. X30/ are the terminals on MCB 101.
Functions dedicated to only one digital input are stated in the associated parameter.
All digital inputs can be programmed to these functions:
[0] No operation No reaction to signals transmitted to terminal.

[1] Reset Resets adjustable frequency drive after a TRIP/ALARM. Not all alarms
can be reset.
[2] Coast inverse Leaves motor in free mode. Logic 0 => coasting stop.
(Default Digital input 27): Coasting stop, inverted input (NC).
[3] Coast and reset inverse Reset and coasting stop Inverted input (NC).
Leaves motor in free mode and resets the adjustable frequency drive.
Logic 0 => coasting stop and reset.
[5] DC brake inverse Inverted input for DC braking (NC).
Stops motor by energizing it with a DC current for a certain time period.
See par.2-01 DC Brake Current to par.2-03 DC Brake Cut-in Speed
[RPM]. The function is only active when the value in par.2-02 DC Braking
Time is different from 0. Logic 0 => DC braking.
[6] Stop inverse Stop Inverted function. Generates a stop function when the selected ter-
minal goes from logical level 1 to 0. The stop is performed according
to the selected ramp time (par.3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time, par.
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time, par.3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp-down Time, par.
3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp-down Time).
WARNING
When the adjustable frequency drive is at the torque limit and has received a
stop command, it may not stop by itself. To ensure that the adjustable fre-
quency drive stops, configure a digital output to Torque limit & stop [27]
and connect this digital output to a digital input that is configured as coast.
[7] External Interlock Same function as Coasting stop, inverse, but External Interlock generates
the alarm message external fault on the display when the terminal
which is programmed for Coast Inverse is logic 0. The alarm message
will also be active via digital outputs and relay outputs, if programmed
for External Interlock. The alarm can be reset using a digital input or the
[RESET] key if the cause for the External Interlock has been removed. A
delay can be programmed in par.22-00 External Interlock Delay, External
Interlock Time. After applying a signal to the input, the reaction described
above will be delayed with the time set in par.22-00 External Interlock
Delay.
[8] Start Select start for a start/stop command. Logic 1 = start, logic 0 = stop.
(Default Digital input 18)
[9] Latched start Motor starts, if a pulse is applied for min. 2 ms. Motor stops when Stop
inverse is activated
[10] Reversing Changes direction of motor shaft rotation. Select Logic 1 to reverse. The
reversing signal only changes the direction of rotation. It does not acti-
vate the start function. Select both directions in par.4-10 Motor Speed
Direction.

(Default Digital input 19).

[11] Start reversing Used for start/stop and for reversing on the same wire. Signals on start
are not allowed at the same time.
[14] Jog Used for activating jog speed. See par.3-11 Jog Speed [Hz].
[15] Preset reference on Used for shifting between external reference and preset reference. It is
assumed that External/preset [1] has been selected in par.3-04 Reference
Function. Logic '0' = external reference active; logic '1' = one of the eight
preset references is active.
[16] Preset ref bit 0 Enables a choice between one of the eight preset references according
to the table below.
to the table below.
to the table below.
Preset ref. bit 2 1 0

Preset ref. 0 0 0 0
Preset ref. 1 0 0 1
Preset ref. 2 0 1 0
Preset ref. 3 0 1 1
Preset ref. 4 1 0 0
Preset ref. 5 1 0 1
Preset ref. 6 1 1 0
Preset ref. 7 1 1 1
[19] Freeze ref Freezes actual reference. The frozen reference is now the point of enable/
condition for Speed up and Slow to be used. If Speed up/down is used,
the speed change always follows ramp 2 (par.3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp-up
Time and par.3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time) in the range 0 - par.
3-03 Maximum Reference. (For closed-loop, see par.20-14 Maximum
Reference/Feedb.).
[20] Freeze output Freezes actual motor frequency (Hz). The frozen motor frequency is now
the point of enable/condition for Speed up and Slow to be used. If Speed
up/down is used, the speed change always follows ramp 2 (par.
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp-up Time and par.3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time) in
the range 0 - par.1-23 Motor Frequency.
WARNING
When Freeze output is active, the adjustable frequency drive cannot be stop-
ped via a low start [13] signal. Stop the adjustable frequency drive via a
terminal programmed for Coasting inverse [2] or Coast and reset, inverse [3].
[21] Speed up For digital control of the up/down speed is desired (motor potentiome-
ter). Activate this function by selecting either Freeze reference or Freeze
output. When Speed up is activated for less than 400 msec., the resulting
reference will be increased by 0.1%. If Speed up is activated for more
than 400 msec., the resulting reference will ramp according to Ramp 1
in par.3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time.
[22] Slow Same as Speed up [21].

[23] Set-up select bit 0 Selects one of the four set-ups. Set par. 0-10 to Multi Set-up.
[24] Set-up select bit 1 Same as Set-up select bit 0 [23].
[32] Pulse input Select Pulse input when using a pulse sequence as either reference or
feedback. Scaling is done in par. group 5-5*.
[34] Ramp bit 0 Select which ramp to use. Logic 0 will select ramp 1 while logic 1
will select ramp 2.
[36] Mains failure inverse Select to activate function selected in par.14-10 Mains Failure. Line fail-
ure is active in the Logic 0 situation.
[37] Fire mode A signal applied will put the adjustable frequency drive into fire mode
and all other commands will be disregarded. See 24-0* Fire Mode.
[52] Run Permissive The input terminal, for which the Run permissive has been programmed
must be logic 1 before a start command can be accepted. Run permis-
sive has a logic AND function related to the terminal which is program-
med for START [8], Jog [14] or Freeze Output [20], which means that in
order to start running the motor, both conditions must be fulfilled. If Run
Permissive is programmed on multiple terminals, Run permissive needs
only be logic 1 on one of the terminals for the function to be carried out.
The digital output signal for Run Request (Start [8], Jog [14] or Freeze out-
put [20]) programmed in par. 5-3*, or par. 5-4*, will not be affected by
Run Permissive.
NOTE: If no Run Permissive signal is applied but either Run, Jog or Freeze
commands is activated, the status line in the display will show either Run
Requested, Jog Requested or Freeze Requested.
[53] Hand start A signal applied will put the adjustable frequency drive into hand mode
as if button Hand On on the keypad has been pressed and a normal stop
command will be overridden. If disconnecting the signal, the motor will
stop. To make any other start commands valid, another digital input must
be assign to Auto Start and a signal applied to this. The Hand On and
Auto On buttons on the keypad has no impact. The Off button on the
keypad will override Hand Start and Auto-Start. Press either the Hand On
or Auto On button to make Hand Start and Auto Start active again. If no
signal on neither Hand Start nor Auto-Start, the motor will stop regardless
of any normal Start command applied. If signal applied to both Hand
Start and Auto-Start, the function will be Auto-Start. If pressing the Off
button on the keypad, the motor will stop regardless of signals on Hand
Start and Auto-Start.
[54] Auto-start A signal applied will put the adjustable frequency drive into auto mode
as if the keypad button Auto On has been pressed. See also Hand Start
[53]
[55] DigiPot Increase Uses the input as an INCREASE signal to the Digital Potentiometer func-
tion described in parameter group 3-9*
[56] DigiPot Decrease Uses the input as a DECREASE signal to the Digital Potentiometer func-
[57] DigiPot Clear Uses the input to CLEAR the Digital Potentiometer reference described
in parameter group 3-9*
[60] Counter A (up) (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter.
[61] Counter A (down) (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter.
[62] Reset Counter A Input for reset of counter A.

[63] Counter B (up) (Terminal 29 and 33 only) Input for increment counting in the SLC coun-
ter.
[64] Counter B (down) (Terminal 29 and 33 only) Input for decrement counting in the SLC coun-
ter.
[65] Reset Counter B Input for reset of counter B.
[66] Sleep Mode Forces the adjustable frequency drive into sleep mode (see par. 22-4*).
Reacts on the rising edge of signal applied!
[78] Reset Preventive Mainte- Resets all data in par.16-96 Maintenance Word to 0.
nance Word
Digital Inputs, 5-1* continued

All = Terminals 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33, X30/2, X30/3, X30/4. X30/ are the terminals on MCB 101.
Functions dedicated to only one digital input are stated in the associated parameter.
All digital inputs can be programmed to these functions:
[0] No operation No reaction to signals transmitted to terminal.

[1] Reset Resets adjustable frequency drive after a TRIP/ALARM. Not all alarms
can be reset.
[2] Coast inverse Leaves motor in free mode. Logic 0 => coasting stop.
(Default Digital input 27): Coasting stop, inverted input (NC).
[3] Coast and reset inverse Reset and coasting stop Inverted input (NC).
Leaves motor in free mode and resets the adjustable frequency drive.
Logic 0 => coasting stop and reset.
[5] DC brake inverse Inverted input for DC braking (NC).
Stops motor by energizing it with a DC current for a certain time period.
See par.2-01 DC Brake Current to par.2-03 DC Brake Cut-in Speed
[RPM]. The function is only active when the value in par.2-02 DC Braking
Time is different from 0. Logic 0 => DC braking.
[6] Stop inverse Stop Inverted function. Generates a stop function when the selected ter-
minal goes from logical level 1 to 0. The stop is performed according
to the selected ramp time (par.3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time, par.
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time, par.3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp-down Time, par.
3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp-down Time).
NOTE: When the adjustable frequency drive is at the torque limit and has
received a stop command, it may not stop by itself. To ensure that the
adjustable frequency drive stops, configure a digital output to Torque limit
& stop [27] and connect this digital output to a digital input that is con-
figured as coast.
[7] External Interlock Same function as Coasting stop, inverse, but External Interlock generates
the alarm message external fault on the display when the terminal
which is programmed for Coast Inverse is logic 0. The alarm message
will also be active via digital outputs and relay outputs, if programmed
for External Interlock. The alarm can be reset using a digital input or the
[RESET] key if the cause for the External Interlock has been removed. A
delay can be programmed in par.22-00 External Interlock Delay, External
Interlock Time. After applying a signal to the input, the reaction described

above will be delayed with the time set in par.22-00 External Interlock
Delay.
[8] Start Select start for a start/stop command. Logic 1 = start, logic 0 = stop.
[9] Latched start Motor starts, if a pulse is applied for min. 2 ms. Motor stops when Stop
inverse is activated
[10] Reversing Changes direction of motor shaft rotation. Select Logic 1 to reverse. The
reversing signal only changes the direction of rotation. It does not acti-
vate the start function. Select both directions in par.4-10 Motor Speed
Direction.
(Default Digital input 19).
[11] Start reversing Used for start/stop and for reversing on the same wire. Signals on start
are not allowed at the same time.
[14] Jog Used for activating jog speed. See par.3-11 Jog Speed [Hz].
[15] Preset reference on Used for shifting between external reference and preset reference. It is
assumed that External/preset [1] has been selected in par.3-04 Reference
Function. Logic '0' = external reference active; logic '1' = one of the eight
preset references is active.
to the table below.
to the table below.
to the table below.
Preset ref. bit 2 1 0

Preset ref. 0 0 0 0
Preset ref. 1 0 0 1
Preset ref. 2 0 1 0
Preset ref. 3 0 1 1
Preset ref. 4 1 0 0
Preset ref. 5 1 0 1
Preset ref. 6 1 1 0
Preset ref. 7 1 1 1
[19] Freeze ref Freezes actual reference. The frozen reference is now the point of enable/
condition for Speed up and Slow to be used. If Speed up/down is used,
the speed change always follows ramp 2 (par.3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp-up
Time and par.3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time) in the range 0 - par.
3-03 Maximum Reference. (For closed-loop, see par.20-14 Maximum
Reference/Feedb.).
[20] Freeze output Freezes actual motor frequency (Hz). The frozen motor frequency is now
the point of enable/condition for Speed up and Slow to be used. If Speed
up/down is used, the speed change always follows ramp 2 (par.
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp-up Time and par.3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time) in
the range 0 - par.1-23 Motor Frequency.
NOTE: When Freeze output is active, the adjustable frequency drive can-
not be stopped via a low start [13] signal. Stop the adjustable frequency

drive via a terminal programmed for Coasting inverse [2] or Coast and
reset, inverse [3].
[21] Speed up For digital control of the up/down speed is desired (motor potentiome-
ter). Activate this function by selecting either Freeze reference or Freeze
output. When Speed up is activated for less than 400 msec., the resulting
reference will be increased by 0.1%. If Speed up is activated for more
than 400 msec., the resulting reference will ramp according to Ramp 1
in par.3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time.
[22] Slow Same as Speed up [21].
[23] Set-up select bit 0 Selects one of the four set-ups. Set par. 0-10 to Multi Set-up.
[24] Set-up select bit 1 Same as Set-up select bit 0 [23].
[32] Pulse input Select Pulse input when using a pulse sequence as either reference or
feedback. Scaling is done in par. group 5-5*.
[34] Ramp bit 0 Select which ramp to use. Logic 0 will select ramp 1 while logic 1
will select ramp 2.
[36] Mains failure inverse Select to activate function selected in par.14-10 Mains Failure. Line fail-
ure is active in the Logic 0 situation.
[37] Fire mode A signal applied will put the adjustable frequency drive into fire mode
and all other commands will be disregarded. See 24-0* Fire Mode.
[52] Run Permissive The input terminal, for which the Run permissive has been programmed
must be logic 1 before a start command can be accepted. Run permis-
sive has a logic AND function related to the terminal which is program-
med for START [8], Jog [14] or Freeze Output [20], which means that in
order to start running the motor, both conditions must be fulfilled. If Run
Permissive is programmed on multiple terminals, Run permissive needs
only be logic 1 on one of the terminals for the function to be carried out.
The digital output signal for Run Request (Start [8], Jog [14] or Freeze out-
put [20]) programmed in par. 5-3*, or par. 5-4*, will not be affected by
Run Permissive.
NOTE: If no Run Permissive signal is applied but either Run, Jog or Freeze
commands is activated, the status line in the display will show either Run
Requested, Jog Requested or Freeze Requested.
[53] Hand start A signal applied will put the adjustable frequency drive into hand mode
as if button Hand On on the keypad has been pressed and a normal stop
command will be overridden. If disconnecting the signal, the motor will
stop. To make any other start commands valid, another digital input must
be assigned to Auto-Start and a signal applied to this. The Hand On and
Auto On buttons on the keypad has no impact. The Off button on the
keypad will override Hand Start and Auto-Start. Press either the Hand On
or Auto On button to make Hand Start and Auto-Start active again. If no
signal on neither Hand Start nor Auto-Start, the motor will stop regardless
of any normal Start command applied. If signal applied to both Hand
Start and Auto-Start, the function will be Auto-Start. If pressing the Off
button on the keypad, the motor will stop regardless of signals on Hand
Start and Auto-Start.
[54] Auto start A signal applied will put the adjustable frequency drive into auto mode
as if the keypad button Auto On has been pressed. See also Hand Start
[53]

[55] DigiPot Increase Uses the input as an INCREASE signal to the Digital Potentiometer func-
[56] DigiPot Decrease Uses the input as a DECREASE signal to the Digital Potentiometer func-
[57] DigiPot Clear Uses the input to CLEAR the Digital Potentiometer reference described
in parameter group 3-9*
[60] Counter A (up) (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter.
[61] Counter A (down) (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter.
[62] Reset Counter A Input for reset of counter A.
[63] Counter B (up) (Terminal 29 and 33 only) Input for increment counting in the SLC coun-
ter.
[64] Counter B (down) (Terminal 29 and 33 only) Input for decrement counting in the SLC coun-
ter.
[65] Reset Counter B Input for reset of counter B.
[66] Sleep Mode Forces the adjustable frequency drive into sleep mode (see par. 22-4*).
Reacts on the rising edge of signal applied!
[78] Reset Preventive Mainte- Resets all data in par.16-96 Maintenance Word to 0.
nance Word
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input

Option: Function:
[0] No operation
[1] Reset
[2] Coast inverse
[3] Coast and Reset Inv
[5] DC brake inverse
[6] Stop inverse
[7] External interlock
[8] * Start
[9] Latched start
[10] Reverse
[11] Start reverse
[14] Jog
[15] Preset reference on
[16] Preset ref bit 0
[19] Freeze reference
[20] Freeze output
[21] Speed up
[22] Slow
[23] Set-up select bit 0
[34] Ramp bit 0
[36] Mains failure inverse

[37] Fire Mode

[52] Run permissive
[53] Hand start
[54] Auto-start
[55] DigiPot increase
[56] DigiPot decrease
[57] DigiPot clear
[62] Reset Counter A
[65] Reset Counter B
[66] Sleep Mode
[78] Reset Maint. Word
[120] Lead Pump Start
[121] Lead Pump Alternation
[130] Pump 1 Interlock

Same options and functions as 5-1*, except for Pulse input.
Option: Function:
[0] * No operation

Same options and functions as par. 5-1*, except for Pulse input.
Option: Function:
[0] * No operation

Option: Function:
[0] No operation
[1] Reset
[2] Coast inverse
[6] Stop inverse
[8] Start
[9] Latched start
[10] Reverse
[11] Start reverse
[14] * Jog


[20] Freeze output
[21] Speed up
[22] Slow
[30] Counter input
[32] Pulse input
[34] Ramp bit 0
[37] Fire Mode
[52] Run permissive
[53] Hand start
[54] Auto-start
[57] DigiPot clear
[60] Counter A (up)
[61] Counter A (down)
[63] Counter B (up)
[64] Counter B (down)
[66] Sleep Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
[1] Reset
[2] Coast inverse
[6] Stop inverse
[8] Start
[9] Latched start
[10] Reverse
[11] Start reverse

[14] Jog
[20] Freeze output
[21] Speed up
[22] Slow
[34] Ramp bit 0
[37] Fire Mode
[52] Run permissive
[53] Hand start
[54] Auto-start
[57] DigiPot clear
[66] Sleep Mode

Same options and functions as par. 5-1* Digital Inputs.
Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input

Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
[1] Reset
[2] Coast inverse
[6] Stop inverse

[8] Start
[9] Latched start
[10] Reverse
[11] Start reverse
[14] Jog
[20] Freeze output
[21] Speed up
[22] Slow
[34] Ramp bit 0
[37] Fire Mode
[52] Run permissive
[53] Hand start
[54] Auto-start
[57] DigiPot clear
[66] Sleep Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
[1] Reset
[2] Coast inverse
[6] Stop inverse
[8] Start

[9] Latched start

[10] Reverse
[11] Start reverse
[14] Jog
[20] Freeze output
[21] Speed up
[22] Slow
[34] Ramp bit 0
[37] Fire Mode
[52] Run permissive
[53] Hand start
[54] Auto-start
[57] DigiPot clear
[66] Sleep Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
[1] Reset
[2] Coast inverse
[6] Stop inverse
[8] Start
[9] Latched start

[10] Reverse
[11] Start reverse
[14] Jog
[20] Freeze output
[21] Speed up
[22] Slow
[34] Ramp bit 0
[37] Fire Mode
[52] Run permissive
[53] Hand start
[54] Auto-start
[57] DigiPot clear
[66] Sleep Mode
5-3* Digital Outputs

Parameters for configuring the output functions for the output terminals. The 2 solid-state digital outputs are
common for terminals 27 and 29. Set the I/O function for terminal 27 in par.5-01 Terminal 27 Mode and set the
I/O function for terminal 29 in par.5-02 Terminal 29 Mode. These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor
is running.
The digital outputs can be programmed with these functions:

[0] No operation Default for all digital outputs and relay outputs
[1] Control ready The control board receives supply voltage.
[2] Drive ready The adjustable frequency drive is ready for operation and applies a sup-
ply signal on the control board.

[3] Drive ready / remote con- The adjustable frequency drive is ready for operation and is in Auto On
trol mode.
[4] Stand-by / no warning The adjustable frequency drive is ready for operation. No start or stop
command is been given (start/disable). There are no warnings.
[5] Running The motor is running.
[6] Running / no warning The output speed is higher than the speed set in par.1-81 Min Speed for
Function at Stop [RPM]. The motor is running and there are no warnings.
[8] Run on reference / no The motor runs at reference speed.
warning
[9] Alarm An alarm activates the output. There are no warnings.
[10] Alarm or warning An alarm or a warning activates the output.
[11] At torque limit The torque limit set in par.4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode or par. 1-17 has
been exceeded.
[12] Out of current range The motor current is outside the range set in par.4-18 Current Limit.
[13] Below current, low The motor current is lower than set in par.4-50 Warning Current Low.
[14] Above current, high The motor current is higher than set in par.4-51 Warning Current High.
[15] Out of speed range The output speed is outside the range set in par.4-52 Warning Speed
Low and par.4-53 Warning Speed High.
[16] Below speed, low The output speed is lower than the setting in par.4-52 Warning Speed
Low.
[17] Above speed, high The output speed is higher than the setting in par.4-53 Warning Speed
High.
[18] Out of feedback range The feedback is outside the range set in par.4-56 Warning Feedback
Low and par.4-57 Warning Feedback High.
[19] Below feedback low The feedback is below the limit set in par.4-56 Warning Feedback Low.
[20] Above feedback high The feedback is above the limit set in par.4-57 Warning Feedback High.
[21] Thermal warning The thermal warning turns on when the temperature exceeds the limit
in the motor, the adjustable frequency drive, the brake resistor, or the
thermistor.
[25] Reverse Reversing. Logic 1 = relay activated, 24 V DC when CW rotation of the
motor. Logic 0 = relay not activated, no signal, when CCW rotation of
the motor.
[26] Bus OK Active communication (no timeout) via the serial communication port.
[27] Torque limit and stop Use in performing a coasting stop and in torque limit condition. If the
adjustable frequency drive has received a stop signal and is at the torque
limit, the signal is Logic 0.
[28] Brake, no warning The brake is active and there are no warnings.
[29] Brake ready, no fault The brake is ready for operation and there are no faults.
[30] Brake fault (IGBT) The output is Logic 1 when the brake IGBT is short-circuited. Use this
function to protect the adjustable frequency drive if there is a fault on the
brake modules. Use the output/relay to cut out the AC line voltage from
the adjustable frequency drive.
[35] External Interlock External Interlock function has been activated via one of the digital in-
puts.
[40] Out of ref range
[41] Below reference low
[42] Above reference high

[45] Bus Ctrl

[46] Bus Ctrl 1 if timeout
[47] Bus Ctrl 0 if timeout
[55] Pulse output
[60] Comparator 0 See par. group 13-1*. If Comparator 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the output
will go high. Otherwise, it will be low.
[70] Logic Rule 0 See par. group 13-4*. If Logic Rule 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the output
[80] SL Digital Output A See par.13-52 SL Controller Action. The input will go high whenever the
Smart Logic Action [38] Set dig. out. A high is executed. The input will go
low whenever the Smart Logic Action [32] Set dig. out. A low is executed.
[81] SL Digital Output B See par.13-52 SL Controller Action. The input will go high whenever the
Smart Logic Action [39] Set dig. out. Bhigh is executed. The input will go
low whenever the Smart Logic Action [33] Set dig. out. B low is executed.
[82] SL Digital Output C See par.13-52 SL Controller Action. The input will go high whenever the
Smart Logic Action [40] Set dig. out. C high is executed. The input will go
low whenever the Smart Logic Action [34] Set dig. out. C low is executed.
[83] SL Digital Output D See par.13-52 SL Controller Action. The input will go high whenever the
Smart Logic Action [41] Set dig. out. D high is executed. The input will go
low whenever the Smart Logic Action [35] Set dig. out. D low is executed.
[84] SL Digital Output E See par.13-52 SL Controller Action. The input will go high whenever the
Smart Logic Action [42] Set dig. out. E high is executed. The input will go
low whenever the Smart Logic Action [36] Set dig. out. E low is executed.
[85] SL Digital Output F See par.13-52 SL Controller Action. The input will go high whenever the
Smart Logic Action [43] Set dig. out. F high is executed. The input will go
low whenever the Smart Logic Action [37] Set dig. out. F low is executed.
[160] No alarm The output is high when no alarm is present.

[161] Running reverse The output is high when the adjustable frequency drive is running coun-
ter-clockwise (the logical product of the status bits running AND re-
verse).
[165] Local reference active The output is high when par.3-13 Reference Site = [2] Local or when par.
3-13 Reference Site = [0] Linked to hand auto at the same time as the
keypad is in [Hand on] mode.
[166] Remote reference active The output is high when par.3-13 Reference Site [1] or Linked to hand/
auto [0] while the keypad is in [Auto on] mode.
[167] Start command active The output is high when there is an active start command (i.e., via digital
input bus connection or [Hand on] or [Auto on], and no stop command
is active.
[168] Drive in hand mode The output is high when the adjustable frequency drive is in Hand on
mode (as indicated by the LED light above [Hand on].
[169] Drive in auto mode The output is high when the adjustable frequency drive is in Hand on
mode (as indicated by the LED light above [Auto on].
[180] Clock Fault The clock function has been reset to default (2000-01-01) because of a
power failure.
[181] Preventive Maintenance One or more of the preventive maintenance events programmed in par.
23-10 Maintenance Item has passed the time for the specified action in
par.23-11 Maintenance Action.
[190] No-Flow A No-Flow situation or Minimum Speed situation has been detected if
enabled in par.22-22 Low Speed Detection.
[191] Dry Pump A dry pump condition has been detected.
[192] End of Curve A pump running with max. speed for a period of time without reaching
the set pressure has been detected. To enable this function, see par.
22-50 End of Curve Function.
[193] Sleep Mode The adjustable frequency drive/system has set to sleep mode. See par.
22-4*.
[194] Broken Belt A broken belt condition has been detected. This function must be ena-
bled in par.22-60 Broken Belt Function.
[195] Bypass Valve Control The bypass valve control (digital/relay output in the adjustable frequency
drive) is used for compressor systems to unload the compressor during
start-up by using a bypass valve. After the start command is given, the
bypass valve will be open until the adjustable frequency drive reaches
par.4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]). After the limit has been reached
the bypass valve will be closed, allowing the compressor to operate nor-
mally. This procedure will not be activated again before a new start is
initiated and the adjustable frequency drive speed is zero during the re-
ceiving of start signal. par.1-71 Start Delay can be used in order to delay
the motor start. The bypass valve control principle:

[196] Fire Mode The adjustable frequency drive is operating in fire mode. See parameter
group24-0* Fire Mode.
[197] Fire Mode was act. The adjustable frequency drive has been operating in fire mode, but is
now back in normal operation.
[198] Drive Bypass To be used as signal for activating an external electromechanical bypass
switching the motor direct on line. See 24-1* Drive Bypass.
CAUTION
If enabling the Drive Bypass function, the adjustable frequency drive is no
longer Safety Certified (for using the Safe Stop in versions where included).
The setting options below are all related to the cascade controller.
Wiring diagrams and settings for parameter, see group 25-** for more details.
[200] Full Capacity All pumps running and at full speed

[201] Pump1 Running One or more of the pumps controlled by the cascade controller are run-
ning. The function will also depend on the setting of in par.25-06 Number
Of Pumps. If set to No [0] Pump 1 refers to the pump controlled by relay
RELAY1 etc. If set to Yes [1], Pump 1 refers to the pump controlled by the
adjustable frequency drive only (without any of the built-in relays in-
volved) and Pump 2 to the pump controlled by the relay RELAY1. See the
table below:
[202] Pump2 Running See [201]
[203] Pump3 Running See [201]
Setting in Par. 5-3* Setting in par.25-06 Number Of Pumps

[0] No [1] Yes
[200] Pump 1 Running Controlled by RELAY1 Adjustable frequency drive control-
led
[201] Pump 2 Running Controlled by RELAY2 Controlled by RELAY1
[203] Pump 3 Running Controlled by RELAY3 Controlled by RELAY2

5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output

Option: Function:
Same options and functions as par. 5-3*.
[0] * No operation
5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output

Same options and functions as par. 5-3*.
Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101)

Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
[1] Control ready
[2] Drive ready
[3] Drive rdy/rem ctrl
[4] Standby / no warning
[5] Running
[6] Running / no warning
[8] Run on ref/no warn
[9] Alarm
[10] Alarm or warning
[11] At torque limit
[12] Out of current range
[13] Below current, low
[14] Above current, high
[15] Out of speed range
[16] Below speed, low
[17] Above speed, high
[18] Out of feedb. range
[19] Below feedback, low
[20] Above feedback, high
[21] Thermal warning
[25] Reverse
[26] Bus OK
[27] Torque limit stop
[28] Brake: No Brake War
[29] Brake ready, no fault
[30] Brake fault (IGBT)
[35] External Interlock
[41] Below reference, low
[42] Above ref, high
[45] Bus ctrl.

[46] Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout

[55] Pulse output
[60] Comparator 0
[61] Comparator 1
[62] Comparator 2
[63] Comparator 3
[64] Comparator 4
[65] Comparator 5
[70] Logic rule 0
[71] Logic rule 1
[72] Logic rule 2
[73] Logic rule 3
[74] Logic rule 4
[75] Logic rule 5
[80] SL digital output A
[81] SL digital output B
[82] SL digital output C
[83] SL digital output D
[84] SL digital output E
[85] SL digital output F
[160] No alarm
[161] Running reverse
[165] Local ref active
[166] Remote ref active
[167] Start command act.
[168] Hand mode
[169] Auto mode
[180] Clock Fault
[181] Prev. Maintenance
[190] No-Flow
[191] Dry Pump
[192] End Of Curve
[193] Sleep Mode
[194] Broken Belt
[195] Bypass Valve Control
[196] Fire Mode
[197] Fire Mode was Act.
[198] Drive Bypass
[200] Full capacity
[201] Pump 1 running

5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101)

Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
[1] Control ready
[2] Drive ready
[5] Running
[9] Alarm
[25] Reverse
[26] Bus OK
[45] Bus ctrl.
[60] Comparator 0
[61] Comparator 1
[62] Comparator 2
[63] Comparator 3
[64] Comparator 4
[65] Comparator 5
[70] Logic rule 0

[71] Logic rule 1

[72] Logic rule 2
[73] Logic rule 3
[74] Logic rule 4
[75] Logic rule 5
[160] No alarm
[168] Hand mode
[169] Auto mode
[180] Clock Fault
[190] No-Flow
[191] Dry Pump
[192] End Of Curve
[193] Sleep Mode
[194] Broken Belt
[200] Full capacity
5-4* Relays
Parameters for configuring the timing and the output functions for the relays.
5-40 Function Relay

Array [8]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1]
Option MCB 105: Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7] and Relay 9 [8]).
Select options to define the function of the relays.
The selection of each mechanical relay is realized in an array parameter.
Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
[1] Control ready
[2] Drive ready


[5] * Running Default setting for relay 2.

[9] * Alarm Default setting for relay 1.

[25] Reverse
[26] Bus OK
[36] Control word bit 11
[37] Control word bit 12
[45] Bus ctrl.
[60] Comparator 0
[61] Comparator 1
[62] Comparator 2
[63] Comparator 3
[64] Comparator 4
[65] Comparator 5
[70] Logic rule 0
[71] Logic rule 1
[72] Logic rule 2
[73] Logic rule 3

[74] Logic rule 4

[75] Logic rule 5
[160] No alarm
[168] Hand mode
[169] Auto mode
[180] Clock Fault
[190] No-Flow
[191] Dry Pump
[192] End Of Curve
[193] Sleep Mode
[194] Broken Belt
[196] Fire Mode
[197] Fire Mode was Act.
[198] Drive Bypass
[211] Cascade Pump 1

5-41 On Delay, Relay

Array [8](Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2], Relay 4 [3], Relay 5 [4], Relay 6 [5], Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7], Relay 9 [8])
Range: Function:
0.01 s* [0.01 - 600.00 s] Enter the delay of the relay cut-in time. Select one of available mechan-
ical relays and MCB 105 in an array function. See par.5-40 Function
Relay. Relay 3-6 are included in MCB 113.
5-42 Off Delay, Relay

Array [8] (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2], Relay 4 [3], Relay 5 [4], Relay 6 [5], Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7], Relay 9 [8])
Range: Function:
0.01 s* [0.01 - 600.00 s] Enter the delay of the relay cut-out time. Select one of available mechan-
ical relays and MCB 105 in an array function. See par.5-40 Function
Relay.
If the selected event condition changes before the on or off delay timer expires, the relay output is unaffected.
5-5* Pulse Input

The pulse input parameters are used to define an appropriate window for the impulse reference area by con-
figuring the scaling and filter settings for the pulse inputs. Input terminals 29 or 33 act as frequency reference
inputs. Set terminal 29 (par.5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input) or terminal 33 (par.5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input)
to Pulse input [32]. If terminal 29 is used as an input, then set par.5-02 Terminal 29 Mode to Input [0].

5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency

Range: Function:
100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Hz] Enter the low frequency limit corresponding to the low motor shaft speed
(i.e., low reference value) in par.5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
Refer to the diagram in this section.
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency

Range: Function:
100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Hz] Enter the high frequency limit corresponding to the high motor shaft
speed (i.e. high reference value) in par.5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb.
Value.
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
0.000 N/ [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Enter the low reference value limit for the motor shaft speed [RPM]. This
A* N/A] is also the lowest feedback value, see also par.5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./
Feedb. Value.
5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
100.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Enter the high reference value [RPM] for the motor shaft speed and the
N/A* N/A] high feedback value, see also par.5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29

Range: Function:
100 ms* [1 - 1000 ms] Enter the pulse filter time constant. The pulse filter dampens oscillations
of the feedback signal, which is an advantage if there is a lot of noise in
the system. A high time constant value results in better damping, but
also increases the time delay through the filter.
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency

Range: Function:
100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Hz] Enter the low frequency corresponding to the low motor shaft speed (i.e.,
low reference value) in par.5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.

5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency

Range: Function:
100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Hz] Enter the high frequency corresponding to the high motor shaft speed
(i.e., high reference value) in par.5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
0.000 N/ [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Enter the low reference value [RPM] for the motor shaft speed. This is
A* N/A] also the low feedback value, see also par.5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value.
5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
100.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Enter the high reference value [RPM] for the motor shaft speed. See also
N/A* N/A] par.5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33

Range: Function:
100 ms* [1 - 1000 ms] Enter the pulse filter time constant. The low-pass filter reduces the in-
fluence on, and dampens oscillations in, the feedback signal from the
control.
This is an advantage, if, for example, there is a great amount of noise in
the system. This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is run-
ning.
5-6* Pulse Outputs

Parameters for configuring the scaling and output functions of pulse outputs. The pulse outputs are designated
for terminals 27 or 29. Select terminal 27 output in par.5-01 Terminal 27 Mode and terminal 29 output in par.
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
Options for readout output variables:

[0] No operation
[45] Bus ctrl.
[48] Bus ctrl., timeout
[100] Output frequency
[101] Reference
[102] Feedback
[103] Motor current
[104] Torque relative to limit
[105] Torque relative to rated
[106] Power
[107] Speed
[108] Torque
[109] Max Out Freq
[113] Ext. Closed-loop
5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable

Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
[45] Bus ctrl.
[100] Output freq. 0-100
[101] Reference Min-Max
[102] Feedback +-200%
[103] Motor cur. 0-Imax
[104] Torque 0-Tlim
[105] Torque 0-Tnom
[106] Power 0-Pnom
[107] Speed 0-HighLim
5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27

Set the maximum frequency for terminal 27, corresponding to the output variable selected in par.5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output
Variable.
Range: Function:
5000 [0 - 32000 Hz]
Hz*
5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable

Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
[45] Bus ctrl.


[102] Feedback +-200%
[104] Torque 0-Tlim
[105] Torque 0-Tnom
[106] Power 0-Pnom
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29

Set the maximum frequency for terminal 29 corresponding to the output variable set in par.5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Varia-
ble.
Range: Function:
5000 [0 - 32000 Hz]
Hz*
5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable

Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
[45] Bus ctrl.
[102] Feedback +-200%
[104] Torque 0-Tlim
[105] Torque 0-Tnom
[106] Power 0-Pnom
5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6

Select the maximum frequency on terminal X30/6 referring to the output variable in par.5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Varia-
ble. This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
This parameter is active when option module MCB 101 is mounted in the adjustable frequency drive.
Range: Function:
Applica- [0 - 32000 Hz]
tion de-
pend-
ent*

5-9*Bus Controlled
This parameter group selects digital and relay outputs via a serial communication bus setting.
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 2147483647 N/A] This parameter holds the state of the digital outputs and relays that is
controlled by bus.
A logical '1' indicates that the output is high or active.
A logical '0' indicates that the output is low or inactive.
Bit 0 CC Digital Output Terminal 27

Bit 1 CC Digital Output Terminal 29
Bit 2 GPIO Digital Output Terminal X 30/6
Bit 3 GPIO Digital Output Terminal X 30/7
Bit 4 CC Relay 1 output terminal
Bit 5 CC Relay 2 output terminal
Bit 6 Option B Relay 1 output terminal
Bit 9-15 Reserved for future terminals
Bit 16 Option C Relay 1 output terminal
5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [0.00 - 100.00 %]
5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [0.00 - 100.00 %]
5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [0.00 - 100.00 %]
5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [0.00 - 100.00 %]
5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [0.00 - 100.00 %]
5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [0.00 - 100.00 %]

Main Menu - Analog In/Out - Group 6

6-** Analog In/Out
Parameter group for configuring the analog input and output.
6-0* Analog I/O Mode

Parameter group for setting up the analog I/O configuration.
The adjustable frequency drive is equipped with 2 analog inputs: Terminal 53 and 54. The analog inputs can
freely be allocated to either voltage (010 V) or current input (0/420 mA)
NOTE
Thermistors may be connected to either an analog or a digital input.
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time

Range: Function:
10 s* [1 - 99 s] Enter the Live Zero Timeout time period. Live Zero Timeout Time is active
for analog inputs, i.e., terminal 53 or terminal 54, used as reference or
feedback sources. If the reference signal value associated with the se-
lected current input falls below 50% of the value set in par.6-10 Terminal
53 Low Voltage, par.6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current, par.6-20 Terminal 54
Low Voltage or par.6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current for a time period longer
than the time set in par.6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time, the function selec-
ted in par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function will be activated.
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function

Option: Function:
Select the timeout function. The function set in par.6-01 Live Zero Time-
out Function will be activated if the input signal on terminal 53 or 54 is
below 50% of the value in par.6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage, par.
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current, par.6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or par.
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current for a time period defined in par.6-00 Live
Zero Timeout Time. If several timeouts occur simultaneously, the ad-
justable frequency drive prioritizes the timeout functions as follows:
1. par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
2. par.8-04 Control Timeout Function
The output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive can be:
[1] frozen at the present value
[2] overruled to stop
[3] overruled to jog speed
[4] overruled to max. speed
[5] overruled to stop with subsequent trip
[0] * Off
[1] Freeze output
[2] Stop
[3] Jogging

[4] Max. speed

[5] Stop and trip
6-02 Fire Mode Live Zero Timeout Function

Option: Function:
The function set in par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function will be activated
if the input signal on analog inputs is below 50% of the value defined in
parameter group 6-1* to 6-6* "Terminal xx Low Current or Terminal
xx Low Voltage" for a time period defined in par.6-00 Live Zero Timeout
Time.
[0] * Off
[1] Freeze output
[2] Stop
[3] Jogging
[4] Max. speed
6-1* Analog Input 1

Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for analog input 1 (terminal 53).
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage

Range: Function:
0.07 V* [Application dependant] Enter the low voltage value. This analog input scaling value should cor-
respond to the low reference/feedback value set in par.6-14 Terminal 53
Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage

Range: Function:
10.00 V* [Application dependant] Enter the high voltage value. This analog input scaling value should cor-
respond to the high reference/feedback value set in par.6-15 Terminal 53
High Ref./Feedb. Value.
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current

Range: Function:
4.00 [Application dependant] Enter the low current value. This reference signal should correspond to
mA* the low reference/feedback value, set in par.6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./
Feedb. Value. The value must be set at >2 mA in order to activate the Live
Zero Timeout Function in par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.

6-13 Terminal 53 High Current

Range: Function:
20.00 [Application dependant] Enter the high current value corresponding to the high reference/feed-
mA* back set in par.6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
0.000 N/ [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Enter the analog input scaling value that corresponds to the low voltage/
A* N/A] low current set in par.6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage and par.6-12 Termi-
nal 53 Low Current.
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
Applica- [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Enter the analog input scaling value that corresponds to the high voltage/
tion de- N/A] high current value set in par.6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage and par.
pend- 6-13 Terminal 53 High Current.
ent*
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant

Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10.000 s] Enter the time constant. This is a first-order digital low pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise in terminal 53. A high time con-
stant value improves dampening but also increases the time delay
through the filter.
6-17 Terminal 53 Live Zero

Option: Function:
This parameter makes it possible to disable the Live Zero monitoring. For
example, this is to be used if the analog outputs are used as part of a de-
central I/O system (e.g., when not used as part of any adjustable fre-
quency drive related control functions, but for feeding a building
management system with data).
[0] Disabled
[1] * Enabled
6-2* Analog Input 2

Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for analog input 2 (terminal 54).
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage

Range: Function:
0.07 V* [Application dependant] Enter the low voltage value. This analog input scaling value should cor-
respond to the low reference/feedback value, set in par.6-24 Terminal 54
Low Ref./Feedb. Value.

6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage

Range: Function:
10.00 V* [Application dependant] Enter the high voltage value. This analog input scaling value should cor-
respond to the high reference/feedback value set in par.6-25 Terminal 54
High Ref./Feedb. Value.
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current

Range: Function:
4.00 [Application dependant] Enter the low current value. This reference signal should correspond to
mA* the low reference/feedback value, set in par.6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./
Feedb. Value. The value must be set at >2 mA in order to activate the Live
Zero Timeout Function in par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current

Range: Function:
20.00 [Application dependant] Enter the high current value corresponding to the high reference/feed-
mA* back value set in par.6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
0.000 N/ [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Enter the analog input scaling value that corresponds to the low voltage/
A* N/A] low current value set in par.6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage and par.
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current.
6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
100.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Enter the analog input scaling value that corresponds to the high voltage/
N/A* N/A] high current value set in par.6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage and par.
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current.
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant

Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10.000 s] Enter the time constant. This is a first-order digital low pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise in terminal 54. A high time con-
stant value improves dampening but also increases the time delay
through the filter.
6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero

Option: Function:
This parameter makes it possible to disable the Live Zero monitoring. For
example, this to be used if the analog outputs are used as part of a de-
central I/O system (e.g., when used not as part of any adjustable fre-
quency drive related control functions, but for feeding a building
management system with data).
[0] Disabled
[1] * Enabled

6-3* Analog Input 3 MCB 101

Parameter group for configuring the scale and limits for analog input 3 (X30/11) placed on option module MCB
101.
6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage

Range: Function:
0.07 V* [Application dependant] Sets the analog input scaling value to correspond to the low reference/
feedback value (set in par.6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value).
6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage

Range: Function:
10.00 V* [Application dependant] Sets the analog input scaling value to correspond to the high reference/
feedback value (set in par.6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value).
6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
0.000 N/ [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Sets the analog input scaling value to correspond to the low voltage val-
A* N/A] ue (set in par.6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage).
6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
100.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Sets the analog input scaling value to correspond to the high voltage
N/A* N/A] value (set in par.6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage).
6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant

Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10.000 s] A 1st order digital low pass filter time constant for suppressing electrical
noise on terminal X30/11.
par.6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant cannot be changed while the
motor is running.
6-37 Term. X30/11 Live Zero

Option: Function:
This parameter makes it possible to disable Live Zero monitoring. For
example, this may be used if the analog outputs are used as part of a
decentral I/O system (e.g., when not part of any adjustable frequency
drive-related control functions, but feeding a building management sys-
tem with data).
[0] * Disabled
[1] * Enabled

6-4* Analog Input 4 MCB 101

Parameter group for configuring the scale and limits for analog input 4 (X30/12) placed on option module MCB
101.
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage

Range: Function:
0.07 V* [Application dependant] Sets the analog input scaling value to correspond to the low reference/
feedback value set in par.6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage

Range: Function:
10.00 V* [Application dependant] Sets the analog input scaling value to correspond to the high reference/
feedback value set in par.6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
0.000 N/ [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Sets the analog output scaling value to correspond to the low voltage
A* N/A] value set in par.6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage.
6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
100.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Sets the analog input scaling value to correspond to the high voltage
N/A* N/A] value set in par.6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage.
6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant

Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10.000 s] A 1st order digital low pass filter time constant for suppressing electrical
noise on terminal X30/12.
par.6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant cannot be changed while the
motor is running.
6-47 Term. X30/12 Live Zero

Option: Function:
This parameter makes it possible to disable Live Zero monitoring. For
example, this may be used if the analog outputs are used as part of a
decentral I/O system (e.g., when not part of any adjustable frequency
drive-related control functions, but feeding a building management sys-
tem with data).
[0] * Disabled
[1] * Enabled

6-5* Analog Output 1

Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for analog output 1, i.e., Terminal 42. Analog outputs are
current outputs: 0/420 mA. Common terminal (terminal 39) is the same terminal and has the same electrical
potential for analog common and digital common connection. Resolution on analog output is 12 bit.
6-50 Terminal 42 Output

Option: Function:
Select the function of Terminal 42 as an analog current output. A motor
current of 20 mA corresponds to Imax.
[0] * No operation
[100] Output freq. 0-100 : 0100 Hz, (020 mA)
[101] Reference Min-Max : Minimum reference - Maximum reference, (020 mA)
[102] Feedback +-200% : -200% to +200% of par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb., (020 mA)
[103] Motor cur. 0-Imax : 0 - Inverter Max. Current (par.16-37 Inv. Max. Current), (020 mA)
[104] Torque 0-Tlim : 0 - Torque limit (par.4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode), (020 mA)
[105] Torque 0-Tnom : 0 - Motor rated torque, (020 mA)
[106] Power 0-Pnom : 0 - Motor rated power, (020 mA)
[107] * Speed 0-HighLim : 0 - Speed High Limit (par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] and par.
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]), (020 mA)
[113] Ext. Closed-loop 1 : 0100%, (020 mA)
[130] Out fr 0-100 4-20 : 0100 Hz
[131] Reference 4-20mA : Minimum Reference - Maximum Reference
[132] Feedback 4-20mA : -200% to +200% of par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.
[133] Motor cur. 4-20mA : 0 - Inverter Max. Current (par.16-37 Inv. Max. Current)
[134] Torq.0-lim 4-20mA : 0 - Torque limit (par.4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode)
[135] Torq.0-nom 4-20mA : 0 - Motor rated torque
[136] Power 4-20mA : 0 - Motor rated power
[137] Speed 4-20mA : 0 - Speed High Limit (4-13 and 4-14)
[139] Bus ctrl. : 0100%, (020 mA)
[140] Bus ctrl. 4-20 mA : 0 - 100%
[141] Bus ctrl t.o. : 0100%, (020 mA)
[142] Bus ctrl 4-20mA t.o. : 0 - 100%
[143] Ext. CL 1 4-20 mA : 0 - 100%
[144] Ext. CL 2 4-20 mA : 0 - 100%
[145] Ext. CL 3 4-20 mA : 0 - 100%

NOTE: Values for setting the Minimum Reference is found in open-loop par.3-02 Minimum Reference and for
closed-loop par.20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb. - values for maximum reference for open-loop is found in
par.3-03 Maximum Reference and for closed-loop par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb..
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [0.00 - 200.00 %]
6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale

Range: Function:
100.00 [0.00 - 200.00 %]
%*
EXAMPLE 1:
Variable value= OUTPUT FREQUENCY, range = 0100 Hz
Range needed for output = 050 Hz
Output signal 0 or 4 mA is needed at 0 Hz (0% of range) - set par.6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to 0%
Output signal 20 mA is needed at 50 Hz (50% of range) - set par.6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 50%

EXAMPLE 2:
Variable= FEEDBACK, range= -200% to +200%
Range needed for output= 0100%
Output signal 0 or 4 mA is needed at 0% (50% of range) - set par.6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to 50%
Output signal 20 mA is needed at 100% (75% of range) - set par.6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 75%


EXAMPLE 3:
Variable value= REFERENCE, range= Min ref - Max ref
Range needed for output= Min ref (0%) - Max ref (100%), 010 mA
Output signal 0 or 4 mA is needed at Min ref - set par.6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to 0%
Output signal 10 mA is needed at Max ref (100% of range) - set par.6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 200%
(20 mA / 10 mA x 100%=200%).

6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control
Range: Function:
0.00 %* [0.00 - 100.00 %]
6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [0.00 - 100.00 %]
6-6* Analog Output 2 MCB 101

Analog outputs are current outputs: 0/420 mA. Common terminal (terminal X30/8) is the same terminal and
electrical potential for analog common connection. Resolution on analog output is 12 bit.
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output
Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
[102] Feedback +-200%
[104] Torque 0-Tlim
[105] Torque 0-Tnom
[106] Power 0-Pnom
[130] Out fr 0-100 4-20

[131] Reference 4-20mA

[132] Feedback 4-20mA
[133] Motor cur. 4-20mA
[134] Torq.0-lim 4-20mA
[135] Torq.0-nom 4-20mA
[136] Power 4-20mA
[137] Speed 4-20mA
[139] Bus ctrl.
[140] Bus ctrl. 4-20 mA
[141] Bus ctrl t.o.
[142] Bus ctrl 4-20mA t.o.
[143] Ext. CL 1 4-20 mA
[144] Ext. CL 2 4-20 mA
[145] Ext. CL 3 4-20 mA
6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [0.00 - 200.00 %]
6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale

Range: Function:
100.00 [0.00 - 200.00 %]
%*
6-63 Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [0.00 - 100.00 %]
6-64 Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [0.00 - 100.00 %]
Main Menu - Communications and Options - Group 8

8-** Comm. and Options
Parameter group for configuring communications and options.
8-0* General Settings

General settings for communications and options.
8-01 Control Site

Option: Function:
The setting in this parameter overrides the settings in par.8-50 Coasting
Select to par.8-56 Preset Reference Select.
[0] * Digital and ctrl. word Control by using both digital input and control word.
[1] Digital only Control by using digital inputs only.

[2] Control word only Control by using control word only.
8-02 Control Source

Option: Function:
Select the source of the control word: one of two serial interfaces or four
installed options. During initial power-up, the adjustable frequency drive
automatically sets this parameter to Option A [3] if it detects a valid serial
communication bus option installed in slot A. If the option is removed,
the adjustable frequency drive detects a change in the configuration, sets
par.8-02 Control Source back to default setting Adjustable Frequency
Drive Port, and the adjustable frequency drive then trips. If an option is
installed after initial power-up, the setting of par.8-02 Control Source will
not change but the adjustable frequency drive will trip and display: Alarm
67 Option Changed.
[0] None
[1] FC RS-485
[2] FC USB
[3] * Option A
[4] Option B
[5] Option C0
[6] Option C1
[30] External Can
8-03 Control Timeout Time

Range: Function:
Applica- [1.0 - 18000.0 s] Enter the maximum time expected to pass between the reception of two
tion de- consecutive messages. If this time is exceeded, it indicates that the serial
pend- communication has stopped. The function selected in par.8-04 Control
ent* Timeout Function Control Timeout Function will then be carried out.
In LonWorks, the following variables will trigger the Control Word Time
parameter:
nviStartStop
nviReset Fault
nviControlWord
nviDrvSpeedStpt
nviRefPcnt
nviRefHz
8-04 Control Timeout Function

Option: Function:
Select the timeout function. The timeout function is activated when the
control word fails to be updated within the time period specified in par.
8-03 Control Timeout Time. Choice [20] only appears after setting the
Metasys N2 protocol.
[0] * Off

[1] Freeze output

[2] Stop
[3] Jogging
[4] Max. speed
[5] Stop and trip
[7] Select setup 1
[8] Select setup 2
[9] Select setup 3
[10] Select setup 4
[20] N2 Override Release
In LonWorks, the timeout function is also activated when the following SNVTs fail to be updated within the time
period specified in par.8-03 Control Timeout Time:
nviStartStop nviDrvSpeedStpt
nviReset Fault nviRefPcnt
nviControlWord nviRefHz
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function

Option: Function:
Select the action after receiving a valid control word following a timeout.
This parameter is active only when par.8-04 Control Timeout Function is
set to [Set-up 1-4].
[0] Hold set-up Retains the set-up selected in par.8-04 Control Timeout Function and
displays a warning, until par.8-06 Reset Control Timeout toggles. Then
the adjustable frequency drive resumes its original set-up.
[1] * Resume set-up Resumes the set-up active prior to the timeout.
8-06 Reset Control Timeout

Option: Function:
This parameter is active only when the choice Hold set-up [0] has been
selected in par.8-05 End-of-Timeout Function.
[0] * Do not reset Retains the set-up specified in par.8-04 Control Timeout Function, [Select
set-up 1-4] following a control timeout.
[1] Do reset Returns the adjustable frequency drive to the original set-up following a
control word timeout. When the value is set to Do reset [1], the adjustable
frequency drive performs the reset and then immediately reverts to the
Do not reset [0] setting.
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger

Option: Function:
This parameter has no function for LonWorks.
[0] * Disable
[1] Trigger on alarms
[2] Trigger alarm/warn.

8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings

Parameters for configuring the option control word profile.
8-10 Control Profile

Option: Function:
Select the interpretation of the control and status words corresponding
to the installed serial communication bus. Only the selections valid for
the serial communication bus installed in slot A will be visible in the
keypad display.
[0] * FC profile
[1] PROFIdrive profile
[5] ODVA
[7] CANopen DSP 402
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW

Option: Function:
This parameter enables configuration of bits 12 15 in the status word.
[0] No function
[1] * Profile Default Function corresponds to the profile default selected in par.8-10 Control
Profile.
[2] Alarm 68 Only Only set in the event of Alarm 68.
[3] Trip excl Alarm 68 Set in the event of a trip, except if the trip is executed by Alarm 68.
[16] T37 DI status The bit indicates the status of terminal 37.
0 indicates T37 is low (safe stop)
1 indicates T37 is high (normal)
8-3* Adjustable Frequency Drive Port Settings

Parameters for configuring the Adjustable Frequency Drive Port.
8-30 Protocol
Option: Function:
Protocol selection for the integrated FC (standard) Port (RS485) on the
control card.
Parameter group 8-7* is only visible when Adjustable Frequency Drive
Option [9] is chosen.
[0] * FC Communication according to the FC protocol as described in the TR200

Design Guide, RS 485 Installation and Set-up .
[1] FC MC Same as FC [0] but to be used when downloading SW to the adjustable

frequency drive or uploading dll file (covering information regarding pa-
rameters available in the adjustable frequency drive and their inter-
dependencies) to Trane Drive Utility, TDU.
[2] Modbus RTU Communication according to the Modbus RTU protocol as described in
the TR200 Design Guide, RS 485 Installation and Set-up .
[3] Metasys N2 Communication protocol. The N2 software protocol is designed to be

general in nature in order to accommodate the unique properties each

device may have. Please see separate manual TR200 MetasysMG.

12.NX.YY.
[4] FLN
[9] FC Option To be used when a gateway is connected to the integrated RS 485 port,
e.g., the BACnet gateway.
The following changes will take place:
-The address for the adjustable frequency drive port will be set to 1 and
par.8-31 Address, is now used to set the address for the gateway on the
network, e.g., BACnet.
-Baud rate for the Drive port will be set to a fixed value (115,200 Baud)
and par.8-32 Baud Rate is now used to set the baud rate for the network
port (e.g., BACnet) on the gateway.
[20] LEN
NOTE: Further details can be found in the Metasys manual.
8-31 Address
Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits

Option: Function:
Parity and Stop Bits for the protocol par.8-30 Protocol using the Adjust-
able Frequency Drive Port. For some of the protocols, not all options will
be visible. Default depends on the protocol selected.
[0] * Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit

[1] Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit
[2] No Parity, 1 Stop Bit
[3] No Parity, 2 Stop Bits
8-35 Minimum Response Delay

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
8-36 Maximum Response Delay

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*

8-37 Maximum Inter-Char Delay

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
8-40 Telegram selection

Option: Function:
Enables use of freely configurable messages or standard messages for
the adjustable frequency drive port.
[1] * Standard telegram 1

[101] PPO 1
[102] PPO 2
[103] PPO 3
[104] PPO 4
[105] PPO 5
[106] PPO 6
[107] PPO 7
[108] PPO 8
[200] Custom telegram 1
8-5* Digital/Bus
Parameters for configuring the control word Digital/Bus merging.
8-50 Coasting Select

Option: Function:
Select control of the coasting function via the terminals (digital input)
and/or via the bus.
[0] Digital input Activates Start command via a digital input.
[1] Bus Activates Start command via the serial communication port or serial
communication option.
[2] Logic AND Activates Start command via the serial communication bus/serial com-
munication port, AND additionally via one of the digital inputs.
[3] * Logic OR Activates Start command via the serial communication bus/serial com-
munication port OR via one of the digital inputs.
NOTE: This parameter is active only when par.8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital and control word.
8-52 DC Brake Select

Option: Function:
Select control of the DC brake via the terminals (digital input) and/or via
the serial communication bus.

8-53 Start Select

Option: Function:
Select control of the adjustable frequency drive start function via the ter-
minals (digital input) and/or via the serial communication bus.
8-54 Reverse Select

Option: Function:
Select control of the adjustable frequency drive reverse function via the
terminals (digital input) and/or via the serial communication bus.
[0] * Digital input Activates Reverse command via a digital input.
[1] Bus Activates Reverse command via the serial communication port or serial
[2] Logic AND Activates Reverse command via the serial communication bus/serial
communication port, AND additionally via one of the digital inputs.
[3] Logic OR Activates Reverse command via the serial communication bus/serial
communication port OR via one of the digital inputs.
8-55 Set-up Select

Option: Function:
Select control of the adjustable frequency drive set-up selection via the
terminals (digital input) and/or via the serial communication bus.
[0] Digital input Activates the set-up selection via a digital input.
[1] Bus Activates the set-up selection via the serial communication port or serial

[2] Logic AND Activates the set-up selection via the serial communication bus/serial
communication port, AND additionally via one of the digital inputs.
[3] * Logic OR Activate the set-up selection via the serial communication bus/serial
communication port OR via one of the digital inputs.
8-56 Preset Reference Select

Option: Function:
Select control of the adjustable frequency drive Preset Reference selec-
tion via the terminals (digital input) and/or via the serial communication
bus.
[0] Digital input Activates Preset Reference selection via a digital input.
[1] Bus Activates Preset Reference selection via the serial communication port
or serial communication option.
[2] Logic AND Activates Preset Reference selection via the serial communication bus/
serial communication port, AND additionally via one of the digital inputs.
[3] * Logic OR Activates the Preset Reference selection via the serial communication
bus/serial communication port OR via one of the digital inputs.
8-7* BACnet
BACnet configuration
8-70 BACnet Device Instance

Range: Function:
1 N/A* [0 - 4194304 N/A] Enter a unique ID number for the BACnet device.
NOTE: This parameter is active only when par.8-30 Protocol is set to [9] Drive Option.
8-72 MS/TP Max Masters

Range: Function:
127 N/ [0 - 127 N/A] Define the address of the master which holds the highest address in this
A* network. Decreasing this value optimizes polling for the token.
NOTE: This parameter is active only when par.8-30 Protocol is set to [9] Option.
8-73 MS/TP Max Info Frames

Range: Function:
1 N/A* [1 - 65534 N/A] Define how many info/data frames the device is allowed to send while
holding the token.
8-74 "I-Am" Service

Option: Function:
[0] * Send at power-up

[1] Continuously Choose whether the device should send the "I-Am" service message only
at power-up or continuously with an interval of approx. 1 min.
8-75 Initialization Password

Range: Function:
Applica- [0 - 0 N/A] Enter the password needed for execution of Drive Re-initialization from
tion de- BACnet.
pend-
ent*
NOTE: This parameter is active only when par.8-30 Protocol is set to [9] Drive Option.
8-8* Adjustable Frequency Drive Port Diagnostics

These parameters are used for monitoring the bus communication via the Adjustable Frequency Drive Port.
8-80 Bus Message Count

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] This parameter shows the number of valid messages detected on the
bus.
8-81 Bus Error Count

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] This parameter shows the number of messages with faults (e.g., CRC
fault), detected on the bus.
8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] This parameter shows the number of valid messages addressed to the
slave, sent by the adjustable frequency drive.
8-83 Slave Error Count

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] This parameter shows the number of error messages, which could not
be executed by the adjustable frequency drive.
8-84 Slave Messages Sent

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A]
8-85 Slave Timeout Errors

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A]

8-9* Bus Jog

Parameters for configuring the Bus Jog.
8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed

Range: Function:
100 [Application dependant] Enter the jog speed. This is a fixed jog speed activated via the serial port
RPM* or serial communication bus option.
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed

Range: Function:
200 [Application dependant] Enter the jog speed. This is a fixed jog speed activated via the serial port
RPM* or serial communication bus option.
8-94 Bus Feedback 1

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [-200 - 200 N/A] Write a feedback to this parameter via the serial communication port or
serial communication bus option. This parameter must be selected in
par.20-00 Feedback 1 Source, par.20-03 Feedback 2 Source or par.
20-06 Feedback 3 Source as a feedback source.
8-95 Bus Feedback 2

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [-200 - 200 N/A] See par.8-94 Bus Feedback 1 for further details.
8-96 Bus Feedback 3

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [-200 - 200 N/A] See par.8-94 Bus Feedback 1 for further details.

Main Menu - LonWorks - Group 11

LonWorks, 11-**
Parameter group for all LonWorks specific parameters.
Parameters related to LonWorks ID.
11-00 Neuron ID
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the Neuron chip's unique Neuron ID number.
11-01 Domain
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A]
11-02 Subnet ID
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 255 N/A]
11-03 Node ID
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 255 N/A]
11-10 Drive Profile

Option: Function:
This parameter allows selecting between LONMARK Functional Profiles.
[0] * VSD profile The Trane Profile and the Node Object are common for all profiles.
[1] Pump controller
11-15 LON Warning Word

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 65535 N/A] This parameter contains the LON specific warnings.
Bit Status
0 Internal fault
1 Internal fault
2 Internal fault
3 Internal fault
4 Internal fault
5 Invalid type change for nvoAnIn1
6 Invalid type change for nvoAnIn2
7 Invalid type change for nvo109AnIn1
10 Initialization error
11 Internal communication error
12 Software revision mismatch
13 Bus not active
14 Option not present
15 LON input (nvi/nci) exceeds limits

11-17 XIF Revision

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] This parameter contains the version of the external interface file on the
Neuron C chip on the LON option.
11-18 LonWorks Revision

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] This parameter contains the software version of the application program
on the Neuron C chip on the LON option.
11-21 Store Data Values

Option: Function:
This parameter is used to activate storing of data in non-volatile memory.
[0] * Off Store function is inactive.
[2] Store all set-ups Stores all parameter values in the E2PROM. The value returns to Off
when all parameter values have been stored.

Main Menu - Smart Logic - Group 13

13-** Prog. Features Prog. Features
Smart Logic Control (SLC) is essentially a sequence of user defined actions (see par.13-52 SL Controller Ac-
tion [x]) executed by the SLC when the associated user defined event (see par.13-51 SL Controller Event [x]) is
evaluated as TRUE by the SLC. Events and actions are each numbered and linked together in pairs. This means
that when event [0] is fulfilled (attains the value TRUE), action [0] is executed. After this, the conditions of event
[1] will be evaluated and if evaluated TRUE, action [1] will be executed and so on. Only one event will be evaluated
at any time. If an event is evaluated as FALSE, nothing happens (in the SLC) during the current scan interval and
no other events will be evaluated. This means that when the SLC starts, it evaluates event [0] (and only event [0])
each scan interval. Only when event [0] is evaluated TRUE, will the SLC execute action [0] and start evaluating
event [1]. It is possible to program from 1 to 20 events and actions.
When the last event / action has been executed, the sequence starts over again from event [0] / action [0]. The
figure shows an example with three events/actions:
Starting and stopping the SLC:

Starting and stopping the SLC can be done by selecting On [1] or Off [0] in par.13-00 SL Controller Mode. The
SLC always starts in state 0 (where it evaluates event [0]). The SLC starts when the start event (defined in par.
13-01 Start Event) is evaluated as TRUE (provided that On [1] is selected in par.13-00 SL Controller Mode). The
SLC stops when the Stop Event (par.13-02 Stop Event) is TRUE. par.13-03 Reset SLC resets all SLC parameters
and starts programming from scratch.
13-0* SLC Settings

Use the SLC settings to activate, deactivate and reset the Smart Logic Control.
13-00 SL Controller Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * Off Disables the Smart Logic Controller.
[1] On Enables the Smart Logic Controller.

13-01 Start Event

Option: Function:
Select the Boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic Con-
trol.
[0] * FALSE Enters the fixed value of FALSE in the logic rule.
[1] TRUE Enters the fixed value TRUE in the logic rule.
[2] Running See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[3] In range See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[4] On reference See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[5] Torque limit See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[6] Current limit See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[7] Out of current range See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[8] Below I low See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[9] Above I high See parameter group 5-3* for further description.

[11] Below speed low See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[12] Above speed high See parameter group 5-3* for further description.

[14] Below feedb. low
[15] Above feedb. high
[16] Thermal warning See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[17] Mains out of range See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[18] Reverse See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[19] Warning See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[20] Alarm (trip) See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[21] Alarm (trip lock) See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[22] Comparator 0 Use the result of comparator 0 in the logic rule.
[26] Logic rule 0 Use the result of logic rule 0 in the logic rule.
[33] Digital input DI18 Use the value of DI18 in the logic rule (High = TRUE).

[39] Start command This event is TRUE if the adjustable frequency drive is started by any
means (either via digital input, serial communication bus or other).
[40] Drive stopped This event is TRUE if the adjustable frequency drive is stopped or coasted
by any means (either via digital input, serial communication bus or oth-
er).
[41] Reset Trip This event is TRUE if the adjustable frequency drive is tripped (but not
trip-locked) and the reset button is pressed.
[42] Auto Reset Trip This event is TRUE if the adjustable frequency drive is tripped (but not
trip-locked) and an automatic reset is issued.
[43] OK Key This event is TRUE if the OK key on the keypad is pressed.
[44] Reset Key This event is TRUE if the Reset key on the keypad is pressed.
[45] Left Key This event is TRUE if the Left key on the keypad is pressed.
[46] Right Key This event is TRUE if the Right key on the keypad is pressed.
[47] Up Key This event is TRUE if the Up key on the keypad is pressed.
[48] Down Key This event is TRUE if the Down key on the keypad is pressed.
13-02 Stop Event

Option: Function:
Select the Boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart Logic
Control.


[13] Out of feedb. range See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[14] Below feedb. low See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[15] Above feedb. high See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[17] Mains out of range See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[30] SL Timeout 0 Use the result of timer 0 in the logic rule.
[39] Start command This event is TRUE if the adjustable frequency drive is started by any

[40] Drive stopped This event is TRUE if the adjustable frequency drive is stopped or coasted
by any means (either via digital input, serial communication bus or oth-
er).
[41] Reset Trip This event is TRUE if the adjustable frequency drive is tripped (but not
trip-locked) and the reset button is pressed.
[42] Auto Reset Trip This event is TRUE if the adjustable frequency drive is tripped (but not
trip-locked) and an automatic reset is issued.
[43] OK Key This event is TRUE if the OK key on the keypad is pressed.
[44] Reset Key This event is TRUE if the Reset key on the keypad is pressed.
[45] Left Key This event is TRUE if the Left key on the keypad is pressed.
[46] Right Key This event is TRUE if the Right key on the keypad is pressed.
[47] Up Key This event is TRUE if the Up key on the keypad is pressed.
[48] Down Key This event is TRUE if the Down key on the keypad is pressed.
[80] No Flow
[81] Dry Pump
[82] End of Curve
[83] Broken Belt
13-03 Reset SLC

Option: Function:
[0] * Do not reset SLC Retains programmed settings in all group 13 parameters (13-*).
[1] Reset SLC Resets all group 13LC-## parameters (13-*) to default settings.
13-1* Comparators
Comparators are used for comparing continuous variables (i.e., output frequency, output current, analog input,
etc.) to fixed preset values. In addition, there are digital values that will be compared to fixed time values. See
explanation in par.13-10 Comparator Operand. Comparators are evaluated once in each scan interval. Use the
result (TRUE or FALSE) directly. All parameters in this parameter group are array parameters with an index of
0 to 5. Select index 0 to program Comparator 0, select index 1 to program Comparator 1, etc.

13-10 Comparator Operand

Array [4]
Option: Function:
Select the variable to be monitored by the comparator.
[0] * DISABLED
[1] Reference
[2] Feedback
[3] Motor speed
[4] Motor current
[5] Motor torque
[6] Motor power
[7] Motor voltage
[8] DC-link voltage
[9] Motor thermal
[10] VLT temp.
[11] Heat sink temp.
[12] Analog input AI53
[13] Analog input AI54
[14] Analog input AIFB10
[15] Analog input AIS24V
[17] Analog input AICCT
[18] Pulse input FI29
[19] Pulse input FI33
[20] Alarm number
[30] Counter A
[31] Counter B
13-11 Comparator Operator

Array [6]
Option: Function:
[0] * < Select < [0] for the result of the evaluation to be TRUE, when the variable
selected in par.13-10 Comparator Operand is smaller than the fixed value
in par.13-12 Comparator Value. The result will be FALSE, if the variable
selected in par.13-10 Comparator Operand is greater than the fixed value
in par.13-12 Comparator Value.
[1] = (equal) Select [1] for the result of the evaluation to be TRUE, when the variable
selected in par.13-10 Comparator Operand is approximately equal to the
fixed value in par.13-12 Comparator Value.
[2] > Select > [2] for the inverse logic of option < [0].

13-12 Comparator Value

Array [6]
Range: Function:
Applica- [-100000.000 - 100000.000 Enter the trigger level for the variable that is monitored by this compa-
tion de- N/A] rator. This is an array parameter containing comparator values 0 to 5.
pend-
ent*
13-2* Timers
This parameter group consists of timer parameters.
Use the result (TRUE or FALSE) from timers directly to define an event (see par.13-51 SL Controller Event), or as
Boolean input in a logic rule (see par.13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1, par.13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 or par.
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3). A timer is only FALSE when started by an action (i.e., Start timer 1 [29]) until the
timer value entered in this parameter is elapsed. Then it becomes TRUE again.
All parameters in this parameter group are array parameters with an index of 0 to 2. Select index 0 to program
Timer 0, select index 1 to program Timer 1, and so on.
13-20 SL Controller Timer

Array [3]
Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
13-4* Logic Rules

Combine up to three boolean inputs (TRUE / FALSE inputs) from timers, comparators, digital inputs, status bits
and events using the logical operators AND, OR, and NOT. Select Boolean inputs for the calculation in par.
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1, par.13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 and par.13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3. Define the
operators used to logically combine the selected inputs in par.13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 and par.13-43 Logic
Rule Operator 2.
Priority of calculation
The results of par.13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1, par.13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 and par.13-42 Logic Rule Boolean
2 are calculated first. The outcome (TRUE / FALSE) of this calculation is combined with the settings of par.
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 and par.13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3, yielding the final result (TRUE / FALSE) of the
logic rule.
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1

Array [6]
Option: Function:


[13] Out of feedb. range See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[14] Below feedb. low See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[15] Above feedb. high See parameter group 5-3* for further description.
[17] Mains out of range See parameter group for further description.

[39] Start command This logic rule is TRUE if the adjustable frequency drive is started by any
[40] Drive stopped This logic rule is TRUE if the adjustable frequency drive is stopped or
coasted by any means (either via digital input, serial communication bus
or other).
[41] Reset Trip This logic rule is TRUE if the adjustable frequency drive is tripped (but
not trip-locked) and the reset button is pressed.
[42] Auto Reset Trip This logic rule is TRUE if the adjustable frequency drive is tripped (but
not trip-locked) and an automatic reset is issued.
[43] OK Key This logic rule is TRUE if the OK key on the keypad is pressed.
[44] Reset Key This logic rule is TRUE if the Reset key on the keypad is pressed.
[45] Left Key This logic rule is TRUE if the Left key on the keypad is pressed.
[46] Right Key This logic rule is TRUE if the Right key on the keypad is pressed.
[47] Up Key This logic rule is TRUE if the Up key on the keypad is pressed.
[48] Down Key This logic rule is TRUE if the Down key on the keypad is pressed.
[80] No Flow
[81] Dry Pump
[82] End of Curve
[83] Broken Belt

13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1

Array [6]
Option: Function:
Select the first logical operator to use on the Boolean inputs from par.
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 and par.13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2.
[13 -XX] signifies the Boolean input of par. 13-*.
[0] * DISABLED Ignores par.13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2, par.13-43 Logic Rule Operator
2, and par.13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
[1] AND Evaluates the expression [13-40] AND [13-42].
[2] OR evaluates the expression [13-40] OR[13-42].
[3] AND NOT evaluates the expression [13-40] AND NOT [13-42].
[4] OR NOT evaluates the expression [13-40] OR NOT [13-42].
[5] NOT AND evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND [13-42].
[6] NOT OR evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR [13-42].
[7] NOT AND NOT evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND NOT [13-42].
[8] NOT OR NOT evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR NOT [13-42].

Array [6]
Option: Function:
Select the second Boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input for the selected logic
rule.
See par.13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 for further descriptions of choices
and their functions.
[0] * FALSE
[1] TRUE
[2] Running
[3] In range
[4] On reference
[5] Torque limit
[6] Current limit
[8] Below I low
[9] Above I high
[11] Below speed low
[12] Above speed high

[17] Mains out of range

[18] Reverse
[19] Warning
[20] Alarm (trip)
[21] Alarm (trip lock)
[22] Comparator 0
[23] Comparator 1
[24] Comparator 2
[25] Comparator 3
[26] Logic rule 0
[27] Logic rule 1
[28] Logic rule 2
[29] Logic rule 3
[30] SL Timeout 0
[31] SL Timeout 1
[32] SL Timeout 2
[33] Digital input DI18
[39] Start command
[40] Drive stopped
[41] Reset Trip
[42] Auto Reset Trip
[43] OK Key
[44] Reset Key
[45] Left Key
[46] Right Key
[47] Up Key
[48] Down Key
[50] Comparator 4
[51] Comparator 5
[60] Logic rule 4
[61] Logic rule 5
[70] SL Timeout 3
[71] SL Timeout 4
[72] SL Timeout 5
[73] SL Timeout 6
[74] SL Timeout 7
[80] No Flow
[81] Dry Pump

[82] End of Curve

[83] Broken Belt
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2

Array [6]
Option: Function:
Select the second logical operator to be used on the Boolean input cal-
culated in par.13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1, par.13-41 Logic Rule Operator
1, and par.13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2, and the Boolean input coming
from par.13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2.
[13-44] signifies the Boolean input of par.13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
[13-40/13-42] signifies the Boolean input calculated in par.13-40 Logic
Rule Boolean 1, par.13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, and par.13-42 Logic
Rule Boolean 2. DISABLED [0] (factory setting). select this option to ig-
nore par.13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
[0] * DISABLED
[1] AND
[2] OR
[3] AND NOT
[4] OR NOT
[5] NOT AND
[6] NOT OR
[7] NOT AND NOT
[8] NOT OR NOT

Array [6]
Option: Function:
Select the third Boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input for the selected logic rule.
See par.13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 for further descriptions of choices
and their functions.
[0] * FALSE
[1] TRUE
[2] Running
[3] In range
[4] On reference
[5] Torque limit
[6] Current limit
[8] Below I low
[9] Above I high


[18] Reverse
[19] Warning
[20] Alarm (trip)
[22] Comparator 0
[23] Comparator 1
[24] Comparator 2
[25] Comparator 3
[26] Logic rule 0
[27] Logic rule 1
[28] Logic rule 2
[29] Logic rule 3
[30] SL Timeout 0
[31] SL Timeout 1
[32] SL Timeout 2
[39] Start command
[40] Drive stopped
[41] Reset Trip
[43] OK Key
[44] Reset Key
[45] Left Key
[46] Right Key
[47] Up Key
[48] Down Key
[50] Comparator 4
[51] Comparator 5
[60] Logic rule 4
[61] Logic rule 5
[70] SL Timeout 3
[71] SL Timeout 4
[72] SL Timeout 5
[73] SL Timeout 6
[74] SL Timeout 7

[80] No Flow
[81] Dry Pump
[82] End of Curve
[83] Broken Belt
13-5* States
Parameters for programming the Logic Controller.
13-51 SL Controller Event

Array [20]
Option: Function:
Select the Boolean input (TRUE or FALSE) to define the Smart Logic
Controller event.
See par.13-02 Stop Event for further descriptions of choices and their
functions.
[0] * FALSE
[1] TRUE
[2] Running
[3] In range
[4] On reference
[5] Torque limit
[6] Current limit
[8] Below I low
[9] Above I high
[18] Reverse
[19] Warning
[20] Alarm (trip)
[22] Comparator 0
[23] Comparator 1
[24] Comparator 2
[25] Comparator 3
[26] Logic rule 0
[27] Logic rule 1
[28] Logic rule 2

[29] Logic rule 3

[30] SL Timeout 0
[31] SL Timeout 1
[32] SL Timeout 2
[39] Start command
[40] Drive stopped
[41] Reset Trip
[43] OK Key
[44] Reset Key
[45] Left Key
[46] Right Key
[47] Up Key
[48] Down Key
[50] Comparator 4
[51] Comparator 5
[60] Logic rule 4
[61] Logic rule 5
[70] SL Timeout 3
[71] SL Timeout 4
[72] SL Timeout 5
[73] SL Timeout 6
[74] SL Timeout 7
[80] No Flow
[81] Dry Pump
[82] End of Curve
[83] Broken Belt
13-52 SL Controller Action

Array [20]
Option: Function:
Select the action corresponding to the SLC event. Actions are executed
when the corresponding event (defined in par.13-51 SL Controller
Event) is evaluated as true. The following actions are available for selec-
tion:
[0] * DISABLED
[1] No action
[2] Select set-up 1 Changes the active set-up (par.0-10 Active Set-up) to 1.

[5] Select set-up 4 Changes the active set-up (par.0-10 Active Set-up) to 4. If the set-up is
changed, it will merge with other set-up commands coming from either
the digital inputs or via a serial communication bus.
[10] Select preset ref 0 Selects preset reference 0.
[17] Select preset ref 7 Selects preset reference 7. If the active preset reference is changed, it will
merge with other preset reference commands coming from either the
digital inputs or via a serial communication bus.
[18] Select ramp 1 Selects ramp 1
[19] Select ramp 2 Selects ramp 2
[22] Run Issues a start command to the adjustable frequency drive.
[23] Run reverse Issues a start reverse command to the adjustable frequency drive.
[24] Stop Issues a stop command to the adjustable frequency drive.
[26] Dcstop Issues a DC stop command to the adjustable frequency drive.
[27] Coast The adjustable frequency drive coasts immediately. All stop commands
including the coast command stop the SLC.
[28] Freeze output Freezes the output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive.
[29] Start timer 0 Starts timer 0, see par.13-20 SL Controller Timer for further description.
[32] Set digital out A low Any output with digital output 1 selected is low (off).
[33] Set digital out B low Any output with digital output 2 selected is low (off).
[34] Set digital out C low Any output with digital output 3 selected is low (off).
[35] Set digital out D low Any output with digital output 4 selected is low (off).
[36] Set digital out E low Any output with digital output 5 selected is low (off).
[37] Set digital out F low Any output with digital output 6 selected is low (off).
[38] Set digital out A high Any output with digital output 1 selected is high (closed).
[39] Set digital out B high Any output with digital output 2 selected is high (closed).

[40] Set digital out C high Any output with digital output 3 selected is high (closed).
[41] Set digital out D high Any output with digital output 4 selected is high (closed).
[42] Set digital out E high Any output with digital output 5 selected is high (closed).
[43] Set digital out F high Any output with digital output 6 selected is high (closed).
[60] Reset Counter A Resets Counter A to zero.
[61] Reset Counter B Resets Counter A to zero.
[70] Start Timer 3 Starts timer 3, see par.13-20 SL Controller Timer for further description.
[80] Sleep Mode
Main Menu - Special Functions -Group 14

14-** Special Functions
Parameter group for configuring special adjustable frequency drive functions.
Parameters for configuring the .
14-00 Switching Pattern

Option: Function:
Select the switching pattern: 60 AVM or SFAVM.
[0] * 60 AVM
[1] SFAVM
14-01 Switching Frequency

Option: Function:
Select the inverter switching frequency. Changing the switching fre-
quency can help to reduce acoustic noise from the motor.
NOTE: The output frequency value of the adjustable frequency drive
must never exceed 1/10 of the switching frequency. When the motor is
running, adjust the switching frequency in par.14-01 Switching Frequen-
cy until the motor is as noiseless as possible. See also par.14-00 Switch-
ing Pattern and the section Derating.
[0] 1.0 kHz

[1] 1.5 kHz
[2] 2.0 kHz
[3] 2.5 kHz
[4] 3.0 kHz
[5] 3.5 kHz

[6] 4.0 kHz

[7] * 5.0 kHz
[8] 6.0 kHz
[9] 7.0 kHz
[10] 8.0 kHz
[11] 10.0 kHz
[12] 12.0 kHz
[13] 14.0 kHz
[14] 16.0 kHz
14-03 Overmodulation
Option: Function:
[0] Off Selects no overmodulation of the output voltage in order to avoid torque
ripple on the motor shaft.
[1] * On The overmodulation function generates an extra voltage of up to 8% of

Umax output voltage without overmodulation, which results in an extra
torque of 1012% in the middle of the oversyncronous range (from 0%
at nominal speed rising to approximately 12% at double nominal speed).
14-04 PWM Random

Option: Function:
[0] * Off No change of the acoustic motor switching noise.
[1] On Transforms the acoustic motor switching noise from a clear ringing tone
to a less noticeable white noise. This is achieved by slightly and ran-
domly altering the synchronism of the pulse width modulated output
phases.
14-1* Line Power On/Off

Parameters for configuring line failure monitoring and handling.
14-10 Mains Failure

Option: Function:
Select the function at which the adjustable frequency drive must act,
when the threshold set in par.14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault has
been reached or a Line Failure Inverse command is activated via one of
the digital inputs (par. 5-1*).
[0] * No function The energy left in the capacitor bank will be used to "drive" the motor,
but will be discharged.
[1] Ctrl. ramp-down The adjustable frequency drive will perform a controlled ramp-down.
par.2-10 Brake Function must be set to Off [0].
[3] Coasting The inverter will turn off and the capacitor bank will back up the control
card, thus ensuring a faster restart when line power is reconnected (for
short power zags).

[4] Kinetic back-up The adjustable frequency drive will ride through by controlling speed for
generative operation of the motor utilizing the moment of inertia of the
system as long as sufficient energy is present.
NOTE
For best performance of controlled ramp-down and kinetic backup, par.1-03 Torque Characteristics should be set to
Compressor [0] or Variable Torque [1] (no automatic energy optimization should be active).
Figure 4. 2: Controlled ramp-down - short line failure. Ramping down to stop, followed by ramping up to reference.
Figure 4. 3: Controlled ramp-down, longer line failure. Controlled ramp-down, longer line failure.
Figure 4. 4: Kinetic backup, short line failure. Ride through as long as the energy in the system allows for it.

Figure 4. 5: Kinetic Backup, longer line failure. The motor is coasted as soon as the energy in the system is too
low.
14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault

Range: Function:
Applica- [180 - 600 V] This parameter defines the threshold voltage at which the selected func-
tion de- tion in par.14-10 Mains Failure should be activated.
pend-
ent*
14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance

Option: Function:
Operating under severe line imbalance conditions reduces the lifetime
of the motor. Conditions are considered severe if the motor operates
continuously near nominal load (such as when a pump or fan runs near
full speed).
When a severe line imbalance is detected:
[0] * Trip Select Trip [0] to trip the adjustable frequency drive.
[1] Warning Select Warning [1] to issue a warning.
[2] Disabled select Disabled [2] for no action.
[3] Derate Select Derate [3] for derating the adjustable frequency drive.
14-2* Trip Reset

Parameters for configuring auto reset handling, special trip handling and control card self test or initialization.
14-20 Reset Mode

Option: Function:
Select the reset function after tripping. Once reset, the adjustable fre-
quency drive can be restarted.
[0] * Manual reset Select Manual reset [0], to perform a reset via [RESET] or via the digital
inputs.
[1] Automatic reset x 1 Select Automatic reset x 1x20 [1]-[12] to perform between one and twen-
ty automatic resets after tripping.
[2] Automatic reset x 2



[13] Infinite auto reset Select Infinite Automatic Reset [13] for continuous resetting after tripping.
NOTE
The motor may start without warning. If the specified number of AUTOMATIC RESETs is reached within 10 minutes,
the adjustable frequency drive enters Manual reset [0] mode. After the Manual reset is performed, the setting of par.
14-20 Reset Mode reverts to the original selection. If the number of automatic resets is not reached within 10 minutes,
or when a Manual reset is performed, the internal AUTOMATIC RESET counter returns to zero.
NOTE
Automatic reset will also be active for resetting safe stop function.
NOTE
The setting in par.14-20 Reset Mode is disregarded if fire mode is active (see par. 24-0*, Fire Mode).
14-21 Automatic Restart Time

Range: Function:
10 s* [0 - 600 s] Enter the time interval from trip to start of the automatic reset function.
This parameter is active when par.14-20 Reset Mode is set to Automatic
reset [1] - [13].
14-22 Operation Mode

Option: Function:
Use this parameter to specify normal operation, to perform tests or to
initialize all parameters except par.15-03 Power-ups, par.15-04 Over
Temps and par.15-05 Over Volts. This function is active only when the
power is cycled (power off-power on) to the adjustable frequency drive.
[0] * Normal operation Select Normal operation [0] for normal operation of the adjustable fre-
quency drive with the motor in the selected application.
[1] Control card test Select Control card test [1] to test the analog and digital inputs and outputs
and the +10 V control voltage. The test requires a test connector with
internal connections.
Use the following procedure for the control card test:
1. Select Control card test [1].
2. Disconnect the line power supply and wait for the light in the display
to go out.
3. Set switches S201 (A53) and S202 (A54) = ON / I.
4. Insert the test plug (see below).

5. Connect to the line power supply.

6. Carry out various tests.
7. The results are displayed on the keypad and the adjustable frequen-
cy drive moves into an infinite loop.
8. par.14-22 Operation Mode is automatically set to normal operation.
Carry out a power cycle to start up in normal operation after a control
card test.
If the test is OK:
keypad readout: Control Card OK.
Disconnect the line power supply and remove the test plug. The green
LED on the control card will light up.
If the test fails:
keypad readout: Control Card I/O failure.
Replace the adjustable frequency drive or control card. The red LED on
the control card is turned on. To test the plugs, connect/group the fol-
lowing terminals as shown below: (18 - 27 - 32), (19 - 29 - 33) and (42 - 53
- 54).
[2] Initialization Select Initialization [2] to reset all parameter values to default settings,
except for par.15-03 Power-ups, par.15-04 Over Temps and par.
15-05 Over Volts. The adjustable frequency drive will reset during the
next power-up.
par.14-22 Operation Mode will also revert to the default setting Normal
operation [0].
[3] Boot mode
14-23 Typecode Setting

Option: Function:
Typecode re-writing. Use this parameter to set the typecode matching
the specific adjustable frequency drive.

14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit

Range: Function:
60 s* [0 - 60 s] Enter the torque limit trip delay in seconds. When the output torque rea-
ches the torque limits (par.4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and par.
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode), a warning is triggered. When the
torque limit warning has been continuously present for the period speci-
fied in this parameter, the adjustable frequency drive trips. Disable the
trip delay by setting the parameter to 60 s = OFF. Thermal adjustable
frequency drive monitoring will still remain active.
14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault

Range: Function:
Applica- [0 - 35 s] When the adjustable frequency drive detects an overvoltage in the set
tion de- time, tripping will be affected after the set time.
pend-
ent*
14-28 Production Settings

Option: Function:
[0] * No action
[1] Service reset
[2] Set Production Mode
14-29 Service Code

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [-2147483647 - Service use only.
2147483647 N/A]
14-3* Current Limit Control

The adjustable frequency drive features an integral current limit controller which is activated when the motor
current, and thus the torque, is higher than the torque limits set in par.4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and par.
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode.
When the current limit is reached during motor operation or regenerative operation, the adjustable frequency
drive will try to reduce torque below the preset torque limits as quickly as possible without losing control of the
motor.
While the current control is active, the adjustable frequency drive can only be stopped by setting a digital input
to Coast inverse [2] or Coast and reset inv. [3]. Any signal on terminals 18 to 33 will not be active until the adjustable
frequency drive is no longer near the current limit.
By using a digital input set to Coast inverse [2] or Coast and reset inv. [3], the motor does not use the ramp-down
time, since the adjustable frequency drive is coasted.
14-30 Current Lim Cont, Proportional Gain

Range: Function:
100 %* [0 - 500 %] Enter the proportional gain value for the current limit controller. Selec-
tion of a high value makes the controller react faster. Too high a setting
leads to controller instability.

14-31 Current Lim Contr, Integration Time

Range: Function:
0.020 s* [0.002 - 2.000 s] Controls the current limit control integration time. Setting it to a lower
value makes it react faster. A setting too low leads to control instability.
14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time

Range: Function:
26.0 [1.0 - 100.0 ms]
ms*
14-4*Energy Optimization
Parameters for adjusting the energy optimization level in both Variable Torque (VT) and Automatic Energy Op-
timization (AEO) mode.
Automatic Energy Optimization is only active if par.1-03 Torque Characteristics, is set for either Auto Energy
Optim. Compressor [2] or Auto Energy Optim. VT [3].
14-40 VT Level
Range: Function:
66 %* [40 - 90 %] Enter the level of motor magnetization at low speed. Selection of a low
value reduces energy loss in the motor, but also reduces load capability.
14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetization

Range: Function:
Applica- [40 - 75 %] Enter the minimum allowable magnetization for AEO. Selection of a low
tion de- value reduces energy loss in the motor, but can also reduce resistance
pend- to sudden load changes.
ent*
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency

Range: Function:
10 Hz* [5 - 40 Hz] Enter the minimum frequency at which the Automatic Energy Optimiza-
tion (AEO) is to be active.
14-43 Motor Cos-Phi

Range: Function:
Applica- [0.40 - 0.95 N/A] The cos(phi) setpoint is automatically set for optimum AEO performance
tion de- during AMA. This parameter should normally not be altered. However,
pend- in some situations it may be necessary to enter a new value to fine tune.
ent*

14-5* Environment
These parameters help the adjustable frequency drive to operate under special environmental conditions.
14-50 RFI 1
Option: Function:
[0] Off Select Off [0] only if the adjustable frequency drive is fed by an isolated
line power source, i.e., from a special IT line power source.
In this mode, the internal RFI filter capacitors between chassis and the
line power RFI filter circuit are cut out to avoid damage to the intermedi-
ate circuit and to reduce the ground capacity currents according to IEC
61800-3.
[1] * On Select On [1] to ensure that the adjustable frequency drive complies with
EMC standards.
14-52 Fan Control

Option: Function:
Select the minimum speed of the main fan.
[0] * Auto Select Auto [0] to run the fan only when the internal temperature of the
adjustable frequency drive is in the range 95F [+35C] to approximately
131F [+55C]. The fan will run at low speed at 95F [+35C] and at full
speed at approximately 131F [+55C].
[1] On 50%
[2] On 75%
[3] On 100%
14-53 Fan Monitor

Option: Function:
Select which action the adjustable frequency drive should take in case a
fan fault is detected.
[0] Disabled
[1] * Warning
[2] Trip

14-6* Auto Derate

This group contains parameters for derating the adjustable frequency drive in case of high temperature.
14-60 Function at Overtemperature

Option: Function:
If either heatsink or control card temperature exceeds a factory-pro-
grammed temperature limit, a warning will be activated. If the tempera-
ture increases further, select whether the adjustable frequency drive
should trip (trip locked) or derate the output current.
[0] * Trip The adjustable frequency drive will trip (trip locked) and generate an
alarm. Power must be cycled to reset the alarm, but will not allow restart
of the motor until the heatsink temperature has dropped below the alarm
limit.
[1] Derate If the critical temperature is exceeded, the output current will be reduced
until the allowable temperature has been reached.
No Trip at Inverter Overload

In some pump systems, the adjustable frequency drive has not been sized properly to yield the current needed
in all points of the operational flow-head characteristic. At these points, the pump will need a current higher
than the rated current of the adjustable frequency drive. The adjustable frequency drive can yield 110% of the
rated current continuously for 60 sec. If still overloaded, the adjustable frequency drive will normally trip (causing
the pump to stop by coasting) and provide an alarm.
It may be preferable to run the pump at reduced speed for a while in case it is not possible to run continuously
at demanded capacity.

Select Function at Inverter Overload, par.14-61 Function at Inverter Overload to automatically reduce pump speed
until the output current is below 100% of the rated current (set in par.14-62 Inv. Overload Derate Current).
The Function at Inverter Overload is an alternative to letting the adjustable frequency drive trip.
The adjustable frequency drive estimates the load on the power section by means of an inverter load counter,
which will cause a warning at 98% and a reset of the warning at 90%. At the value 100%, the adjustable frequency
drive trips and provides an alarm.
Status for the counter can be read in par.16-35 Inverter Thermal.
If par.14-61 Function at Inverter Overload is set to Derate, the pump speed will be reduced when the counter
exceeds 98, and stay reduced until the counter has dropped below 90.7.
If par.14-62 Inv. Overload Derate Current is set, for example, to 95% a steady overload will cause the pump speed
to fluctuate between values corresponding to 110% and 95% of rated output current for the adjustable frequency
drive.
14-61 Function at Inverter Overload

Option: Function:
Is used in case of steady overload beyond the thermal limits (110% for
60 sec.).
[0] * Trip Choose Trip [0] to make the adjustable frequency drive trip and provide
an alarm.
[1] Derate Derate [1] to reduce pump speed in order to decrease the load on the
power section and allowing this to cool down.
14-62 Inv. Overload Derate Current

Range: Function:
95 %* [50 - 100 %] Defines the desired current level (in % of rated output current for the
adjustable frequency drive) when running with reduced pump speed af-
ter load on the adjustable frequency drive has exceeded the allowable
limit (110% for 60 sec.).
Main Menu - Adjustable Frequency Drive Information - Group 15

15-** Drive Information
Parameter group containing adjustable frequency drive information such as operating data, hardware config-
uration and software versions.
15-0* Operating Data

Parameter group containing operating data, such as operating hours, kWh counters, power-ups, etc.
15-00 Operating Hours

Range: Function:
0 h* [0 - 2147483647 h] View how many hours the adjustable frequency drive has run. The value
is saved when the adjustable frequency drive is turned off.

15-01 Running Hours

Range: Function:
0 h* [0 - 2147483647 h] View how many hours the motor has run. Reset the counter in par.
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter. The value is saved when the ad-
justable frequency drive is turned off.
15-02 kWh Counter

Range: Function:
0 kWh* [0 - 2147483647 kWh] Registering the power consumption of the motor as a mean value over
one hour. Reset the counter in par.15-06 Reset kWh Counter.
15-03 Power-ups
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 2147483647 N/A] View the number of times the adjustable frequency drive has been pow-
ered up.
15-04 Over Temps

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 65535 N/A] View the number of adjustable frequency drive temperature faults which
have occurred.
15-05 Over Volts

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 65535 N/A] View the number of adjustable frequency drive overvoltages which have
occurred.
15-06 Reset kWh Counter

Option: Function:
[0] * Do not reset Select Do not reset [0] if no reset of the kWh counter is desired.
[1] Reset counter Select Reset [1] and press [OK] to reset the kWh counter to zero (see par.
15-02 kWh Counter).
NOTE
The reset is carried out by pressing [OK].
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter

Option: Function:
[0] * Do not reset Select Do not reset [0] if no reset of the Running Hours counter is desired.
[1] Reset counter Select Reset counter [1] and press [OK] to reset the Running Hours coun-
ter (par.15-01 Running Hours) and par.15-08 Number of Starts to zero
(see also par.15-01 Running Hours).

15-08 Number of Starts

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 2147483647 N/A] This is a readout parameter only. The counter shows the numbers of
starts and stops caused by a normal Start/Stop command and/or when
entering/leaving sleep mode.
NOTE
This parameter will be reset when resetting par.15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter.
15-1* Data Log Settings

The Data Log enables continuous logging of up to 4 data sources (par.15-10 Logging Source) at individual rates
(par.15-11 Logging Interval). A trigger event (par.15-12 Trigger Event) and window (par.15-14 Samples Before
Trigger) are used to start and stop the logging conditionally.
15-10 Logging Source

Array [4]
Option: Function:
Select which variables are to be logged.
[0] * None
[1600] Control Word
[1601] Reference [Unit]
[1602] Reference %
[1603] Status Word
[1610] Power [kW]
[1611] Power [hp]
[1612] Motor voltage
[1613] Frequency
[1614] Motor Current
[1616] Torque [Nm]
[1617] Speed [RPM]
[1618] Motor Thermal
[1622] Torque [%]
[1626] Power Filtered [kW]
[1627] Power Filtered [hp]
[1630] DC Link Voltage
[1632] Brake Energy /s
[1633] Brake Energy /2 min
[1634] Heatsink Temp.
[1635] Inverter Thermal
[1650] External Reference
[1652] Feedback [Unit]
[1654] Feedback 1 [Unit]

[1660] Digital Input

[1662] Analog Input 53
[1664] Analog Input 54
[1665] Analog Output 42 [mA]
[1666] Digital Output [bin]
[1675] Analog In X30/11
[1676] Analog In X30/12
[1677] Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
[1690] Alarm Word
[1691] Alarm word 2
[1692] Warning Word
[1693] Warning word 2
[1694] Ext. Status Word
[1695] Ext. Status Word 2
[1833] Analog Out X42/7 [V]
[1834] Analog Out X42/9 [V]
[1835] Analog Out X42/11 [V]
[1850] Sensorless Readout [unit]
[3110] Bypass Status Word
15-11 Logging Interval

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
15-12 Trigger Event

Option: Function:
Selects the trigger event. When the trigger event occurs, a window is
applied to freeze the log. The log will then retain a specified percentage
of samples before the occurrence of the trigger event (par.15-14 Samples
Before Trigger).
[0] * FALSE
[1] TRUE
[2] Running
[3] In range
[4] On reference
[5] Torque limit
[6] Current limit
[8] Below I low
[9] Above I high


[18] Reverse
[19] Warning
[20] Alarm (trip)
[22] Comparator 0
[23] Comparator 1
[24] Comparator 2
[25] Comparator 3
[26] Logic rule 0
[27] Logic rule 1
[28] Logic rule 2
[29] Logic rule 3
[50] Comparator 4
[51] Comparator 5
[60] Logic rule 4
[61] Logic rule 5
15-13 Logging Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * Log always Select Log always [0] for continuous logging.
[1] Log once on trigger Select Log once on trigger [1] to conditionally start and stop logging using
par.15-12 Trigger Event and par.15-14 Samples Before Trigger.
15-14 Samples Before Trigger

Range: Function:
50 N/A* [0 - 100 N/A] Enter the percentage of all samples prior to a trigger event which are to
be retained in the log. See also par.15-12 Trigger Event and par.
15-13 Logging Mode.

15-2* Historic Log

View up to 50 logged data items via the array parameters in this parameter group. For all parameters in the
group, [0] is the most recent data and [49] the oldest data. Data is logged every time an event occurs (not to be
confused with SLC events). Events in this context are defined as a change in one of the following areas:
1. Digital input
2. Digital outputs (not monitored in this SW release)
3. Warning word
4. Alarm word
5. Status word
6. Control word
7. Extended status word
Events are logged with value, and time stamp in msec. The time interval between two events depends on how
often events occur (maximum once every scan time). Data logging is continuous but if an alarm occurs, the log
is saved and the values can be viewed on the display. This feature is useful, for example when carrying out
service following a trip. View the historic log contained in this parameter via the serial communication port or
via the display.
15-20 Historic Log: Event

Array [50]
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 255 N/A] View the event type of the logged events.
15-21 Historic Log: Value

Array [50]
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 2147483647 N/A] View the value of the logged event. Interpret the event values according
to this table:
Digital input Decimal value. See par.16-60 Digital Input for descrip-
tion after converting to binary value.
Digital output (not monitored in Decimal value. See par.16-66 Digital Output [bin] for
this SW release) description after converting to binary value.
Warning word Decimal value. See par.16-92 Warning Word for de-
scription.
Alarm word Decimal value. See par.16-90 Alarm Word for descrip-
tion.
Status word Decimal value. See par.16-03 Status Word for descrip-
tion after converting to binary value.
Control word Decimal value. See par.16-00 Control Word for descrip-
tion.
Extended status word Decimal value. See par.16-94 Ext. Status Word for de-
scription.
15-22 Historic Log: Time

Array [50]
Range: Function:
0 ms* [0 - 2147483647 ms] View the time at which the logged event occurred. Time is measured in
ms since adjustable frequency drive start. The max. value corresponds
to approx. 24 days which means that the count will restart at zero after
this time period.

15-23 Historic Log: Date and Time

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
15-3* Alarm Log

Parameters in this group are array parameters, where up to 10 fault logs can be viewed. [0] is the most recent
logged data, and [9] the oldest. Error codes, values and time stamp can be viewed for all logged data.
15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code

Array [10]
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 255 N/A] View the error code and look up its meaning in the Troubleshooting chap-
ter.
15-31 Alarm Log: Value

Array [10]
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [-32767 - 32767 N/A] View an extra description of the error. This parameter is mostly used in
combination with alarm 38 internal fault.
15-32 Alarm Log: Time

Array [10]
Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - 2147483647 s] View the time when the logged event occurred. Time is measured in
seconds from adjustable frequency drive start-up.
15-33 Alarm Log: Date and Time

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
15-4* Drive Identification

Parameters containing read only information about the hardware and software configuration of the adjustable
frequency drive.
15-40 FC Type
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the FC type. The readout is identical to the adjustable frequency
drive series power field of the type code definition, characters 1-6.

15-41 Power Section

Range: Function:
15-42 Voltage
Range: Function:
15-43 Software Version

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the combined SW version (or package version) consisting of pow-
er SW and control SW.
15-44 Ordered Typecode String

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the type code string used for re-ordering the adjustable frequency
drive in its original configuration.
15-45 Actual Typecode String

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the actual type code string.
15-46 Adj Freq Dr Ordering No.

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the 8-digit ordering number used for re-ordering the adjustable
frequency drive in its original configuration.
15-47 Power Card Ordering No.

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the power card ordering number.
15-48 LCP ID Num.

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the keypad ID number.
15-49 SW ID Control Card

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the control card software version number.
15-50 SW ID Power Card

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the power card software version number.

15-51 Adj Freq Dr Serial No.

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the adjustable frequency drive serial number.
15-53 Power Card Serial Number

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the power card serial number.
15-6* Option Ident.

This read-only parameter group contains information about the hardware and software configuration of the
options installed in slots A, B C0 and C1.
15-60 Option Mounted

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the installed option type.
15-61 Option SW Version

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the installed option software version.
15-62 Option Ordering No

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] Shows the ordering number for the installed options.
15-63 Option Serial No

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the installed option serial number.
15-70 Option in Slot A

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the type code string for the option installed in slot A, and a trans-
lation of the type code string. For example, for type code string 'AX', the
translation is 'No option'.
15-71 Slot A Option SW Version

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the software version for the option installed in slot A.
15-72 Option in Slot B

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the type code string for the option installed in slot B, and a trans-
lation of the type code string. For example, for type code string 'BX', the
translation is 'No option'.
15-73 Slot B Option SW Version

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the software version for the option installed in slot B.

15-74 Option in Slot C0

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the type code string for the option installed in slot C, and a trans-
lation of the type code string. For example, for type code string 'CXXXX',
the translation is 'No option'.
15-75 Slot C0 Option SW Version

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the software version for the option installed in slot C.
15-76 Option in Slot C1

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] Shows the typecode string for the options (CXXXX if no option) and the
translation, e.g., >No option<.
15-77 Slot C1 Option SW Version

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] Software version for the installed option in option slot C.
15-9* Parameter Info

Parameter lists
15-92 Defined Parameters

Array [1000]
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 9999 N/A] View a list of all defined parameters in the adjustable frequency drive.
The list ends with 0.
15-93 Modified Parameters

Array [1000]
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 9999 N/A] View a list of the parameters that have been changed from their default
setting. The list ends with 0. Changes may not be visible until up to 30
seconds after implementation.
15-98 Drive Identification

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A]
15-99 Parameter Metadata

Array [23]
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 9999 N/A] This parameter contains data used by the MCT10 software tool.

Main Menu - Data Readouts - Group 16

16-** Data Readouts
Parameter group for data readouts, such as current references, voltages, control, alarm, warning and status
words.
16-0* General Status

Parameters for reading the general status, such as the calculated reference, the active control word and status.
16-00 Control Word

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 65535 N/A] View the control word sent from the adjustable frequency drive via the
16-01 Reference [Unit]

Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.000 - 999999.000 View the present reference value applied on impulse or analog basis in
Referen- ReferenceFeedbackUnit] the unit resulting from the configuration selected in par.1-00 Configura-
ceFeed- tion Mode (Hz, Nm or RPM).
backU-
nit*
16-02 Reference %
Range: Function:
0.0 %* [-200.0 - 200.0 %]
16-03 Status Word

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 65535 N/A] View the status word sent from the adjustable frequency drive via the
16-05 Main Actual Value [%]

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [-100.00 - 100.00 %] View the two-byte word sent with the status word to the bus master re-
porting the main actual value.
16-09 Custom Readout

Range: Function:
0.00 [-999999.99 - 999999.99 View the user-defined readouts as defined in par.0-30 Custom Readout
Custom- CustomReadoutUnit] Unit, par.0-31 Custom Readout Min Value and par.0-32 Custom Readout
Readou- Max Value.
tUnit*

16-1* Motor Status

Parameters for reading the motor status values.
16-10 Power [kW]

Range: Function:
0.00 [0.00 - 10000.00 kW] View the motor power in kW. The value shown is calculated on the basis
kW* of the actual motor voltage and motor current. The value is filtered, and
therefore approx. 30 ms may pass from when an input value changes to
when the data readout values change.
16-11 Power [hp]

Range: Function:
0.00 hp* [0.00 - 10000.00 hp] View the motor power in HP. The value shown is calculated on the basis
of the actual motor voltage and motor current. The value is filtered, and
therefore approximately 30 ms may pass from when an input value
changes to when the data readout values change.
16-12 Motor voltage

Range: Function:
0.0 V* [0.0 - 6000.0 V] View the motor voltage, a calculated value used for controlling the mo-
tor.
16-13 Frequency
Range: Function:
0.0 Hz* [0.0 - 6500.0 Hz] View the motor frequency, without resonance dampening.
16-14 Motor Current

Range: Function:
0.00 A* [0.00 - 10000.00 A] View the motor current measured as a mean value, IRMS. The value is
filtered, and thus approximately 30 ms may pass from when an input
value changes to when the data readout values change.
16-15 Frequency [%]

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [-100.00 - 100.00 %]
16-16 Torque [Nm]

Range: Function:
0.0 Nm* [-30000.0 - 30000.0 Nm] View the torque value with sign, applied to the motor shaft. Linearity is
not exact between 110% motor current and torque in relation to the rated
torque. Some motors supply more than 160% torque. Consequently, the
minimum and maximum values will depend on the maximum motor
current, as well as the motor type being used. The value is filtered, and
thus approx. 1.3 seconds may pass from when an input changes value
to when the data readout values change.
16-17 Speed [RPM]

Range: Function:
0 RPM* [-30000 - 30000 RPM] View the current motor RPM.

16-18 Motor Thermal

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] View the calculated thermal load on the motor. The cut-out limit is 100%.
The basis for calculation is the ETR function selected in par.1-90 Motor
Thermal Protection.
16-22 Torque [%]

Range: Function:
0 %* [-200 - 200 %] This is a readout parameter only.
Shows the actual torque yielded in percentage of the rated torque, based
on the setting of the motor size and rated speed in par.1-20 Motor Power
[kW] or par.1-21 Motor Power [HP] and par.1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.
This is the value monitored by the Broken Belt Function set in par. 22-6*.
16-3* Drive Status

Parameters for reporting the status of the adjustable frequency drive.
16-30 DC Link Voltage

Range: Function:
0 V* [0 - 10000 V] View a measured value. The value is filtered with an 30 ms time constant.
16-32 Brake Energy /s

Range: Function:
0.000 [0.000 - 10000.000 kW] View the braking energy transmitted to an external brake resistor, stated
kW* as an instantaneous value.
16-33 Brake Energy /2 min

Range: Function:
0.000 [0.000 - 10000.000 kW] View the braking energy transmitted to an external brake resistor. The
kW* mean power is calculated on an average basis for the most recent 120
seconds.
16-34 Heatsink Temp.

Range: Function:
0 C* [0 - 255 C]
16-35 Inverter Thermal

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] View the percentage load on the inverter.
16-36 Inv. Nom. Current

Range: Function:
Applica- [0.01 - 10000.00 A] View the inverter nominal current, which should match the nameplate
tion de- data on the connected motor. The data are used for calculation of torque,
pend- motor protection, etc.
ent*

16-37 Inv. Max. Current

Range: Function:
Applica- [0.01 - 10000.00 A] View the inverter maximum current, which should match the nameplate
tion de- data on the connected motor. The data are used for calculation of torque,
pend- motor protection, etc.
ent*
16-38 SL Controller State

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 100 N/A] View the state of the event under execution by the SL controller.
16-39 Control Card Temp.

Range: Function:
0 C* [0 - 100 C]
16-40 Logging Buffer Full

Option: Function:
View whether the logging buffer is full (see parameter group 15-1*). The
logging buffer will never be full when par.15-13 Logging Mode is set to
Log always [0].
[0] * No
[1] Yes
16-49 Current Fault Source

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 8 N/A] Value indicates source of current fault, including: short circuit, overcur-
rent and phase imbalance (from left): [1-4] Inverter, [5-8] Rectifier, [0] No
fault recorded
After a short circuit alarm (imax2) or over current alarm (imax1 or phase imbalance), this will contain the power
card number associated with the alarm. It only holds one number so it will indicate the highest priority power
card number (master first). The value will persist on power cycle but if a new alarm occurs it will be overwritten
with the new power card number (even if it a lower priority number). The value will only be cleared when the
alarm log is cleared (e.g., a 3-finger reset would reset the readout to 0).
16-5* Ref. & Feedb.

Parameters for reporting the reference and feedback input.
16-50 External Reference

Range: Function:
0.0 N/A* [-200.0 - 200.0 N/A] View the total reference, the sum of digital, analog, preset, bus and freeze
references, plus catch-up and slow-down.

16-52 Feedback [Unit]

Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 View value of resulting feedback value after processing of Feedback 1-3
Proc- ProcessCtrlUnit] (see par.16-54 Feedback 1 [Unit], par.16-55 Feedback 2 [Unit] and par.
essCtrlU- 16-56) in the feedback manager.
nit*
See par. 20-0* Feedback.
The value is limited by settings in par. 20-13 and par. 20-14. Units as set
in par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit.
16-53 Digi Pot Reference

Range: Function:
0.00 N/ [-200.00 - 200.00 N/A] View the contribution of the digital potentiometer to the actual reference.
A*
16-54 Feedback 1 [Unit]

Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 View value of Feedback 1, see par. 20-0* Feedback.
Proc- ProcessCtrlUnit]
The value is limited by settings in par.20-13 Minimum Reference/
essCtrlU-
Feedb. and par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.. Units as set in par.
nit*
20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit.

Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 View value of Feedback 2, see par. 20-0* Feedback.
The value is limited by settings in par. 20-13 and par. 20-14. Units as set
essCtrlU-
in par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit.
nit*

Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 View value of Feedback 3, see parameter group 20-0* Feedback.
The value is limited by settings in par.20-13 Minimum Reference/
essCtrlU-
Feedb. and par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.. Units as set in par.
nit*
20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit.
16-58 PID Output [%]

Range: Function:
0.0 %* [0.0 - 100.0 %]
16-6* Inputs and Outputs

Parameters for reporting the digital and analog IO ports.
16-60 Digital Input

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 1023 N/A] View the signal states from the active digital inputs. Example: Input 18
corresponds to bit no. 5, 0 = no signal, 1 = connected signal. Bit 6 works
in the opposite way, on = '0', off = '1' (safe stop input).

Bit 0 Digital input term. 33

Bit 7 Digital input GP I/O term. X30/4
00000000000000000
DI T-33
DI T-32
DI T-29
DI T-27
DI T-19
DI T-18
DI T-37
DI X30/4
DI X30/3
DI X30/2
DI X46/13
DI X46/11
DI X46/9
DI X46/7
DI X46/5
DI X46/3
DI X46/1
130BA894.10
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting

Option: Function:
View the setting of input terminal 53. Current = 0; Voltage = 1.
[0] * Current
[1] Voltage
[2] Pt 1000 [C]
[3] Pt 1000 [F]
[4] Ni 1000 [C]
[5] Ni 1000 [F]
16-62 Analog Input 53

Range: Function:
0.000 N/ [-20.000 - 20.000 N/A] View the actual value at input 53.
A*

16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting

Option: Function:
View the setting of input terminal 54. Current = 0; Voltage = 1.
[0] * Current
[1] Voltage
[2] Pt 1000 [C]
[3] Pt 1000 [F]
[4] Ni 1000 [C]
[5] Ni 1000 [F]
16-64 Analog Input 54

Range: Function:
0.000 N/ [-20.000 - 20.000 N/A] View the actual value at input 54.
A*
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]

Range: Function:
0.000 N/ [0.000 - 30.000 N/A] View the actual value at output 42 in mA. The value shown reflects the
A* selection in par.6-50 Terminal 42 Output.
16-66 Digital Output [bin]

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 15 N/A] View the binary value of all digital outputs.
16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz]

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 130000 N/A] View the actual frequency rate on terminal 29.
16-68 Pulse Input #33 [Hz]

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 130000 N/A] View the actual value of the frequency applied at terminal 33 as an im-
pulse input.
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 40000 N/A] View the actual value of impulses applied to terminal 27 in digital output
mode.
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 40000 N/A] View the actual value of pulses to terminal 29 in digital output mode.

16-71 Relay Output [bin]

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 511 N/A] View the settings of all relays.
16-72 Counter A
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [-2147483648 - View the present value of Counter A. Counters are useful as comparator
2147483647 N/A] operands, see par.13-10 Comparator Operand.
The value can be reset or changed either via digital inputs (parameter
group 5-1*) or by using an SLC action (par.13-52 SL Controller Action).
16-73 Counter B
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [-2147483648 - View the present value of Counter B. Counters are useful as comparator
2147483647 N/A] operands (par.13-10 Comparator Operand).
The value can be reset or changed either via digital inputs (parameter
group 5-1*) or by using an SLC action (par.13-52 SL Controller Action).
16-75 Analog In X30/11

Range: Function:
0.000 N/ [-20.000 - 20.000 N/A] View the actual value at input X30/11 of MCB 101.
A*
16-76 Analog In X30/12

Range: Function:
0.000 N/ [-20.000 - 20.000 N/A] View the actual value at input X30/12 of MCB 101.
A*
16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA]

Range: Function:
0.000 N/ [0.000 - 30.000 N/A] View the actual value at input X30/8 in mA.
A*

16-8* Ser. Com. Bus & Adjustable Frequency Drive Port

Parameters for reporting the BUS references and control words.
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 65535 N/A] View the two-byte control word (CTW) received from the bus master.
Interpretation of the control word depends on the serial communication
bus option installed and the control word profile selected in par.
8-10 Control Profile.
For more information, refer to the relevant serial communication bus
manual.
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [-200 - 200 N/A] View the two-byte word sent with the control word form the bus master
to set the reference value.
manual.
16-84 Comm. Option Status

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 65535 N/A] View the extended serial communication bus comm. option status word.
manual.
16-85 FC Port CTW 1

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 65535 N/A] View the two-byte control word (CTW) received from the bus master.
Interpretation of the control word depends on the serial communication
bus option installed and the control word profile selected in par.
8-10 Control Profile.
16-86 FC Port REF 1

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [-200 - 200 N/A] View the two-byte status word (STW) sent to the bus master. Interpreta-
tion of the status word depends on the serial communication bus option
installed and the control word profile selected in par.8-10 Control Pro-
file.
16-9* Diagnosis Readouts

Parameters displaying alarm, warning and extended status words.
16-90 Alarm Word

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 4294967295 N/A] View the alarm word sent via the serial communication port in hex code.

16-91 Alarm word 2

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 4294967295 N/A] View the alarm word 2 sent via the serial communication port in hex
code.
16-92 Warning Word

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 4294967295 N/A] View the warning word sent via the serial communication port in hex
code.
16-93 Warning word 2

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 4294967295 N/A] View the warning word 2 sent via the serial communication port in hex
code.
16-94 Ext. Status Word

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 4294967295 N/A] Returns the extended status word sent via the serial communication port
in hex code.
16-95 Ext. Status Word 2

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 4294967295 N/A] Returns the extended warning word 2 sent via the serial communication
port in hex code.
16-96 Maintenance Word

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 4294967295 N/A] Readout of the Preventive Maintenance Word. The bits reflect the status
for the programmed preventive maintenance events in parameter group
23-1*. 13 bits represent combinations of all the possible items:
Bit 0: Motor bearings
Bit 1: Pump bearings
Bit 2: Fan bearings
Bit 3: Valve
Bit 4: Pressure transmitter
Bit 5: Flow transmitter
Bit 6: Temperature transmitter
Bit 7: Pump seals
Bit 8: Fan belt
Bit 9: Filter
Bit 10: Drive cooling fan
Bit 11: Drive system health check
Bit 12: Warranty
Bit 13: Maintenance Text 0


Position 4 Valve Fan bear- Pump bear- Motor bear-

ings ings ings
Position 3 Pump seals Tempera- Flow trans- Pressure
ture transmitter transmitter
mitter
Position 2 Drive sys- Drive cool- Filter Fan belt
tem health ing fan
check
Position 1 Warranty
0hex - - - -
1hex - - - +
2hex - - + -
3hex - - + +
4hex - + - -
5hex - + - +
6hex - + + -
7hex - + + +
8hex + - - -
9hex + - - +
Ahex + - + -
Bhex + - + +
Chex + + - -
Dhex + + - +
Ehex + + + -
Fhex + + + +
Example:
The Preventive Maintenance Word shows 040Ahex.
Position 1 2 3 4
hex value 0 4 0 A
The first digit 0 indicates that no items from the fourth row requires
maintenance
The second digit 4 refers to the third row indicating that the drive cooling
fan requires maintenance
The third digit 0 indicates that no items from the second row requires
maintenance
The fourth digit A refers to the top row indicating that the valve and the
pump bearings require maintenance

Main Menu - Data Readouts 2 - Group 18

18-0* Maintenance LogLG-0# Maintenance Log
This group contains the last ten preventive maintenance events. Maintenance Log 0 is the latest and Mainte-
nance Log 9 the oldest.
By selecting one of the logs and pressing [OK], the Maintenance Item, Action and time of the occurrence can be
found in par.18-00 Maintenance Log: Item par.18-03 Maintenance Log: Date and Time.
The alarm log button on the keypad allows access to both alarm log and maintenance log.
18-00 Maintenance Log: Item

Array [10]. Array parameter; Error code 09: The meaning of the error code can be found in the Troubleshooting section of the FC
Design Guide.
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 255 N/A] Locate the meaning of the maintenance item in the description of par.
23-10 Maintenance Item.
18-01 Maintenance Log: Action

Array [10]. Array parameter; Error code 09: The meaning of the error code can be found in the Troubleshooting section of the
Design Guide.
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 255 N/A] Locate the meaning of the maintenance item in the description of par.
23-11 Maintenance Action
18-02 Maintenance Log: Time

Array [10]. Array parameter; Time 09: This parameter shows at which time the logged event occurred. Time is measured in
seconds since start of the adjustable frequency drive.
Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - 2147483647 s] Shows when the logged event occurred. Time is measured in seconds
since last power-up.
18-03 Maintenance Log: Date and Time

Array [10]
Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
NOTE
When mounting an Analog I/O MCB 109 option card, a battery back-up of date and time is included.
18-1* Fire Mode Log

The log covers the latest 10 faults which have been suppressed by the fire mode function. See par. 24-0*, Fire
Mode. The log can be viewed either via the below parameters or by pressing the Alarm Log button on the
keypad and select Fire Mode Log. It is not possible to reset the fire mode log.

18-10 Fire Mode Log: Event

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 255 N/A] This parameter contains an array with 10 elements. The number read
represents an error code, which corresponds to a specific alarm. This can
be found in the Troubleshooting section in the Design Guide.
18-11 Fire Mode Log: Time

Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - 2147483647 s] This parameter contains an array with 10 elements. The parameter
shows at which time the logged event occurred. Time is measured in
seconds since the first start of the motor.
18-12 Fire Mode Log: Date and Time

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
18-5* Ref. & Feedb.

Parameters for reporting the reference and feedback input.
NOTE
Sensorless Readout requires set-up by MCT10 with sensorless specific plug-in.

Main Menu - Adjustable Frequency Drive Closed-loop - Group 20

20-** Adjustable Frequency Drive Closed-loop
This parameter group is used for configuring the closed-loop PID controller, that controls the output frequency
of the adjustable frequency drive.
20-0* Feedback
This parameter group is used to configure the feedback signal for the adjustable frequency drives closed-loop
PID controller. Whether the adjustable frequency drive is in closed-loop mode or open-loop mode, the feedback
signals can also be shown on the adjustable frequency drives display, be used to control an adjustable fre-
quency drive analog output, and be transmitted over various serial communication protocols.
20-00 Feedback 1 Source

Option: Function:
Up to three different feedback signals can be used to provide the feed-
back signal for the adjustable frequency drives PID controller.
This parameter defines which input will be used as the source of the first
feedback signal.
Analog input X30/11 and Analog input X30/12 refer to inputs on the op-
tional general purpose I/O board.
[0] No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] * Analog input 54
[3] Pulse input 29
[4] Pulse input 33


[100] Bus feedback 1
[104] Sensorless Flow Requires set up by MCT10 with sensorless specific plug in.
[105] Sensorless Pressure Requires set up by MCT10 with sensorless specific plug in.
NOTE: If a feedback is not used, its source must be set to No Function [0]. par.20-20 Feedback Function determines
how the three possible feedbacks will be used by the PID controller.
20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion

Option: Function:
This parameter allows a conversion function to be applied to Feedback
1.
[0] * Linear Linear [0] has no effect on the feedback.
[1] Square root Square root [1] is commonly used when a pressure sensor is used to pro-
vide flow feedback (( flow pressure )).
[2] Pressure to temperature Pressure to temperature [2] is used in compressor applications to provide
temperature feedback using a pressure sensor. The temperature of the
refrigerant is calculated using the following formula:
A2
Temperature = ( ( A3 , where A1, A2 and A3 are re-
ln Pe + 1) A1)
frigerant-specific constants. The refrigerant must be selected in par.
20-30 Refrigerant. par.20-21 Setpoint 1 through par.20-23 Setpoint 3 al-
low the values of A1, A2 and A3 to be entered for a refrigerant that is not
listed in par.20-30 Refrigerant.
[3]
[4]
20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit

Option: Function:
This parameter determines the unit that is used for this feedback source,
prior to applying the feedback conversion of par.20-01 Feedback 1 Con-
version. This unit is not used by the PID controller.
[0] *
[1] %
[5] PPM
[10] min
[11] RPM
[12] PULSE/s
[20] liter / sec.
[21] liter / min
[22] liter / hr.
[23] m / sec.
[24] m/min
[25] m / hr.

[30] kg / sec.
[31] kg/min
[32] kg / hr.
[33] ton / min
[34] ton / hr.
[40] m / sec.
[41] m/min
[45] m
[60] C
[70] mbar
[71] bar
[72] Pa
[73] kPa
[74] m WG
[75] mm Hg
[80] kW
[120] GPM
[121] gal / sec.
[122] gal/min
[123] gal / hr.
[124] CFM
[125] ft/s
[126] ft/min
[127] ft/h
[130] lbs / sec.
[131] lbs / min.
[132] lbs / hr.
[140] ft/s
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
[160] F
[170] psi
[171] lb/in
[172] in. wtr. gage
[173] ft WG
[174] in Hg
[180] HP
NOTE: This parameter is only available when using pressure to temperature feedback conversion.
If the choice Linear [0] is selected in par.20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion, then the setting of any choice in par.
20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit does not matter as conversion will be one-to-one.


Option: Function:
See par.20-00 Feedback 1 Source for details.
[0] * No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[3] Pulse input 29
[4] Pulse input 33

Option: Function:
See par.20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion for details.
[0] * Linear
[1] Square root
[2] Pressure to temperature
[3]
[4]

Option: Function:
[0] *
[1] %
[5] PPM
[10] min
[11] RPM
[12] PULSE/s
[20] liter / sec.
[21] liter / min
[22] liter / hr.
[23] m / sec.
[24] m/min
[25] m / hr.
[30] kg / sec.
[31] kg/min
[32] kg / hr.
[33] ton / min

[34] ton / hr.

[40] m / sec.
[41] m/min
[45] m
[60] C
[70] mbar
[71] bar
[72] Pa
[73] kPa
[74] m WG
[75] mm Hg
[80] kW
[120] GPM
[121] gal / sec.
[122] gal/min
[123] gal / hr.
[124] CFM
[125] ft/s
[126] ft/min
[127] ft/h
[130] lbs / sec.
[131] lbs / min.
[132] lbs / hr.
[140] ft/s
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
[160] F
[170] psi
[171] lb/in
[172] in. wtr. gage
[173] ft WG
[174] in Hg
[180] HP

Option: Function:
[0] * No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[3] Pulse input 29
[4] Pulse input 33



Option: Function:
See par.20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion for details.
[0] * Linear
[1] Square root
[2] Pressure to temperature
[3]
[4]

Option: Function:
[0] *
[1] %
[5] PPM
[10] min
[11] RPM
[12] PULSE/s
[20] liter / sec.
[21] liter / min
[22] liter / hr.
[23] m / sec.
[24] m/min
[25] m / hr.
[30] kg / sec.
[31] kg/min
[32] kg / hr.
[33] ton / min
[34] ton / hr.
[40] m / sec.
[41] m/min
[45] m
[60] C
[70] mbar
[71] bar
[72] Pa
[73] kPa
[74] m WG
[75] mm Hg

[80] kW
[120] GPM
[121] gal / sec.
[122] gal/min
[123] gal / hr.
[124] CFM
[125] ft/s
[126] ft/min
[127] ft/h
[130] lbs / sec.
[131] lbs / min.
[132] lbs / hr.
[140] ft/s
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
[160] F
[170] psi
[171] lb/in
[172] in. wtr. gage
[173] ft WG
[174] in Hg
[180] HP
20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit

Option: Function:
See par.20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit for details.
20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb.

Range: Function:
0.000 [Application dependant] Enter the desired minimum value for the remote reference when oper-
Proc- ating with par.1-00 Configuration Mode set for Closed-loop [3] operation.
essCtrlU- Units are set in par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit.
nit*
Minimum feedback will be -200% of either the value set in par.
20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb. or in par.20-14 Maximum Reference/
Feedb., which ever numeric value is the highest.
NOTE: If operating with par.1-00 Configuration Mode set for Open-loop [0], par.3-02 Minimum Reference must
be used.
20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.

Range: Function:
100.000 [Application dependant] Enter the maximum reference/feedback for closed-loop operation. The
Proc- setting determines the highest value obtainable by summing all refer-
essCtrlU- ence sources for closed-loop operation. The setting determines 100%
nit* feedback in open-loop and closed-loop (total feedback range: -200% to
+200%).

NOTE: If operating with par.1-00 Configuration Mode set for Open-loop [0], par.3-03 Maximum Reference must
be used.
20-2* Feedback & Setpoint

This parameter group is used to determine how the adjustable frequency drives PID controller will use the three
possible feedback signals to control the output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive. This group is also
used to store the three internal setpoint references.
20-20 Feedback Function

Option: Function:
This parameter determines how the three possible feedbacks will be
used to control the output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive.
[0] Sum Sum [0] sets up the PID Controller to use the sum of Feedback 1, Feedback
2 and Feedback 3 as the feedback.
NOTE: Any unused feedbacks must be set to No Function in par.
20-00 Feedback 1 Source, par.20-03 Feedback 2 Source, or par.
20-06 Feedback 3 Source.
The sum of Setpoint 1 and any other references that are enabled (see
par. group 3-1*) will be used as the PID Controllers setpoint reference.
[1] Difference Difference [1] sets up the PID controller to use the difference between
Feedback 1 and Feedback 2 as the feedback. Feedback 3 will not be used
with this selection. Only Setpoint 1 will be used. The sum of Setpoint 1
and any other references that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*) will be
used as the PID controllers setpoint reference.
[2] Average Average [2] sets up the PID Controller to use the average of Feedback 1,
Feedback 2 and Feedback 3 as the feedback.
20-06 Feedback 3 Source. The sum of Setpoint 1 and any other references
that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*) will be used as the PID Controllers
setpoint reference.
[3] * Minimum Minimum [3] sets up the PID controller to compare Feedback 1, Feedback
2 and Feedback 3 and use the lowest value as the feedback.
20-06 Feedback 3 Source. Only setpoint 1 will be used. The sum of Set-
point 1 and any other references that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*)
will be used as the PID controllers setpoint reference.
[4] Maximum Maximum [4] sets up the PID controller to compare Feedback 1, Feedback
2 and Feedback 3 and use the highest value as the feedback.
20-06 Feedback 3 Source.
Only Setpoint 1 will be used. The sum of Setpoint 1 and any other refer-
ences that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*) will be used as the PID
controllers setpoint reference.

[5] Multi Setpoint Min Multi-setpoint minimum [5] sets up the PID Controller to calculate the dif-
ference between Feedback 1 and Setpoint 1, Feedback 2 and Setpoint 2,
and Feedback 3 and Setpoint 3. It will use the feedback/setpoint pair in
which the feedback is the farthest below its corresponding setpoint ref-
erence. If all feedback signals are above their corresponding setpoints,
the PID Controller will use the feedback/setpoint pair in which the differ-
ence between the feedback and setpoint is the least.
NOTE: If only two feedback signals are used, the feedback that is not to
be used must be set to No Function in par.20-00 Feedback 1 Source, par.
20-03 Feedback 2 Source or par.20-06 Feedback 3 Source. Note that each
setpoint reference will be the sum of its respective parameter value (par.
20-21 Setpoint 1, par.20-22 Setpoint 2 and par.20-23 Setpoint 3) and any
other references that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*).
[6] Multi Setpoint Max Multi-setpoint maximum [6] sets up the PID Controller to calculate the dif-
ference between Feedback 1 and Setpoint 1, Feedback 2 and Setpoint 2,
and Feedback 3 and Setpoint 3. It will use the feedback/setpoint pair in
which the feedback is farthest above its corresponding setpoint refer-
ence. If all feedback signals are below their corresponding setpoints, the
PID Controller will use the feedback/setpoint pair in which the difference
between the feedback and the setpoint reference is the least.
NOTE: If only two feedback signals are used, the feedback that is not to
be used must be set to No Function in par.20-00 Feedback 1 Source, par.
20-03 Feedback 2 Source or par.20-06 Feedback 3 Source. Note that each
setpoint reference will be the sum of its respective parameter value (par.
20-21 Setpoint 1, par.20-22 Setpoint 2 and par.20-23 Setpoint 3) and any
other references that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*).
NOTE: Any unused feedback must be set to No function in its Feedback Source parameter: par.20-00 Feedback
1 Source, par.20-03 Feedback 2 Source or par.20-06 Feedback 3 Source.
The feedback resulting from the function selected in par.20-20 Feedback Function will be used by the PID con-
troller to control the output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive. This feedback can also be shown on
the adjustable frequency drives display, be used to control an adjustable frequency drive's analog output, and
be transmitted over various serial communication protocols.
The adjustable frequency drive can be configured to handle multi-zone applications. Two different multi-zone
applications are supported:
Multi-zone, single setpoint
Multi-zone, multi setpoint
The difference between the two is illustrated by the following examples:
Example 1: Multi-zone, single setpoint

In an office building, a VAV (variable air volume) TR200 system must ensure a minimum pressure at selected
VAV boxes. Due to the varying pressure losses in each duct, the pressure at each VAV box cannot be assumed
to be the same. The minimum pressure required is the same for all VAV boxes. This control method can be set
up by setting par.20-20 Feedback Function to option [3], Minimum, and entering the desired pressure in par.
20-21 Setpoint 1. The PID controller will increase the speed of the fan if any one feedback is below the setpoint,
and decrease the speed of the fan if all feedbacks are above the setpoint.

Example 2: Multi-zone, multi setpoint

The previous example can be used to illustrate the use of multi-zone, multi-setpoint control. If the zones require
different pressures for each VAV box, each setpoint may be specified in par.20-21 Setpoint 1, par.20-22 Setpoint
2 and par.20-23 Setpoint 3. By selecting Multi-setpoint minimum, [5], in par.20-20 Feedback Function, the PID
controller will increase the speed of the fan if any one of the feedbacks is below its setpoint and decrease the
speed of the fan if all feedbacks are above their individual setpoints.
20-21 Setpoint 1
Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Setpoint 1 is used in closed-loop mode to enter a setpoint reference that
Proc- ProcessCtrlUnit] is used by the adjustable frequency drives PID controller. See the de-
essCtrlU- scription of par.20-20 Feedback Function.
nit*
NOTE: Setpoint reference entered here is added to any other references
that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*).
20-22 Setpoint 2
Range: Function:
Proc- ProcessCtrlUnit] may be used by the adjustable frequency drives PID controller. See the
essCtrlU- description of Feedback Function, par.20-20 Feedback Function.
nit*
NOTE: The setpoint reference entered here is added to any other references that are enabled (see par. group
3-1*).
20-23 Setpoint 3
Range: Function:
Proc- ProcessCtrlUnit] may be used by the adjustable frequency drives PID controller. See the
essCtrlU- description of par.20-20 Feedback Function.
nit*
NOTE
The setpoint reference entered here is added to any other references that are
enabled (see par. group 3-1*).

20-3* Feedback Adv. Conversion

In air conditioning compressor applications it is often useful to control the system based on the temperature of
the refrigerant. However, it is generally more convenient to directly measure its pressure. This parameter group
allows the adjustable frequency drives PID controller to convert refrigerant pressure measurements into tem-
perature values.
20-30 Refrigerant
Option: Function:
Select the refrigerant used in the compressor application. This parameter
must be specified correctly for the pressure to temperature conversion
to be accurate. If the refrigerant used is not listed in choices [0] through
[6], select User defined [7], use par.20-31 User-defined Refrigerant A1,
par.20-32 User-defined Refrigerant A2 and par.20-33 User-defined Re-
frigerant A3 to provide A1, A2 and A3 for the equation below:
A2
Temperature = ( ( A3
ln Pe + 1) A1)
[0] * R22
[1] R134a
[2] R404a
[3] R407c
[4] R410a
[5] R502
[6] R744
[7] User-defined
20-31 User-defined Refrigerant A1

Range: Function:
10.0000 [8.0000 - 12.0000 N/A] Use this parameter to enter the value of coefficient A1 when par.
N/A* 20-30 Refrigerant is set to User-defined [7].

Range: Function:
-2250.00 [-3000.00 - -1500.00 N/A] Use this parameter to enter the value of coefficient A2 when par.

Range: Function:
250.000 [200.000 - 300.000 N/A] Use this parameter to enter the value of coefficient A3 when par.

Sets the area of the air duct at measuring point.
20-34 Fan 1 Area [m2]

Range: Function:
0.500 [0.000 - 10.000 m2]
m2*
NOTE
Units of measurement depend on the setting of par. 0-03 Regional Settings.
20-35 Fan 1 Area [in2]

Range: Function:
750 in2* [0 - 15000 in2]
NOTE
20-36 Fan 2 Area [m2]

Range: Function:
0.500 [0.000 - 10.000 m2]
m2*
NOTE
20-37 Fan 2 Area [in2]

Range: Function:
750 in2* [0 - 15000 in2]
NOTE
Adjusts the density of the air in % of the normalized air density (1.2 kg/m3).
20-38 Air Density Factor [%]

Range: Function:
100 %* [50 - 150 %]

20-6* Sensorless
Parameters for Sensorless. See also par.20-00 Feedback 1 Source, par.18-50 Sensorless Readout [unit], par.
16-26 Power Filtered [kW] and par.16-27 Power Filtered [hp].
NOTE
Sensorless unit and Sensorless Information requires set-up by MCT10 with sensorless specific plug-in.
20-7* PID autotuning

The adjustable frequency drive PID closed-loop controller (parameters 20-**, Adjustable Frequency Drive
Closed-loop) can be autotuned, simplifying and saving time during commissioning, while ensuring accurate PID
control adjustment. To use autotuning, it is necessary for the adjustable frequency drive to be configured for
closed-loop in par.1-00 Configuration Mode.
A Graphical Local Control Panel (keypad) must be used in order to react on messages during the autotuning
sequence.
Enabling par.20-79 PID Autotuning, puts the adjustable frequency drive into autotuning mode. The keypad then
directs the user with on-screen instructions.
The fan/pump is started by pressing [Auto On] button on the keypad and applying a start signal. The speed is
adjusted manually by pressing the [] or [] navigation keys on the keypad to a level where the feedback is
around the system setpoint.
NOTE
It is not possible to run the motor at maximum or minimum speed, when manually adjusting the motor speed due to
the need of giving the motor a step in the speed during autotuning.
PID autotuning functions by introducing step changes while operating at a steady state and then monitoring the
feedback. From the feedback response, the required values for par.20-93 PID Proportional Gain and par.
20-94 PID Integral Time are calculated. par.20-95 PID Differentiation Time is set to value 0 (zero). par.20-81 PID
Normal/ Inverse Control is determined during the tuning process.
These calculated values are presented on the keypad and the user can decide whether to accept or reject them.
Once accepted, the values are written to the relevant parameters and autotuning mode is disabled in par.
20-79 PID Autotuning. Depending on the system being controlled, the time required to carry out autotuning
could be several minutes.
It is advised to set the ramp times in par.3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time, par.3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time or par.
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp-up Time and par.3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time according to the load inertia before carrying
out PID autotuning. If PID autotuning is carried out with slow ramp times, the autotuned parameters will typically
result in very slow control. Excessive feedback sensor noise should be removed using the input filter (parameter
groups 6-** and 5-5*, Terminal 53/54 Filter Time Constant/Pulse Filter Time Constant #29/33) before activating
PID autotuning. In order to obtain the most accurate controller parameters, it is advised to carry out PID auto-
tuning when the application is running in typical operation, i.e., with a typical load.

20-70 Closed-loop Type

Option: Function:
This parameter defines the application response. The default mode
should be sufficient for most applications. If the application response
speed is known, it can be selected here. This will decrease the time nee-
ded for carrying out PID autotuning. The setting has no impact on the
value of the tuned parameters and is used only for the autotuning se-
quence.
[0] * Auto
[1] Fast Pressure
[2] Slow Pressure
[3] Fast Temperature
[4] Slow Temperature
20-71 PID Performance

Option: Function:
[0] * Normal Normal setting of this parameter will be suitable for pressure control in
fan systems.
[1] Fast Fast setting would generally be used in pumping systems, where a faster
control response is desirable.
20-72 PID Output Change

Range: Function:
0.10 N/ [0.01 - 0.50 N/A] This parameter sets the magnitude of step change during autotuning.
A* The value is a percentage of full speed. This means that if the maximum
output frequency inpar.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]/par.4-14 Mo-
tor Speed High Limit [Hz] is set to 50 Hz, 0.10 is 10% of 50 Hz, which is 5
Hz. This parameter should be set to a value resulting in feedback changes
of between 10% and 20% for best tuning accuracy.
20-73 Minimum Feedback Level

Range: Function:
-999999. [Application dependant] The minimum allowable feedback level should be entered here in user
000 units as defined in par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit. If the level falls
Proc- below par.20-73 Minimum Feedback Level, autotuning is aborted and an
essCtrlU- error message will appear on the keypad.
nit*
20-74 Maximum Feedback Level

Range: Function:
999999. [Application dependant] The maximum allowable feedback level should be entered here in user
000 units as defined in par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit. If the level rises
Proc- above par.20-74 Maximum Feedback Level, autotuning is aborted and an
essCtrlU- error message will appear on the keypad.
nit*

20-79 PID Autotuning

Option: Function:
This parameter starts the PID autotuning sequence. Once the autotuning
has successfully completed and the settings have been accepted or re-
jected by the user, by pressing [OK] or [Cancel] buttons on the keypad at
the end of tuning, this parameter is reset to [0] Disabled.
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled
20-8* PID Basic Settings

This parameter group is used to configure the basic operation of the adjustable frequency drives PID controller,
including how it responds to a feedback that is above or below the setpoint, the speed at which it first starts
functioning, and when it will indicate that the system has reached the setpoint.
20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control

Option: Function:
[0] * Normal Normal [0] causes the adjustable frequency drives output frequency to
decrease when the feedback is greater than the setpoint reference. This
is common for pressure-controlled supply fan and pump applications.
[1] Inverse Inverse [1] causes the adjustable frequency drives output frequency to
increase when the feedback is greater than the setpoint reference. This
is common for temperature-controlled cooling applications, such as
cooling towers.
20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
20-84 On Reference Bandwidth

Range: Function:
5 %* [0 - 200 %] When the difference between the feedback and the setpoint reference is
less than the value of this parameter, the adjustable frequency drives
display will show Run on Reference. This status can be communicated
externally by programming the function of a digital output for Run on
Reference/No Warning [8]. In addition, for serial communications, the On
Reference status bit of the adjustable frequency drives status word will
be high (1).
The On Reference Bandwidth is calculated as a percentage of the setpoint
reference.

20-9* PID Controller

This group provides the ability to manually adjust this PID controller. By adjusting the PID controller parameters
the control performance may be improved. See section PID in the TR200 Design Guide, MG.11.Bx.yy for guide-
lines on adjusting the PID controller parameters.
20-91 PID Anti Windup

Option: Function:
[0] Off Off [0] The integrator will continue to change value also after output has
reached one of the extremes. This can afterwards cause a delay of
change of the output of the controller.
[1] * On On [1] The integrator will be locked if the output of the built-in PID con-
troller has reached one of the extremes (min or max value) and therefore
not able to add further change to the value of the process parameter
controlled. This allows the controller to respond more quickly when it
again can control the system.
20-93 PID Proportional Gain

Range: Function:
0.50 N/ [0.00 - 10.00 N/A]
A*
If (Error x Gain) jumps with a value equal to what is set in par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb., the PID con-
troller will try to change the output speed equal to what is set in par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]/par.
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] but in practice of course limited by this setting.
The proportional band (error causing output to change from 0100%) can be calculated by means of the formula:
( Proportional
1
Gain )
(Max Reference )
NOTE: Always set the desired for par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb. before setting the values for the PID
controller in par. group 20-9*.
20-94 PID Integral Time

Range: Function:
20.00 s* [0.01 - 10000.00 s] Over time, the integrator accumulates a contribution to the output from
the PID controller as long as there is a deviation between the reference/
setpoint and feedback signals. The contribution is proportional to the size
of the deviation. This ensures that the deviation (error) approaches zero.
Quick response on any deviation is obtained when the integral time is
set to a low value. Setting it too low, however, may cause the control to
become unstable.
The value set is the time needed for the integrator to add the same con-
tribution as the proportional part for a certain deviation.
If the value is set to 10,000, the controller will act as a pure proportional
controller with a P-band based on the value set in par.20-93 PID Propor-
tional Gain. When no deviation is present, the output from the propor-
tional controller will be 0.

20-95 PID Differentiation Time

Range: Function:
0.00 s* [0.00 - 10.00 s] The differentiator monitors the rate of change of the feedback. If the
feedback is changing quickly, it will adjust the output of the PID controller
to reduce the rate of change of the feedback. Quick PID controller re-
sponse is obtained when this value is large. However, if too large of a
value is used, the adjustable frequency drives output frequency may
become unstable.
Differentiation time is useful in situations where extremely fast adjusta-
ble frequency drive response and precise speed control are required. It
can be difficult to adjust this for proper system control. Differentiation
time is not commonly used in TR200 applications. Therefore, it is gen-
erally best to leave this parameter at 0 or OFF.
20-96 PID Diff. Gain Limit

Range: Function:
5.0 N/A* [1.0 - 50.0 N/A] The differential function of a PID controller responds to the rate of change
of the feedback. As a result, an abrupt change in the feedback can cause
the differential function to make a very large change in the PID control-
lers output. This parameter limits the maximum effect that the PID
controllers differential function can produce. A smaller value reduces
the maximum effect of the PID controllers differential function.
This parameter is only active when par.20-95 PID Differentiation Time is
not set to OFF (0 s).
Main Menu - Extended Closed-loop - TR200 - Group 21

21-** Ext. Closed-loop
The TR200 offers 3 extended closed-loop PID controllers in addition to the PID controller. These can be config-
ured independently to control either external servos (valves, dampers, etc.) or be used together with the internal
PID controller to improve the dynamic responses to setpoint changes or load disturbances.
The extended closed-loop PID controllers may be interconnected or connected to the PID closed-loop controller
to form a dual loop configuration.
In order to control a modulating device (e.g., a valve motor), this device must be a positioning servo motor with
built-in electronics accepting either a 010 V (signal from Analog I/O card MCB 115) or a 0/420 mA (signal from
control card and/or General Purpose I/O card MCB 101) control signal.
The output function can be programmed in the following parameters:
Control Card, terminal 42: par.6-50 Terminal 42 Output (setting [113]...[115] or [149]...[151], Ext. Closed-
loop 1/2/3
General Purpose I/O card MCB 101, terminal X30/8: par.6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output, (setting [113]...[115]
or [149]...[151], Ext. Closed-loop 1/2/3
General Purpose I/O card and Analog I/O card are optional cards.

21-0* Extended CL autotuning

The extended PID closed-loop PID controllers (parameter group 21-**, Ext. Closed-loop) can each be auto-tuned,
simplifying and saving time during commissioning, while ensuring accurate PID control adjustment.
To use PID autotuning, it is necessary for the relevant extended PID controller to have been configured for the
application.
A graphical Local Control Panel (keypad) must be used in order to react on messages during the autotuning
sequence.
Enabling autotuning par.21-09 PID Autotuning puts the relevant PID controller into PID autotuning mode. The
keypad then directs the user with on-screen instructions.
PID autotuning functions by introducing step changes and then monitoring the feedback. From the feedback
response, the required values for PID Proportional Gain, par.21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain for EXT CL 1, par.
21-41 Ext. 2 Proportional Gain for EXT CL 2 and par.21-61 Ext. 3 Proportional Gain for EXT CL 3 and Integral
Time, par.21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time for EXT CL 1, par.21-42 Ext. 2 Integral Time for EXT CL 2 and par.21-62 Ext.
3 Integral Time for EXT CL 3 are calculated. PID Differentiation Time, par.21-23 Ext. 1 Differentation Time for
EXT CL 1, par.21-43 Ext. 2 Differentation Time for EXT CL 2 and par.21-63 Ext. 3 Differentation Time for EXT CL
3 are set to value 0 (zero). Normal / Inverse, par.21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control for EXT CL 1, par.21-40 Ext.
2 Normal/Inverse Control for EXT CL 2 and par.21-60 Ext. 3 Normal/Inverse Control for EXT CL 3 are determined
during the tuning process.
These calculated values are presented on the keypad and the user can decide whether to accept or reject them.
Once accepted, the values are written to the relevant parameters and PID autotuning mode is disabled in par.
21-09 PID Autotuning. Depending on the system being controlled the time required to carry out PID autotuning
could be several minutes.
Excessive feedback sensor noise should be removed using the input filter (parameter groups 6-** and 5-5*,
Terminal 53/54 Filter Time Constant/Pulse Filter Time Constant #29/33) before activating PID autotuning.
21-00 Closed-loop Type

Option: Function:
This parameter defines the application response. The default mode
should be sufficient for most applications. If the relative application
speed is known, it can be selected here. This will decrease the time nee-
ded for carrying out PID autotuning. The setting has no impact on the
value of the tuned parameters and is used only for the PID autotuning
sequence.
[0] * Auto
[1] Fast Pressure
[2] Slow Pressure
[3] Fast Temperature
[4] Slow Temperature

21-01 PID Performance

Option: Function:
[0] * Normal Normal setting of this parameter will be suitable for pressure control in
fan systems.
[1] Fast Fast setting would generally be used in pumping systems, where a faster
control response is desirable.
21-02 PID Output Change

Range: Function:
0.10 N/ [0.01 - 0.50 N/A] This parameter sets the magnitude of step change during autotuning.
A* The value is a percentage of full operating range. This means that if
maximum analog output voltage is set to 10 V, 0.10 is 10% of 10 V, which
is 1 V. This parameter should be set to a value resulting in feedback
changes of between 10% and 20% for best tuning accuracy.
21-03 Minimum Feedback Level

Range: Function:
-999999. [Application dependant] The minimum allowable feedback level should be entered here in user
000 N/ units as defined in par.21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit for EXT CL 1, par.
A* 21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback Unit for EXT CL 2 or par.21-50 Ext. 3 Ref./
Feedback Unit for EXT CL 3. If the level falls below par.21-03 Minimum
Feedback Level, PID autotuning is aborted and an error message will ap-
pear on the keypad.
21-04 Maximum Feedback Level

Range: Function:
999999. [Application dependant] The maximum allowable feedback level should be entered here in user
000 N/ units as defined in par.21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit for EXT CL 1, par.
A* 21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback Unit for EXT CL 2 or par.21-50 Ext. 3 Ref./
Feedback Unit for EXT CL 3. If the level rises above par.21-04 Maximum
Feedback Level, PID autotuning is aborted and an error message will ap-
pear on the keypad.
21-09 PID Autotuning

Option: Function:
This parameter enables selection of the extended PID controller to be
autotuned and starts the PID autotuning for that controller. Once the au-
totuning has successfully completed and the settings have been accep-
ted or rejected by the user, by pressing [OK] or [Cancel] buttons on the
keypad at the end of tuning, this parameter is reset to [0] Disabled.
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled Ext CL 1 PID

21-1* Closed-loop 1 Ref/Feedback

Configure Extended Closed-loop 1 Controller reference and feedback.
21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit

Option: Function:
Select the unit for the reference and feedback.
[0]
[1] * %
[5] PPM
[10] min
[11] RPM
[12] PULSE/s
[20] liter / sec.
[21] liter / min
[22] liter / hr.
[23] m / sec.
[24] m/min
[25] m / hr.
[30] kg / sec.
[31] kg/min
[32] kg / hr.
[33] ton / min
[34] ton / hr.
[40] m / sec.
[41] m/min
[45] m
[60] C
[70] mbar
[71] bar
[72] Pa
[73] kPa
[74] m WG
[75] mm Hg

[80] kW
[120] GPM
[121] gal / sec.
[122] gal/min
[123] gal / hr.
[124] CFM
[125] ft/s
[126] ft/min
[127] ft/h
[130] lbs / sec.
[131] lbs / min.
[132] lbs / hr.
[140] ft/s
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
[160] F
[170] psi
[171] lb/in
[172] in. wtr. gage
[173] ft WG
[174] in Hg
[180] HP
21-11 Ext. 1 Minimum Reference

Range: Function:
0.000 [Application dependant] Select the minimum for the closed-loop 1 controller.
Ex-
tPID1Un
it*
21-12 Ext. 1 Maximum Reference

Range: Function:
100.000 [Application dependant] Select the maximum for the Closed-loop 1 Controller.
Ex-
The dynamics of the PID controller will depend on the value set in this
tPID1Un parameter. Please see also par.21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain.
it*

21-13 Ext. 1 Reference Source

Option: Function:
This parameter defines which input on the adjustable frequency drive
should be treated as the source of the reference signal for the closed-
loop 1 controller. Analog input X30/11 and Analog input X30/12 refer to
inputs on the General Purpose I/O.
[0] * No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[7] Pulse input 29
[8] Pulse input 33
21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback Source

Option: Function:
This parameter defines which input on the adjustable frequency drive
should be treated as the source of the feedback signal for the closed-loop
1 controller. Analog input X30/11 and Analog input X30/12 refer to inputs
on the General Purpose I/O .
[0] * No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[3] Pulse input 29
[4] Pulse input 33

21-15 Ext. 1 Setpoint

Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 The setpoint reference is used in extended 1 closed-loop. Ext.1 Setpoint
Ex- ExtPID1Unit] is added to the value from the Ext.1 Reference source selected in par.
tPID1Un 21-13 Ext. 1 Reference Source.
it*
21-17 Ext. 1 Reference [Unit]

Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Readout of the reference value for the closed-loop 1 controller.
Ex- ExtPID1Unit]
tPID1Un
it*
21-18 Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit]

Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Readout of the feedback value for the closed-loop 1 controller.
Ex- ExtPID1Unit]
tPID1Un
it*
21-19 Ext. 1 Output [%]

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Readout of the output value for the closed-loop 1 controller.
21-2* Closed-loop 1 PID

Configure the closed-loop 1 PID controller.
21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control

Option: Function:
[0] * Normal Select Normal [0] if the output should be reduced when feedback is higher
than the reference.
[1] Inverse Select Inverse [1] if the output should be increased when feedback is
higher than the reference.
21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain

Range: Function:
0.01 N/ [0.00 - 10.00 N/A]
A*
If (Error x Gain) jumps with a value equal to what is set in par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb., the PID con-
troller will try to change the output speed equal to what is set in par. 4-13/4-14, Motor Speed High Limit, but in
practice of course limited by this setting.
The proportional band (error causing output to change from 0%100%) can be calculated by means of the for-
mula:
( Proportional
1
Gain )
(Max Reference )

NOTE
Always set the desired for par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb. before setting the values for the PID controller in
par. group 20-9*.
21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time

Range: Function:
10000.0 [0.01 - 10000.00 s] Over time, the integrator accumulates a contribution to the output from
0 s* the PID controller as long as there is a deviation between the reference/
setpoint and feedback signals. The contribution is proportional to the size
of the deviation. This ensures that the deviation (error) approaches zero.
Quick response on any deviation is obtained when the integral time is
set to a low value. Setting it too low, however, may cause the control to
become unstable.
The value set is the time needed for the integrator to add the same con-
tribution as the proportional part for a certain deviation.
If the value is set to 10,000, the controller will act as a pure proportional
controller with a P-band based on the value set in par.20-93 PID Propor-
tional Gain. When no deviation is present, the output from the propor-
tional controller will be 0.
21-23 Ext. 1 Differentation Time

Range: Function:
0.00 s* [0.00 - 10.00 s] The differentiator does not react to a constant error. It only provides a
gain when the feedback changes. The quicker the feedback changes, the
stronger the gain from the differentiator.
21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit

Range: Function:
5.0 N/A* [1.0 - 50.0 N/A] Set a limit for the differentiator gain (DG). The DG will increase if there
are fast changes. Limit the DG to obtain a pure differentiator gain at slow
changes and a constant differentiator gain where quick changes occur.
21-3* Closed-loop 2 Ref/Fb


Option: Function:
See par.21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit for details
[0]
[1] * %
[5] PPM
[10] min
[11] RPM
[12] PULSE/s
[20] liter / sec.
[21] liter / min

[22] liter / hr.

[23] m / sec.
[24] m/min
[25] m / hr.
[30] kg / sec.
[31] kg/min
[32] kg / hr.
[33] ton / min
[34] ton / hr.
[40] m / sec.
[41] m/min
[45] m
[60] C
[70] mbar
[71] bar
[72] Pa
[73] kPa
[74] m WG
[75] mm Hg
[80] kW
[120] GPM
[121] gal / sec.
[122] gal/min
[123] gal / hr.
[124] CFM
[125] ft/s
[126] ft/min
[127] ft/h
[130] lbs / sec.
[131] lbs / min.
[132] lbs / hr.
[140] ft/s
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
[160] F
[170] psi
[171] lb/in
[172] in. wtr. gage
[173] ft WG
[174] in Hg
[180] HP


Range: Function:
0.000 [Application dependant] See par.21-11 Ext. 1 Minimum Reference for details.
Ex-
tPID2Un
it*

Range: Function:
100.000 [Application dependant] See par.21-12 Ext. 1 Maximum Reference for details.
Ex-
tPID2Un
it*

Option: Function:
See par.21-13 Ext. 1 Reference Source for details.
[0] * No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[7] Pulse input 29
[8] Pulse input 33

Option: Function:
See par.21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback Source for details.
[0] * No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[3] Pulse input 29
[4] Pulse input 33



Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 See par.21-15 Ext. 1 Setpoint for details.
Ex- ExtPID2Unit]
tPID2Un
it*

Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 See par.21-17 Ext. 1 Reference [Unit], Ext. 1 Reference [Unit], for details.
Ex- ExtPID2Unit]
tPID2Un
it*

Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 See par.21-18 Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit] for details.
Ex- ExtPID2Unit]
tPID2Un
it*
21-39 Ext. 2 Output [%]

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] See par.21-19 Ext. 1 Output [%] for details.


Configure the Closed-loop 2 PID controller.

Option: Function:
See par.21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control for details.
[0] * Normal
[1] Inverse

Range: Function:
0.01 N/ [0.00 - 10.00 N/A] See par.21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain for details.
A*

Range: Function:
10000.0 [0.01 - 10000.00 s] See par.21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time for details.
0 s*

Range: Function:
0.00 s* [0.00 - 10.00 s] See par.21-23 Ext. 1 Differentation Time for details.

Range: Function:
5.0 N/A* [1.0 - 50.0 N/A] See par.21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit for details.
21-5* Closed-loop 3 Ref/Fb


Option: Function:
See par.21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit for details.
[0]
[1] * %
[5] PPM
[10] min
[11] RPM
[12] PULSE/s
[20] liter / sec.
[21] liter / min
[22] liter / hr.
[23] m / sec.
[24] m/min
[25] m / hr.
[30] kg / sec.

[31] kg/min
[32] kg / hr.
[33] ton / min
[34] ton / hr.
[40] m / sec.
[41] m/min
[45] m
[60] C
[70] mbar
[71] bar
[72] Pa
[73] kPa
[74] m WG
[75] mm Hg
[80] kW
[120] GPM
[121] gal / sec.
[122] gal/min
[123] gal / hr.
[124] CFM
[125] ft/s
[126] ft/min
[127] ft/h
[130] lbs / sec.
[131] lbs / min.
[132] lbs / hr.
[140] ft/s
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
[160] F
[170] psi
[171] lb/in
[172] in. wtr. gage
[173] ft WG
[174] in Hg
[180] HP

Range: Function:
0.000 [Application dependant] See par.21-11 Ext. 1 Minimum Reference for details.
Ex-
tPID3Un
it*


Range: Function:
100.000 [Application dependant] See par.21-12 Ext. 1 Maximum Reference for details.
Ex-
tPID3Un
it*

Option: Function:
See par.21-13 Ext. 1 Reference Source for details.
[0] * No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[7] Pulse input 29
[8] Pulse input 33

Option: Function:
See par.21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback Source for details.
[0] * No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[3] Pulse input 29
[4] Pulse input 33


Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 See par.21-15 Ext. 1 Setpoint for details.
Ex- ExtPID3Unit]
tPID3Un
it*

Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 See par.21-17 Ext. 1 Reference [Unit] for details.
Ex- ExtPID3Unit]
tPID3Un
it*

Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 See par.21-18 Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit] for details.
Ex- ExtPID3Unit]
tPID3Un
it*
21-59 Ext. 3 Output [%]

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] See par.21-19 Ext. 1 Output [%] for details.

Configure the closed-loop 3 PID controller.

Option: Function:
See par.21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control for details.
[0] * Normal
[1] Inverse

Range: Function:
0.01 N/ [0.00 - 10.00 N/A] See par.21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain for details.
A*

Range: Function:
10000.0 [0.01 - 10000.00 s] See par.21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time for details.
0 s*

Range: Function:
0.00 s* [0.00 - 10.00 s] See par.21-23 Ext. 1 Differentation Time for details.


Range: Function:
5.0 N/A* [1.0 - 50.0 N/A] See par.21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit for details.
Main Menu - Application Functions - TR200 - Group 22

This group contains parameters used for monitoring TR200 applications.
22-00 External Interlock Delay

Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - 600 s] Only relevant if one of the digital inputs in parameter group 5-1* has
been programmed for External Interlock [7]. The external interlock timer
will introduce a delay after the signal has been removed from the digital
input programmed for External Interlock, before a reaction takes place.
22-2* No-Flow Detection
The adjustable frequency drive includes functions for detecting if the load conditions in the system allow the
motor to be stopped:
*Low Power Detection
*Low Speed Detection
One of these two signals must be active for a set time (par.22-24 No-Flow Delay) before selected action takes
place. Possible actions to select (par.22-23 No-Flow Function): No action, Warning, Alarm, Sleep Mode.
No Flow Detection:
This function is used for detecting a no flow situation in pump systems where all valves can be closed. Can be
used both when controlled by the integrated PI controller in the adjustable frequency drive or an external PI
controller. The actual configuration must be programmed in par.1-00 Configuration Mode.
Configuration mode for
- Integrated PI Controller: Closed-loop

- External PI Controller: Open-loop

CAUTION
Carry out No Flow tuning before setting the PI controller parameters!
No Flow Detection is based on the measurement of speed and power. For a certain speed, the adjustable fre-
quency drive calculates the power at no-flow.
This coherence is based on the adjustment of two sets of speed and associated power at no-flow. By monitoring
the power, it is possible to detect no-flow conditions in systems with fluctuating suction pressure, or if the pump
has a flat characteristic towards low speed.
CAUTION
If to use the integrated PI controller, carry out No Flow tuning before setting the PI controller parameters!
Low speed detection:

Low Speed Detection gives a signal if the motor is operating with minimum speed as set in par.4-11 Motor Speed
Low Limit [RPM] or par.4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]. Actions are common with No Flow Detection (indi-
vidual selection not possible).
The use of Low Speed Detection is not limited to systems with a no flow situation, but can be used in any system
where operation at minimum speed allows for a stop of the motor until the load calls for a speed higher than
minimum speed, e.g., systems with fans and compressors.
CAUTION
In pump systems, ensure that the minimum speed in par.4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or par.4-12 Motor Speed
Low Limit [Hz] has been set high enough for detection as the pump can run with a rather high speed even with valves
closed.
Dry pump detection:

No Flow Detection can also be used for detecting if the pump has run dry (low power consumption-high speed).
Can be used with both the integrated PI controller and an external PI controller.
The condition for Dry Pump signal:
- Power consumption below no flow level
and
- Pump running at maximum speed or maximum reference open-loop, whichever is lowest.

22-22 Low Speed Detection

Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled Select Enabled for detecting when the motor operates with a speed as
set in par.4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or par.4-12 Motor Speed
Low Limit [Hz].
22-23 No-Flow Function

Common actions for Low Power Detection and Low Speed Detection (Individual selections not possible).
Option: Function:
[0] * OFF
[1] Sleep Mode The drive will enter sleep mode and stop when a No Flow condition is
detected. See parameter group 22-4* for programming options for sleep
mode.
[2] Warning The drive will continue to run, but activate a No-Flow Warning [W92]. A
drive digital output or a serial communication bus can communicate a
warning to other equipment.
[3] Alarm The drive will stop running and activate a No-Flow Alarm [A 92]. A drive
digital output or a serial communication bus can communicate an alarm
to other equipment.
NOTE
Do not set par.14-20 Reset Mode to [13] Infinite auto reset when par.22-23 No-Flow Functionis set to [3] Alarm. Doing
so will cause the drive to continuously cycle between running and stopping when a No Flow condition is detected.
NOTE
If the drive is equipped with a constant speed bypass with an automatic bypass function that starts the bypass if the
drive experiences a persistent alarm condition, be sure to disable the bypass automatic bypass function, if [3] Alarm
is selected as the No-Flow Function.
22-24 No-Flow Delay

Range: Function:
10 s* [1 - 600 s] Set the time. Low Power/Low Speed must remain detected to activate
signal for actions. If detection disappears before the timer runs out, the
timer will be reset.
22-4* Sleep Mode

If the load on the system allows for stop of the motor and the load is monitored, the motor can be stopped by
activating the sleep mode function. This is not a normal stop command, but ramps the motor down to 0 RPM
and stops energizing the motor. When in sleep mode, certain conditions are monitored to find out when load
has been applied to the system again.
Sleep mode can be activated either from the No Flow Detection/Minimum Speed Detection (must be program-
med via parameters for No-Flow Detection, see the signal flow diagram in parameter group 22-2*, No-Flow
Detection) or via an external signal applied to one of the digital inputs (must be programmed via the parameters
for configuration of the digital inputs, par. 5-1* selecting [66] Sleep Mode). Sleep mode is activated only when
no wake-up conditions are present.

To make it possible to use, for example, an electro-mechanical flow switch to detect a no flow condition and
activate sleep mode, the action takes place at raising edge of the external signal applied (otherwise, the adjust-
able frequency drive would never come out of sleep mode as the signal would be steady connected).
NOTE
If sleep mode is to be based on No Flow Detection/Minimum Speed, remember to choose Sleep Mode [1] in par.
22-23 No-Flow Function.
When entering sleep mode, the lower status line in the Local Control Panel shows sleep mode.
See also signal flow chart in section 22-2* No Flow Detection.

There are three different ways of using the sleep mode function:
1) Systems where the integrated PI controller is used for controlling pressure or temperature, for example, to
boost systems with a pressure feedback signal applied to the adjustable frequency drive from a pressure trans-
ducer. par.1-00 Configuration Mode must be set for closed-loop and the PI controller configured for desired
reference and feedback signals.
Example: Boost system.

If no flow is detected, the adjustable frequency drive will increase the setpoint for pressure to ensure a slight
overpressure in the system (boost to be set in par.22-45 Setpoint Boost).
The feedback from the pressure transducer is monitored and when this pressure has dropped with a set per-
centage below the normal setpoint for pressure (Pset), the motor will ramp up again and pressure will be
controlled for reaching the set value (Pset).
2) In systems where the pressure or temperature is controlled by an external PI controller, the wake-up condi-
tions cannot be based on feedback from the pressure/temperature transducer as the setpoint is not known. In
the example with a boost system, desired pressure Pset is not known. par.1-00 Configuration Mode must be set
for Open-loop.
Example: Boost system.

When low power or low speed is detected the motor is stopped, but the reference signal (fref) from the external
controller is still monitored and because of the low pressure created, the controller will increase the reference
signal to gain pressure. When the reference signal has reached a set value fwake, the motor restarts,.
Configuration possibilities, overview:
Internal PI Controller External PI controller or manual control

(par.1-00 Configuration Mode: Closed-loop) (par.1-00 Configuration Mode: Open-loop)
Sleep mode Wake up Sleep mode Wake up
No Flow detection (pumps only) Yes Yes (except manual set-
ting of speed)
Low speed detection Yes Yes
External signal Yes Yes
Pressure/Temperature (trans- Yes No
mitter connected)
Output frequency No Yes
NOTE
Sleep mode will not be active when Local Reference is active (set speed manually by means of arrow buttons on the
keypad). See par.3-13 Reference Site.
Does not work in hand mode. Auto set-up in open-loop must be carried out before setting input/output in closed-loop.
22-40 Minimum Run Time

Range: Function:
10 s* [0 - 600 s] Set the desired minimum running time for the motor after a start com-
mand (digital input or bus) before entering sleep mode.
22-41 Minimum Sleep Time

Range: Function:
10 s* [0 - 600 s] Set the desired minimum time for staying in sleep mode. This will over-
ride any wake-up conditions.
22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*

22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz]

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference

Range: Function:
10 %* [0 - 100 %] Only to be used if par.1-00 Configuration Mode is set for closed-loop and
the integrated PI controller is used for controlling the pressure.
Set the pressure drop allowed in percentage of setpoint for the pressure
(Pset) before canceling the sleep mode.
NOTE: If used in application where the integrated PI controller is set for inverse control (e.g., cooling tower
applications) in par.20-71 PID Performance, the value set in par.22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference will automat-
ically be added.
22-45 Setpoint Boost

Range: Function:
0 %* [-100 - 100 %] Only to be used if par.1-00 Configuration Mode, is set for closed-loop and
the integrated PI controller is used. For example, in systems with con-
stant pressure control, it is advantageous to increase the system pres-
sure before the motor is stopped. This will extend the time during which
the motor is stopped and help to avoid frequent start/stop.
Set the desired overpressure/temperature as a percentage of the setpoint
for the pressure (Pset)/temperature before entering sleep mode.
If set at 5%, the boost pressure will be Pset*1.05. The negative values
can be used, for example, for cooling tower control, where a negative
change is needed.
22-46 Maximum Boost Time

Range: Function:
60 s* [0 - 600 s] Only to be used if par.1-00 Configuration Mode is set for closed-loop and
the integrated PI controller is used for controlling the pressure.
Set the maximum time for which boost mode will be allowed. If the set
time is exceeded, sleep mode will be entered and will not wait for the set
boost pressure to be reached.
22-6* Broken Belt Detection

Broken belt detection can be used in both closed-loop and open-loop systems for pumps, fans and compressors.
If the estimated motor torque is below the broken belt torque value (par.22-61 Broken Belt Torque) and the
adjustable frequency drive output frequency is above or equal to 15 Hz, the broken belt function (par.
22-60 Broken Belt Function) is performed.

22-60 Broken Belt Function

Selects the action to be performed if the broken belt condition is detected.
Option: Function:
[0] * OFF
[1] Warning The drive will continue to run, but activate a Broken Belt Warning [W95].
A drive digital output or a serial communication bus can communicate a
warning to other equipment.
[2] Trip The drive will stop running and activate a Broken Belt alarm [A 95]. A
drive digital output or a serial communication bus can communicate an
alarm to other equipment.
NOTE
Do not set par.14-20 Reset Mode to [13] Infinite auto reset when par.22-60 Broken Belt Function is set to [2] Trip. Doing
so will cause the drive to continuously cycle between running and stopping when a broken belt condition is detected.
NOTE
If the drive is equipped with a constant speed bypass with an automatic bypass function that starts the bypass if the
drive experiences a persistent alarm condition, be sure to disable the bypass automatic bypass function, if [2] Trip is
selected as the broken belt function.
22-61 Broken Belt Torque

Range: Function:
10 %* [0 - 100 %] Sets the broken belt torque as a percentage of the rated motor torque.
22-62 Broken Belt Delay

Range: Function:
10 s [0 - 600 s] Sets the time for which the broken belt conditions must be active before
carrying out the action selected in par.22-60 Broken Belt Function.
22-7* Short Cycle Protection

When controlling refrigeration compressors, often there will be a need for limiting the numbers of starts. One
way to do this is to ensure a minimum run time (time between a start and a stop) and a minimum interval
between starts.
This means that any normal stop command can be overridden by the Minimum Run Time function (par.
22-77 Minimum Run Time) and any normal start command (Start/Jog/Freeze) can be overridden by the Interval
Between Starts function (par.22-76 Interval between Starts).
None of the two functions are active if Hand On or Off modes have been activated via the keypad. If selecting
Hand On or Off, the two timers will be reset to 0, and not start counting until Auto is pressed and an active start
command applied.
22-75 Short Cycle Protection

Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled Timer set in par.22-76 Interval between Starts is disabled.
[1] Enabled Timer set in par.22-76 Interval between Starts is enabled.

22-76 Interval between Starts

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
22-77 Minimum Run Time

Range: Function:
0 s* [Application dependant] Sets the time desired as minimum run time after a normal start command
(Start/Jog/Freeze). Any normal stop command will be disregarded until
the set time has expired. The timer will start counting following a normal
start command (Start/Jog/Freeze).
The timer will be overridden by a Coast (Inverse) or an External Interlock
command.
NOTE: Does not work in cascade mode.
Main Menu - Time-based Functions - TR200 - Group 23

23-0* Timed Actions
Use Timed Actions for actions needing to be performed on a daily or weekly basis, e.g., different references for
working hours / non-working hours. Up to 10 Timed Actions can be programmed in the adjustable frequency
drive. The Timed Action number is selected from the list when entering parameter group 23-0* from the
keypad. par.23-00 ON Time par.23-04 Occurrence then refer to the selected Timed Action number. Each timed
action is divided into an ON time and an OFF time, in which two different actions may be performed.
NOTE
The clock (parameter group 0-7*) must be correctly programmed for timed actions to function correctly.
NOTE
When mounting an Analog I/O MCB 115 option card, a battery backup of the date and time is included.
23-00 ON Time
Array [10]
Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*

23-01 ON Action
Arra [10]
Option: Function:
Select the action during ON Time. See par.13-52 SL Controller Action for
descriptions of the options.
[0] * DISABLED
[1] No action
[2] Select set-up 1
[3] Select set-up 2
[4] Select set-up 3
[5] Select set-up 4
[10] Select preset ref 0
[18] Select ramp 1
[19] Select ramp 2
[22] Run
[23] Run reverse
[24] Stop
[26] Dcstop
[27] Coast
[28] Freeze output
[29] Start timer 0
[30] Start timer 1
[31] Start timer 2
[32] Set digital out A low
[33] Set digital out B low
[34] Set digital out C low
[35] Set digital out D low
[36] Set digital out E low
[37] Set digital out F low
[38] Set digital out A high
[39] Set digital out B high
[40] Set digital out C high
[41] Set digital out D high
[42] Set digital out E high
[43] Set digital out F high


[70] Start Timer 3
[71] Start Timer 4
[72] Start Timer 5
[73] Start Timer 6
[74] Start Timer 7
23-02 OFF Time

Array [10]
Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
23-03 OFF Action

Array [10]
Option: Function:
Select the action during OFF Time. See par.13-52 SL Controller Action
for descriptions of the options.
[0] * DISABLED
[1] No action
[2] Select set-up 1
[3] Select set-up 2
[4] Select set-up 3
[5] Select set-up 4
[18] Select ramp 1
[19] Select ramp 2
[22] Run
[23] Run reverse
[24] Stop
[26] Dcstop
[27] Coast
[28] Freeze output
[29] Start timer 0
[30] Start timer 1
[31] Start timer 2

[32] Set digital out A low

[33] Set digital out B low
[34] Set digital out C low
[35] Set digital out D low
[36] Set digital out E low
[37] Set digital out F low
[38] Set digital out A high
[39] Set digital out B high
[40] Set digital out C high
[41] Set digital out D high
[42] Set digital out E high
[43] Set digital out F high
[70] Start Timer 3
[71] Start Timer 4
[72] Start Timer 5
[73] Start Timer 6
[74] Start Timer 7
23-04 Occurrence
Array [10]
Option: Function:
Select the day(s) to which the timed action applies. Specify working/non-
working days in par.0-81 Working Days, par.0-82 Additional Working
Days and par.0-83 Additional Non-Working Days.
[0] * All days

[1] Working days
[2] Non-working days
[3] Monday
[4] Tuesday
[5] Wednesday
[6] Thursday
[7] Friday
[8] Saturday
[9] Sunday
23-1* Maintenance
Wear and tear calls for periodic inspection and service of elements in the application, e.g., motor bearings,
feedback sensors and seals or filters. Using preventive maintenance, service intervals may be programmed into
the adjustable frequency drive. The adjustable frequency drive will give a message when maintenance is re-
quired. Twenty preventive maintenance events can be programmed into the adjustable frequency drive. The
following must be specified for each event:

Maintenance item (e.g., Motor Bearings)

Maintenance action (e.g., Replace)
Maintenance Time Base (e.g., Running Hours or a specific date and time)
Maintenance Time Interval or the date and time of next maintenance
NOTE
To disable a preventive maintenance event, the associated par.23-12 Maintenance Time Base must be set to Disa-
bled [0].
Preventive Maintenance can be programmed from the keypad, but use of the PC-based Motion Control Tool
Trane Drive Utility is recommended.
The keypad indicates (with a wrench-icon and an M) when it is time for a preventive maintenance action, and
can be programmed to be indicated on a digital output in parameter group 5-3*. The Preventive Maintenance
Status may be read in par.16-96 Maintenance Word. A preventive maintenance indication can be reset from a
digital input, the adjustable frequency drive bus or manually from the keypad through par.23-15 Reset Mainte-
nance Word.
A maintenance log with the latest 10 logs can be read from parameter group 18-0* and via the Alarm log button
on the keypad after selecting Maintenance Log.

NOTE
The preventive maintenance events are defined in a 20-element array. Hence, each preventive maintenance event must
use the same array element index in par.23-10 Maintenance Item to par.23-14 Maintenance Date and Time.
23-10 Maintenance Item

Option: Function:
Array with 20 elements displayed below parameter number in the dis-
play. Press [OK] and step between elements by means of and buttons
on the LCP.
Select the item to be associated with the preventive maintenance event.
[1] * Motor bearings

[2] Fan bearings
[3] Pump bearings
[4] Valve
[5] Pressure transmitter
[6] Flow transmitter
[7] Temperature transm.
[8] Pump seals
[9] Fan belt
[10] Filter
[11] Drive cooling fan
[12] System health check
[13] Warranty
[20] Maintenance Text 0

23-11 Maintenance Action

Option: Function:
Select the action to be associated with the preventive maintenance
event.
[1] * Lubricate
[2] Clean
[3] Replace
[4] Inspect/Check
[5] Overhaul
[6] Renew
[7] Check
23-12 Maintenance Time Base

Option: Function:
Select the time base to be associated with the preventive maintenance
event.
[0] * Disabled Disabled [0] must be used when disabling the preventive maintenance
event.
[1] Running Hours Running Hours [1] is the number of hours the motor has been running.
Running hours are not reset at power-on. The Maintenance Time Interval
must be specified in par.23-13 Maintenance Time Interval.
[2] Operating Hours Operating Hours [2] is the number of hours the adjustable frequency drive
has been running. Operating hours are not reset at power-on. The Main-
tenance Time Interval must be specified in par.23-13 Maintenance Time
Interval.
[3] Date & Time Date & Time [3] uses the internal clock. The date and time of the next
maintenance occurrence must be specified in par.23-14 Maintenance
Date and Time.

23-13 Maintenance Time Interval

Range: Function:
1 h* [1 - 2147483647 h] Set the interval associated with the current preventive maintenance
event. This parameter is only used if Running Hours [1] or Operating
Hours [2] is selected in par.23-12 Maintenance Time Base. The timer is
reset from par.23-15 Reset Maintenance Word.
Example:
A preventive maintenance event is set up for Monday at 8:00. par.
23-12 Maintenance Time Base is Operating hours [2] and par.23-13 Main-
tenance Time Interval is 7 x 24 hours=168 hours. The next maintenance
event will be indicated the following Monday at 8:00. If this maintenance
event is not reset until Tuesday at 9:00, the next occurrence will be the
following Tuesday at 9:00.
23-14 Maintenance Date and Time

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
23-15 Reset Maintenance Word

Option: Function:
Set this parameter to Do reset [1] to reset the Maintenance Word in par.
16-96 Maintenance Word and reset the message displayed in the
keypad. This parameter will change back to Do not reset [0] when press-
ing OK.
[0] * Do not reset

[1] Do reset
NOTE
When messages are reset - Maintenance Item, Action and Maintenance Date/Time are not cancelled. par.23-12 Main-
tenance Time Base is set to Disabled [0].
23-16 Maintenance Text

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A]
23-5* Energy Log

The adjustable frequency drive is continuously accumulating the consumption of the motor controlled, based
on the actual power yielded by the adjustable frequency drive.
These data can be used for an Energy Log function allowing the user to compare and structure the information
about the energy consumption related to time.
There are basically two functions:

- Data related to a pre-programmed period, defined by a set date and time for start
- Data related to a predefined period back in time, e.g., the last seven days within the pre-programmed period
For each of the above two functions, the data are stored in a number of counters allowing for selecting the time
frame and a split on hours, days or weeks.
The period/split (resolution) can be set in par.23-50 Energy Log Resolution.
The data are based on the value registered by the kWh counter in the adjustable frequency drive. This counter
value can be read in par.15-02 kWh Counter containing the accumulated value since the first power-up or latest
reset of the counter (par.15-06 Reset kWh Counter).
All data for the energy log are stored in counters which can be read from par.23-53 Energy Log.
Counter 00 will always contain the oldest data. A counter will cover a period from XX:00 to XX:59 if hours or
00:00 to 23:59 if days.
If logging either the last hours or last days, the counters will shift contents at XX:00 every hour or at 00:00 every
day.
The counter with the highest index will always be subject to updates (containing data for the current hour since
XX:00 or the current day since 00:00).
The contents of counters can be displayed as bars on keypad. Select Quick Menu, Loggings, Energy Log: Trending
Continued Bin / Trending Timed Bin / Trending Comparison.

23-50 Energy Log Resolution

Option: Function:
Select the desired type of period for logging of consumption. Hour of
Day [0] , Day of Week [1] or Day of Month [2]. The counters contain the
logging data from the programmed date/time for start (par.23-51 Period
Start) and the numbers of hours/days as programmed for (par.23-50 En-
ergy Log Resolution).
The logging will start on the date programmed in par.23-51 Period
Start, and continue until one day/week/month has gone. Last 24 Hours
[5], Last 7 Days [6] or Last 5 Weeks [7]. The counters contain data for one
day, one week or five weeks back in time and up to the current time.
The logging will start at the date programmed in par.23-51 Period Start.
In all cases, the period split will refer to operating hours (time where
adjustable frequency drive is powered up).
[0] Hour of Day

[1] Day of Week
[2] Day of Month
[5] * Last 24 Hours
[6] Last 7 Days
[7] Last 5 Weeks
NOTE
The adjustable frequency drive has no back-up of the clock function and the set date/time will reset to default
(2000-01-01 00:00) after a power-down unless a Real Time Clock module with back-up is installed. Consequently, the
logging will be stopped until date/time is readjusted in par.0-70 Date and Time. In par.0-79 Clock Fault, it is possible to
program for a warning in case the clock has not been set properly, e.g., after a power-down.
23-51 Period Start

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
NOTE
When mounting an Analog I/O MCB109 option card, a battery back-up of the date and time is included.

23-53 Energy Log

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 4294967295 N/A] Array with a number of elements equal to the number of counters ([00]-
[xx] below parameter number in display). Press OK and Step between
elements by means of and buttons on the Local Control Panel.
Array elements:
Data from latest period is stored in the counter with the highest index.
At power-down, all counter values are stored and resumed at next pow-
er-up.
NOTE
All counters are automatically reset when changing the setting in par.23-50 Energy Log Resolution. At overflow the
update of the counters will stop at maximum value.
NOTE
When mounting an Analog I/O MCB109 option card, a battery backup of the date and time is included.
23-54 Reset Energy Log

Option: Function:
Select Do reset [1] to reset all values in the Energy Log counters shown
in par.23-53 Energy Log. After pressing OK, the setting of the parameter
value will automatically change to Do not reset [0].
[0] * Do not reset

[1] Do reset

23-6* Trending
Trending is used to monitor a process variable over a period of time and record how often the data falls into
each of ten user-defined data ranges. This is a convenient tool to get a quick overview indicating where to put
focus for improvement of operation.
Two sets of data for trending can be created in order to make it possible to compare current values for a selected
operating variable with data for a certain reference period, for the same variable. This reference period can be
pre-programmed (par.23-63 Timed Period Start and par.23-64 Timed Period Stop). The two sets of data can be
read from par.23-61 Continuous Bin Data (current) and par.23-62 Timed Bin Data (reference).
It is possible to create trending for following operation variables:

- Power
- Current
- Output frequency
- Motor Speed
The trending function includes ten counters (forming a bin) for each set of data containing the numbers of
registrations reflecting how often the operating variable is within each of ten pre-defined intervals. The sorting
is based on a relative value of the variable.
The relative value for the operating variable is
Actual/Rated * 100%.
for Power and Current and
Actual/Max * 100%
for Output Frequency and Motor Speed.
The size of each interval can be adjusted individually, but will default be 10% for each. Power and current can
exceed rated value, but those registrations will be included in the 90%100% (MAX) counter.

Once a second, the value of the operating variable selected is registered. If a value has been registered to equal
13%, the counter 10%<20% will be updated with the value 1. If the value stays at 13% for 10s, then 10
will be added to the counter value.
The contents of counters can be displayed as bars on keypad. Select Quick Menu >Loggings: Trending Continued
Bin / Trending Timed Bin / Trending Comparison.
NOTE
The counters starts counting whenever the adjustable frequency drive is powered up. The power cycle will shortly after
a reset zero the counters. EEProm data are updated once per hour.
23-60 Trend Variable

Option: Function:
Select the desired operating variable to be monitored for trending.
[0] * Power [kW] Power yielded to the motor. Reference for the relative value is the rated
motor power programmed in par.1-20 Motor Power [kW] or par.
1-21 Motor Power [HP]. Actual value can be read in par.16-10 Power
[kW] or par.16-11 Power [hp].
[1] Current [A] Output current to the motor. Reference for the relative value is the rated
motor current programmed in par.1-24 Motor Current. Actual value can
be read in par.16-14 Motor Current.
[2] Frequency [Hz] Output frequency to the motor. Reference for the relative value is the
maximum output frequency programmed in par.4-14 Motor Speed High
Limit [Hz]. Actual value can be read in par.16-13 Frequency.
[3] Motor Speed [RPM] Speed of the motor. Reference for relative value is the maximum motor
speed programmed in par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].

23-61 Continuous Bin Data

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 4294967295 N/A] Array with 10 elements ([0]-[9] below parameter number in display).
Press OK and step between elements by means of and buttons on
the keypad.
10 counters with the frequency of occurrence for the operating variable
monitored, sorted according to the following intervals:
Counter [0]: 0%<10%
Counter [1]: 10%<20%
Counter [2]: 20%<30%
Counter [3]: 30%<40%
Counter [4]: 40%<50%
Counter [5]: 50%<60%
Counter [6]: 60%<70%
Counter [7]: 70%<80%
Counter [8]: 80%<90%
Counter [9]: 90%<100% or Max
The above minimum limits for the intervals are the default limits. These
can be changed in par.23-65 Minimum Bin Value.
Starts to count when the adjustable frequency drive is powered up for
the first time. All counters can be reset to 0 in par.23-66 Reset Continuous
Bin Data.
23-62 Timed Bin Data

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 4294967295 N/A] Array with 10 elements ([0]-[9] below parameter number in display).
Press OK and step between elements by means of and buttons on
the keypad.
10 counters with the frequency of occurrence for the operating data
monitored sorted according to the intervals as for par.23-61 Continuous
Bin Data.
Starts to count at the date/time programmed in par.23-63 Timed Period
Start, and stops at the time/date programmed in par.23-64 Timed Period
Stop. All counters can be reset to 0 in par.23-67 Reset Timed Bin Data.
23-63 Timed Period Start

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*

NOTE
The adjustable frequency drive has no back-up of the clock function and the set date/time will reset to default
(2000-01-01 00:00) after a power-down unless a Real Time Clock module with back-up is installed. Consequently,
logging will be stopped until the date/time is readjusted in par.0-70 Date and Time. In par.0-79 Clock Fault, it is possible
to program for a warning in case the clock has not been set properly, e.g., after a power-down.
NOTE
23-64 Timed Period Stop

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
NOTE
23-65 Minimum Bin Value

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
23-66 Reset Continuous Bin Data

Option: Function:
Select Do reset [1] to reset all values in par.23-61 Continuous Bin Data.
After pressing OK, the setting of the parameter value will automatically
change to Do not reset [0].
[0] * Do not reset

[1] Do reset
23-67 Reset Timed Bin Data

Option: Function:
Select Do reset [1] to reset all counters in par.23-62 Timed Bin Data.
After pressing OK, the setting of the parameter value will automatically
change to Do not reset [0].
[0] * Do not reset

[1] Do reset

23-8* Payback Counter

The adjustable frequency drive includes a feature which can give a rough calculation on payback in cases where
the adjustable frequency drive has been installed in an existing plant to ensure energy savings by changing
from fixed to variable speed control. Reference for the savings is a set value to represent the average power
yielded before the upgrade with variable speed control.
The difference between the Reference Power at fixed speed and the Actual Power yielded with speed control
represent the actual savings.
As value for the fixed speed case, the rated motor size (kW) is multiplied with a factor (set in %) representing
the power produced at fixed speed. The difference between this reference power and the actual power is accu-
mulated and stored. The difference in energy can be read in par.23-83 Energy Savings.
The accumulated value for the difference in power consumption is multiplied with the energy cost in local cur-
rency and the investment is subtracted. This calculation for cost savings can also be read in par.23-84 Cost
Savings.
Cost Savings = {
t =0
t
(Rated Motor Power Power Reference Factor )
Actual Power Consumption Energy Cost } Investment Cost

Break even (payback) occurs when the value read in the parameter turns from negative to positive.
It is not possible to reset the Energy Savings counter, but the counter can be stopped any time by setting par.
23-80 Power Reference Factor to 0.
Parameter overview:
Parameter for settings Parameters for readout

Rated Motor Power par.1-20 Motor Power Energy Savings par.23-83 Energy Savings
[kW]
Power Reference Factor in par.23-80 Power Refer- Actual Power par.16-10 Power [kW],
% ence Factor par.16-11 Power [hp]
Energy Cost per kWh par.23-81 Energy Cost Cost Savings par.23-84 Cost Savings
Investment par.23-82 Investment

23-80 Power Reference Factor

Range: Function:
100 %* [0 - 100 %] Set the percentage of the rated motor size (set in par.1-20 Motor Power
[kW] or par.1-21 Motor Power [HP]) which is supposed to represent the
average power yielded at the time running with fixed speed (before up-
grade with variable speed control).
Must be set to a value different from zero to start counting.
23-81 Energy Cost

Range: Function:
1.00 N/ [0.00 - 999999.99 N/A] Set the current cost for a kWh in local currency. If the energy cost is
A* changed later on, it will impact the calculation for the entire period!
23-82 Investment
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 999999999 N/A] Set the value of the investment spent on upgrading the plant with speed
control, in same currency as used in par.23-81 Energy Cost.
23-83 Energy Savings

Range: Function:
0 kWh* [0 - 0 kWh] This parameter allows for a readout of the accumulated difference be-
tween the reference power and the actual output power.
If the motor size is set in HP (par.1-21 Motor Power [HP]), the equivalent
kW value will be used for the Energy Savings.
23-84 Cost Savings

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 2147483647 N/A] This parameter allows a readout of the calculation based on the above
equation (in local currency).

Main Menu - Application Functions 2 - Group 24

24-0*
NOTE
Please note the adjustable frequency drive is only one component of the TR200 system. Correct function of fire mode
depends on the correct design and selection of system components. Ventilation systems working in life safety appli-
cations have to be approved by the local fire authorities. Non-interruption of the adjustable frequency drive due
to fire mode operation may cause overpressure and result in damage to TR200 system and components,
including dampers and air ducts. The adjustable frequency drive itself may be damaged and it may cause
damage or fire. Trane accepts no responsibility for errors, malfunctions, personal injury or any damage
to the adjustable frequency drive itself or components herein, TR200 systems and components herein or
other property when the adjustable frequency drive has been programmed for fire mode. In no event
shall Trane be liable to the end user or any other party for any direct or indirect, special or consequential
damage or loss suffered by such party, which has occurred due to the adjustable frequency drive being
programmed and operated in fire mode.
Background
Fire mode is for use in critical situations, where it is imperative for the motor to keep running, regardless of the
adjustable frequency drives normal protective functions. These could be ventilation fans in tunnels or stairwells
for instance, where continued operation of the fan facilitates safe evacuation of personnel in the event of a fire.
Some selections of the fire mode function cause alarms and trip conditions to be disregarded, enabling the
motor to run without interruption.
Activation
Fire mode is activated only via digital input terminals. See parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
Messages in display
When fire mode is activated, the display will show a status message Fire Mode and a warning Fire Mode.
Once fire mode is again deactivated, the status messages will disappear and the warning will be replaced by
the warning Fire M Was Active. This message can only be reset by power-cycling the adjustable frequency
drive supply. If, while the adjustable frequency drive is active in fire mode, a warranty-affecting alarm (see par.
24-09 Fire Mode Alarm Handling) should occur, the display will show the warning Fire M Limits Exceeded.
Digital and relay outputs can be configured for the status messages Fire Mode Active and the warning Fire
M Was Active. See parameter group5-3* and parameter group 5-4*.
Fire M was Active messages can also be accessed in the warning word via serial communication. (See relevant
documentation).
The status messages Fire Mode can be accessed via the extended status word.
Digital Out/Re- Warning Word Ext. Status

Message Type keypad
lay 2 Word 2
Fire Mode Status + + + (bit 25)
Fire Mode Warning +
Fire M was Active Warning + + + (bit 3)
Fire M Limits Excee-
Warning + +
ded

Log
An overview of events related to fire mode can be viewed in the fire mode log, parameter group 18-1*, or via
the alarm log button on the keypad.
The log will include up to 10 of the latest events. Warranty-affecting alarms will have a higher priority as the
two other types of events.
The log cannot be reset!
Following events are logged:
*Warranty affecting alarms (see par.24-09 Fire Mode Alarm Handling, Fire Mode Alarm Handling)
*Fire Mode activated
*Fire Mode deactivated
All other alarms occurring while fire mode activated will be logged as usual.
NOTE
During fire mode operation all stop commands to the adjustable frequency drive will be ignored, including Coast/Coast
inverse and External Interlock. However, if your adjustable frequency drive incorporates Safe-Stop, this function is
still active. See Section How to Order / Ordering Form Type Code
NOTE
If in fire mode, it is desired to use the live zero function, then it will also be active for analog inputs other than that used
for fire mode setpoint/feedback. Should the feedback to any of those other analog inputs be lost, for example a cable
is burned, live zero function will operate. If this is undesirable, the live zero function must be disabled for those other
inputs.
Desired live zero function, if a signal is missing when fire mode is active, must be set in par.6-02 Fire Mode Live Zero
Timeout Function.
Warning for live zero will have a higher priority than the warning Fire Mode.
NOTE
When setting the command Start Reversing [11] on a digital input terminal in par.5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input, the
adjustable frequency converter will understand this as a reversing command.
24-00 Fire Mode Function

Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled Fire Mode Function is not active.
[1] Enabled - Run Fwd In this mode, the motor will continue to operate in a clockwise direction.
Works only in open-loop. Set par. par.24-01 Fire Mode Configuration to
Open-loop [0].
[2] Enabled - Run Rev In this mode, the motor will continue to operate in a counter-clockwise
direction. Works only in open-loop. Set par.24-01 Fire Mode Configura-
tion to Open-loop [0].
[3] Enabled - Coast When this mode is enabled, the output is disabled and the motor is al-
lowed to coast to stop.
[4] Enabled - Run Fwd/Re

NOTE
In the above, alarms are produced or ignored in accordance with the selection in par.24-09 Fire Mode Alarm Han-
dling.
24-04 Fire Mode Max Reference

Range: Function:
tion de-
pend-
ent*
24-05 Fire Mode Preset Reference

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [-100.00 - 100.00 %]
24-06 Fire Mode Reference Source

Option: Function:
Select the external reference input to be used for fire mode. This signal
will be added to the value set in par.24-06 Fire Mode Reference Source.
[0] * No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[7] Pulse input 29
[8] Pulse input 33
24-09 Fire Mode Alarm Handling

Option: Function:
[0] Trip+Reset, Crit Alar If this mode is selected, the adjustable frequency drive will continue to
run, ignoring most alarms, EVEN IF DOING SO MAY RESULT IN DAM-
AGE OF THE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE. Critical alarms are
alarms, which cannot be suppressed but a restart attempt is possible
(Infinity Automatic Reset).
[1] * Trip, Critical Alarms In case of a critical alarm, the adjustable frequency drive will trip and not
auto-restart (Manual Reset).
[2] Trip, All Alarms/Test It is possible to test the operation of fire mode, but all alarm states are
activated normally (Manual Reset).

Warran-
NOTE Critical ty
Warranty-affecting alarms. Certain alarms can affect the No: Description
Alarms Affecting
lifetime of the adjustable frequency drive. If one of these Alarms
ignored alarms occur while in fire mode, a log of the 4 Line ph. Loss x
event is stored in the fire mode log. 7 DC overvolt x
Here the 10 latest events of warranty-affecting alarms, 8 DC undervolt x
fire mode activation and fire mode deactivation are stor- 9 Inverter overloaded x
ed. 13 Overcurrent x
14 Ground fault x
16 Short circuit x
NOTE 29 Power card temp x
The setting in par.14-20 Reset Mode is disregarded if fire 33 Soft-charge fault x
mode is active (see par. 24-0*, Fire Mode). 38 Internal fault x
65 Ctrl. card temp x
68 SafeStop x
24-1*
The adjustable frequency drive includes a feature, which can be used to automatically activate an external elec-
tro-mechanical bypass in case of a trip/trip lock of the adjustable frequency drive or the event of a fire mode
coast (see par.24-00 Fire Mode Function).
The bypass will switch the motor to operation direct on line. The external bypass is activated by means of one
of the digital outputs or relays in the adjustable frequency drive, when programmed in parameter group 5-3*
or parameter group 5-4*.
NOTE
Important! After enabling the Drive Bypass function, the adjustable frequency drive is no longer Safety Certified (for
using the Safe Stop in versions, where included).
To deactivate the drive bypass at normal operation (fire mode not activated), one of following actions must be
carried out:
Press the Off button on the keypad, (or program two of the digital inputs for Hand On-Off-Auto).
Activate External Interlock via digital input
Carry out Power Cycling.
NOTE
The drive bypass cannot be deactivated if in fire mode. It can be deactivated only by either removing the fire mode
command signal or the power supply to the adjustable frequency drive!
When the Drive Bypass function is activated, the display on the keypad will show the status message Drive
Bypass. This message has a higher priority than the fire mode status messages. When the automatic drive
bypass function is enabled, it will cut in the external bypass according to the below sequence:

24-10 Drive Bypass Function

Option: Function:
This parameter determines, what circumstances will activate the drive
bypass function:
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled If in normal operation, the automatic drive bypass function will be acti-
vated at following conditions:
At a Trip Lock or a Trip. After the programmed number of reset attempts,
programmed in par.14-20 Reset Mode or if the bypass delay timer (par.
24-11 Drive Bypass Delay Time) expires before reset attempts have been
completed
When in fire mode, the bypass function will operate under following
conditions:
When experiencing a trip at critical alarms, a coast or if the bypass delay
timer expires before reset attempts have completed when [2] Enabled in
fire mode. The bypass function will operate at trip at critical alarms, coast
or if the bypass delay timer expires before reset attempts have been
completed.
[2] Enabled (Fire M Only) The bypass function will operate at trip at critical alarms, coast or bypass
delay timer if the timer expires before reset attempts have completed.
CAUTION
Important! After enabling the drive bypass function, the safe stop function (in versions, where included) no longer
complies with standard EN 954-1, Cat. 3 installations.

24-11 Drive Bypass Delay Time

Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - 600 s] Programmable in 1 s increments. Once the bypass function is activated
in accordance with the setting in par.24-10 Drive Bypass Function, the
bypass delay timer begins to operate. If the adjustable frequency drive
has been set for a number of restart attempts, the timer will continue to
run while the adjustable frequency drive tries to restart. If the motor re-
starts within the time period of the bypass delay timer, then the timer is
reset.
If the motor fails to restart at the end of the bypass delay time, the drive
bypass relay will be activated, which will have been programmed for
Bypass in par.5-40 Function Relay. If a [Relay Delay] has also been pro-
grammed in par.5-41 On Delay, Relay, [Relay] or par.5-42 Off Delay,
Relay, [Relay], then this time must also elapse before the relay action is
performed.
Where no restart attempts are programmed, the timer will run for the
delay period set in this parameter and will then activate the drive bypass
relay, which will have been programmed for Bypass in par.5-40 Function
Relay, Function Relay. If a relay delay has also been programmed in par.
5-41 On Delay, Relay, On Delay, Relay or par.5-42 Off Delay, Relay, [Re-
lay], then this time must also elapse before the relay action is performed.

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Alarms and Warnings
A warning or an alarm is signaled by the relevant LED on the front of the adjustable frequency drive and indicated
by a code on the display.
A warning remains active until its cause is no longer present. Under certain circumstances operation of the
motor may still be continued. Warning messages may be critical, but are not necessarily so.
In the event of an alarm, the adjustable frequency drive will have tripped. Alarms must be reset to restart op-
eration once their cause has been rectified.
This may be done in four ways:

1. By using the [RESET] control button on the keypad.
2. Via a digital input with the Reset function.
3. Via serial communication/optional serial communication bus.
4. By resetting automatically using the [Auto Reset] function, which is a default setting for TR200 Drive, see
par.14-20 Reset Mode.
NOTE: After a manual reset using the [RESET] button on the keypad, the [AUTO ON] or [HAND ON] button must
be pressed to restart the motor.
If an alarm cannot be reset, the reason may be that its cause has not been rectified, or the alarm is trip-locked
(see also table on following page).
WARNING
Alarms that are trip-locked offer additional protection, means that the line power supply must be switched off before
the alarm can be reset. After being switched back on, the adjustable frequency drive is no longer blocked and may be
reset as described above, once the cause has been rectified.
Alarms that are not trip-locked can also be reset using the automatic reset function in par.14-20 Reset Mode (Warning:
automatic wake-up is possible!)
If a warning and alarm is marked against a code in the table on the following page, this means that either a warning
occurs before an alarm, or it can be specified whether it is a warning or an alarm that is to be displayed for a given fault.
This is possible, for instance, in par.1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. After an alarm or trip, the motor carries on coasting,
and the alarm and warning flash on the adjustable frequency drive. Once the problem has been rectified, only the alarm
continues flashing.

Troubleshooting
No. Description Warn- Alarm/Trip Alarm/Trip Lock Parameter Refer-

ing ence
1 10 Volts low X
2 Live zero error (X) (X) 6-01
3 No motor (X) 1-80
4 Line phase loss (X) (X) (X) 14-12
5 DC link voltage high X
6 DC link voltage low X
7 DC overvoltage X X
8 DC undervoltage X X
9 Inverter overloaded X X
10 Motor ETR overtemperature (X) (X) 1-90
11 Motor thermistor overtemperature (X) (X) 1-90
12 Torque limit X X
13 Overcurrent X X X
14 Ground fault X X X
15 Hardware mismatch X X
16 Short Circuit X X
17 Control word timeout (X) (X) 8-04
23 Internal Fan Fault X
24 External Fan Fault X 14-53
25 Brake resistor short-circuited X
26 Brake resistor power limit (X) (X) 2-13
27 Brake chopper short-circuited X X
28 Brake check (X) (X) 2-15
29 Drive overtemperature X X X
30 Motor phase U missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58
31 Motor phase V missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58
32 Motor phase W missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58
33 Soft-charge fault X X
34 Serial Communication Bus communi- X X
cation fault
35 Out of frequency ranges X X
36 Line failure X X
37 Phase Imbalance X X
38 Internal fault X X
39 Heatsink sensor X X
40 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 27 (X) 5-01
41 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 29 (X) 5-02
42 Overload of Digital Output On X30/6 (X) 5-32
42 Overload of Digital Output On X30/7 (X) 5-33
46 Pwr. card supply X X
47 24 V supply low X X X
48 1.8 V supply low X X
49 Speed limit X (X) 1-86
50 AMA calibration failed X
51 AMA check Unom and Inom X
52 AMA low Inom X
53 AMA motor too big X
54 AMA motor too small X
55 AMA Parameter out of range X
56 AMA interrupted by user X
57 AMA timeout X
58 AMA internal fault X X
59 Current limit X
Table 5. 1: Alarm/Warning code list

Troubleshooting
No. Description Warn- Alarm/Trip Alarm/Trip Lock Parameter Refer-

ing ence
60 External Interlock X
62 Output Frequency at Maximum Limit X
64 Voltage Limit X
65 Control Board Overtemperature X X X
66 Heatsink Temperature Low X
67 Option Configuration has Changed X
68 Safe Stop Activated X1)
69 Pwr. Card Temp X X
70 Illegal adjustable frequency drive con- X
figuration
71 PTC 1 Safe Stop X X1)
72 Dangerous Failure X1)
73 Safe Stop Auto Restart
76 Power Unit Set-up X
79 Illegal PS config X X
80 Drive Initialized to Default Value X
91 Analog input 54 wrong settings X
92 NoFlow X X 22-2*
93 Dry Pump X X 22-2*
94 End of Curve X X 22-5*
95 Broken Belt X X 22-6*
96 Start Delayed X 22-7*
97 Stop Delayed X 22-7*
98 Clock Fault X 0-7*
201 Fire M was Active
202 Fire M Limits Exceeded
203 Missing Motor
204 Locked Rotor
243 Brake IGBT X X
244 Heatsink temp X X X
245 Heatsink sensor X X
246 Pwr.card supply X X
247 Pwr.card temp X X
248 Illegal PS config X X
250 New spare parts X
251 Type Code X X
Table 5. 2: Alarm/Warning code list
(X) Dependent on parameter 1) Cannot be auto reset via par.14-20 Reset Mode
A trip is the action when an alarm has appeared. The trip will coast the motor and can be reset by pressing the
reset button or make a reset by a digital input (parameter group 5-1* [1]). The original event that caused an
alarm cannot damage the adjustable frequency drive or cause dangerous conditions. A trip lock is an action that

Troubleshooting
occurs in conjunction with an alarm, which may cause damage to the adjustable frequency drive or connected
parts. A trip lock situation can only be reset by power cycling.
LED indication
Warning yellow
Alarm flashing red
Trip locked yellow and red
Alarm Word and Extended Status Word

Bit Hex Dec Alarm Word Warning Word Extended Status
Word
0 00000001 1 Brake Check Brake Check Ramping
1 00000002 2 Pwr. Card Temp Pwr. Card Temp AMA Running
2 00000004 4 Ground Fault Ground Fault Start CW/CCW
3 00000008 8 Ctrl.Card Temp Ctrl.Card Temp Slow Down
4 00000010 16 Ctrl. Word TO Ctrl. Word TO Catch Up
5 00000020 32 Overcurrent Overcurrent Feedback High
6 00000040 64 Torque Limit Torque Limit Feedback Low
7 00000080 128 Motor Th Over Motor Th Over Output Current High
8 00000100 256 Motor ETR Over Motor ETR Over Output Current Low
9 00000200 512 Inverter Overld. Inverter Overld. Output Freq High
10 00000400 1024 DC undervolt DC undervolt Output Freq Low
11 00000800 2048 DC overvolt DC overvolt Brake Check OK
12 00001000 4096 Short Circuit DC Voltage Low Braking Max
13 00002000 8192 Soft-charge fault DC Voltage High Braking
14 00004000 16384 Line ph. Loss Line ph. Loss Out of Speed Range
15 00008000 32768 AMA Not OK No Motor OVC Active
16 00010000 65536 Live Zero Error Live Zero Error
17 00020000 131072 Internal Fault 10V low
18 00040000 262144 Brake Overload Brake Overload
19 00080000 524288 U phase Loss Brake Resistor
20 00100000 1048576 V phase Loss Brake IGBT
21 00200000 2097152 W phase Loss Speed Limit
22 00400000 4194304 Serial Communi- Serial Communication
cation Bus Fault Bus Fault
23 00800000 8388608 24 V Supply Low 24V Supply Low
24 01000000 16777216 Line failure Line failure
25 02000000 33554432 1.8 V Supply Low Current Limit
26 04000000 67108864 Brake Resistor Low Temp
27 08000000 134217728 Brake IGBT Voltage Limit
28 10000000 268435456 Option Change Unused
29 20000000 536870912 Drive Initialized Unused
30 40000000 1073741824 Safe Stop Unused
Table 5. 3: Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word and Extended Status Word
The alarm words, warning words and extended status words can be read out via serial bus or optional serial
communication bus for diagnosis. See also par.16-90 Alarm Word, par.16-92 Warning Word and par.16-94 Ext.
Status Word.

Troubleshooting
Alarm Words
Alarm word, par.16-90 Alarm Word Alarm word 2, par.16-91 Alarm word 2
Bit Alarm Word Bit Alarm Word 2

(Hex) (par.16-90 Alarm Word) (Hex) (par.16-91 Alarm word 2)
00000001 Brake check 00000001 Service Trip, read / Write
00000002 Power card overtemperature 00000002 Reserved
00000004 Ground fault Service Trip, Typecode /
00000004
00000008 Ctrl. card overtemperature Spare part
00000010 Control word timeout 00000008 Reserved
00000020 Overcurrent 00000010 Reserved
00000040 Torque limit 00000020 No Flow
00000080 Motor thermistor overtemp. 00000040 Dry Pump
00000100 Motor ETR overtemperature 00000080 End of Curve
00000200 Inverter overloaded 00000100 Broken Belt
00000400 DC link undervoltage 00000200 Not used
00000800 DC link overvoltage 00000400 Not used
00001000 Short circuit 00000800 Reserved
00002000 Soft-charge fault 00001000 Reserved
00004000 Line phase loss 00002000 Reserved
00008000 AMA not OK 00004000 Reserved
00010000 Live zero error 00008000 Reserved
00020000 Internal fault 00010000 Reserved
00040000 Brake overload 00020000 Not used
00080000 Motor phase U is missing 00040000 Fans error
00100000 Motor phase V is missing 00080000 ECB error
00200000 Motor phase W is missing 00100000 Reserved
Serial communication bus 00200000 Reserved
00400000
fault 00400000 Reserved
00800000 24 V supply fault 00800000 Reserved
01000000 Line failure 01000000 Reserved
02000000 1.8 V supply fault 02000000 Reserved
04000000 Brake resistor short circuit 04000000 Reserved
08000000 Brake chopper fault 08000000 Reserved
10000000 Option change 10000000 Reserved
20000000 Drive initialized 20000000 Reserved
40000000 Safe Stop 40000000 Reserved
80000000 Not used 80000000 Reserved

Troubleshooting
Warning Words
Warning word , par.16-92 Warning Word Warning word 2, par.16-93 Warning word 2
Bit Warning Word Warning Word 2

Bit
(Hex) (par.16-92 Warning Word) (par.16-93 Warning word
(Hex)
00000001 Brake check 2)
00000002 Power card overtemperature 00000001 Start Delayed
00000004 Ground fault 00000002 Stop Delayed
00000008 Ctrl. card overtemperature 00000004 Clock Failure
00000010 Control word timeout 00000008 Reserved
00000020 Overcurrent 00000010 Reserved
00000040 Torque limit 00000020 No Flow
00000080 Motor thermistor overtemp. 00000040 Dry Pump
00000100 Motor ETR overtemperature 00000080 End of Curve
00000200 Inverter overloaded 00000100 Broken Belt
00000400 DC link undervoltage 00000200 Not used
00000800 DC link overvoltage 00000400 Reserved
00001000 DC link voltage low 00000800 Reserved
00002000 DC link voltage high 00001000 Reserved
00004000 Line phase loss 00002000 Reserved
00008000 No motor 00004000 Reserved
00010000 Live zero error 00008000 Reserved
00020000 10 V low 00010000 Reserved
00040000 Brake resistor power limit 00020000 Not used
00080000 Brake resistor short circuit 00040000 Fans warning
00100000 Brake chopper fault 00080000 ECB warning
00200000 Speed limit 00100000 Reserved
Serial Communication Bus 00200000 Reserved
00400000
comm. fault 00400000 Reserved
00800000 24 V supply fault 00800000 Reserved
01000000 Line failure 01000000 Reserved
02000000 Current limit 02000000 Reserved
04000000 Low temperature 04000000 Reserved
08000000 Voltage limit 08000000 Reserved
10000000 Encoder loss 10000000 Reserved
20000000 Output frequency limit 20000000 Reserved

Troubleshooting
Extended Status Words

Extended status word, par.16-94 Ext. Status Extended status word 2, par.16-95 Ext. Status
Word Word 2
Bit Extended Status Word Bit Extended Status Word 2 (par.

(Hex) (par.16-94 Ext. Status Word) (Hex) 16-95 Ext. Status Word 2)
00000001 Ramping 00000001 Off
00000002 AMA tuning 00000002 Hand / Auto
00000004 Start CW/CCW 00000004 Not used
00000008 Not used 00000008 Not used
00000010 Not used 00000010 Not used
00000020 Feedback high 00000020 Relay 123 active
00000040 Feedback low 00000040 Start Prevented
00000080 Output current high 00000080 Control ready
00000100 Output current low 00000100 Drive ready
00000200 Output frequency high 00000200 Quick Stop
00000400 Output frequency low 00000400 DC Brake
00000800 Brake check OK 00000800 Stop
00001000 Braking max 00001000 Standby
00002000 Braking 00002000 Freeze Output Request
00004000 Out of speed range 00004000 Freeze Output
00008000 OVC active 00008000 Jog Request
00010000 AC brake 00010000 Jog
00020000 Password Timelock 00020000 Start Request
00040000 Password Protection 00040000 Start
00080000 Reference high 00080000 Start Applied
00100000 Reference low 00100000 Start Delay
00200000 Local Ref./Remote Ref. 00200000 Sleep
00400000 Reserved 00400000 Sleep Boost
00800000 Reserved 00800000 Running
01000000 Reserved 01000000 Bypass
02000000 Reserved 02000000 Fire Mode
04000000 Reserved 04000000 Reserved

Troubleshooting
Fault messages
Hazardous Service Procedures!
The maintenance and troubleshooting procedures recommended in this section of the manual could result in
exposure to electrical, mechanical or other potential safety hazards. Always refer to the safety warnings provided
throughout this manual concerning these procedures. Unless specified otherwise, disconnect all electrical pow-
er including remote disconnect and discharge all energy storing devices such as capacitors before servicing.
Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. When neces-
sary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has
been trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Failure to follow all of the recommended
safety warnings provided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING 1, 10 volts low WARNING 5, DC link voltage high

The control card voltage is below 10 V from terminal The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher than
50. the high voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10 on the drive voltage rating. The adjustable frequency
V supply is overloaded. Max. 15 mA or minimum 590 drive is still active.
.
WARNING 6, DC link voltage low
This condition can be caused by a short in a connec- The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is lower than the
ted potentiometer or improper wiring of the potenti- low voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on
ometer. the drive voltage rating. The adjustable frequency
Troubleshooting: Remove the wiring from terminal drive is still active.
50. If the warning clears, the problem is with the cus- WARNING/ALARM 7, DC overvoltage
tomer wiring. If the warning does not clear, replace
If the intermediate circuit voltage exceeds the limit,
the control card.
the adjustable frequency drive trips after a time.
WARNING/ALARM 2, Live zero error
Troubleshooting:
This warning or alarm will only appear if program- Extend the ramp time
med by the user in par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Func-
tion. The signal on one of the analog inputs is less Change the ramp type
than 50% of the minimum value programmed for that Activate functions in par.2-10 Brake Function
input. This condition can be caused by broken wiring
Increase par.14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault
or faulty device sending the signal.
WARNING/ALARM 8, DC undervoltage
WARNING/ALARM 3, No motor
If the intermediate circuit voltage (DC) drops below
No motor has been connected to the output of the
the undervoltage limit, the adjustable frequency
adjustable frequency drive. This warning or alarm
drive checks if a 24 V backup supply is connected. If
will only appear if programmed by the user in par.
no 24 V backup supply is connected, the adjustable
1-80 Function at Stop.
frequency drive trips after a fixed time delay. The time
Troubleshooting: Check the connection between the delay varies with unit size.
drive and the motor.
WARNING/ALARM 9, Inverter overloaded
WARNING/ALARM 4, Mains phase loss
The adjustable frequency drive is about to cut out be-
A phase is missing on the supply side, or the line cause of an overload (too high current for too long).
voltage imbalance is too high. This message also ap- The counter for electronic, thermal inverter protec-
pears for a fault in the input rectifier on the adjustable tion gives a warning at 98% and trips at 100%, while
frequency drive. Options are programmed at par.
giving an alarm. The adjustable frequency drive can-
14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance.
not be reset until the counter is below 90%.
Troubleshooting: Check the supply voltage and sup- The fault is that the adjustable frequency drive is
ply currents to the adjustable frequency drive. overloaded by more than 100% for too long. NOTE:
See the derating section in the Design Guide for more
details if a high switching frequency is required.

Troubleshooting
WARNING/ALARM 10, Motor overload tem- WARNING/ALARM 12, Torque limit

perature The torque is higher than the value in par.4-16 Torque
According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR), Limit Motor Mode (in motor operation) or the torque
the motor is too hot. Select whether the adjustable is higher than the value in par.4-17 Torque Limit Gen-
frequency drive gives a warning or an alarm when the erator Mode (in regenerative operation). par.
counter reaches 100% in par.1-90 Motor Thermal Pro- 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit can be used to
tection. The fault is that the motor is overloaded by change this from a warning only condition to a warn-
more than 100% for too long. ing followed by an alarm.
Troubleshooting: WARNING/ALARM 13, Overcurrent
Check if the motor is overheating. The inverter peak current limit (approx. 200% of the
If the motor is mechanically overloaded rated current) is exceeded. The warning lasts about
1.5 sec. Then the adjustable frequency drive trips and
That the motor par.1-24 Motor Current is set cor-
issues an alarm. If extended mechanical brake con-
rectly.
trol is selected, trip can be reset externally.
Motor data in parameters 1-20 through 1-25 are
Troubleshooting:
set correctly.
This fault may be caused by shock loading or fast
The setting in par.1-91 Motor External Fan. acceleration with high inertia loads.
Run AMA in par.1-29 Automatic Motor Adapta- Turn off the adjustable frequency drive. Check if
tion (AMA). the motor shaft can be turned.
Make sure that the motor size matches the ad-
WARNING
justable frequency drive.
Live Electrical Components!
Incorrect motor data in parameters 1-20 through
1-25.
WARNING/ALARM 11, Motor thermistor over-
temp WARNING
The thermistor or the thermistor connection is dis-
Disconnect power before proceeding.
connected. Select whether the adjustable frequency
drive gives a warning or an alarm when the counter
reaches 100% in par.1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. ALARM 14, Earth (ground) fault
There is a discharge from the output phases to
Troubleshooting:
ground, either in the cable between the adjustable
Check if the motor is overheating.
frequency drive and the motor or in the motor itself.
Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded.
Troubleshooting:
Check that the thermistor is connected correctly Turn off the adjustable frequency drive and re-
between terminal 53 or 54 (analog voltage input) move the ground fault.
and terminal 50 (+10 V supply), or between ter-
Measure the resistance to ground of the motor
minal 18 or 19 (digital input PNP only) and ter-
leads and the motor with a megohmmeter to
minal 50.
check for ground faults in the motor.
If a KTY sensor is used, check for correct connec-
Perform current sensor test.
tion between terminal 54 and 55.
If using a thermal switch or thermistor, check the ALARM 15, Hardware mismatch
programming of par.1-93 Thermistor Source A fitted option is not operational with the present
matches sensor wiring. control board hardware or software.
If using a KTY sensor, check the programming of Record the value of the following parameters and
parameters 1-95, 1-96, and 1-97 match sensor contact your Trane supplier:
wiring. par.15-40 FC Type
par.15-41 Power Section
par.15-42 Voltage

Troubleshooting
par.15-43 Software Version

par.15-45 Actual Typecode String
WARNING
par.15-49 SW ID Control Card
par.15-50 SW ID Power Card
WARNING 24, External fan fault
par.15-60 Option Mounted The fan warning function is an extra protection func-
par.15-61 Option SW Version tion that checks if the fan is running / mounted. The
fan warning can be disabled in par.14-53 Fan Moni-
ALARM 16, Short circuit
tor ([0] Disabled).
There is short-circuiting in the motor or on the motor
For the D, E, and F Frame drives, the regulated volt-
terminals.
age to the fans is monitored.
Turn off the adjustable frequency drive and remove
the short-circuit. Troubleshooting:
Check fan resistance.
WARNING Check soft charge fuses.
WARNING/ALARM 28, Brake check failed
Brake resistor fault: the brake resistor is not connec-
WARNING/ALARM 17, Control word timeout
ted or not working.
There is no communication to the adjustable frequen- Check par.2-15 Brake Check.
cy drive.
The warning will only be active when par.8-04 Control ALARM 29, Heatsink temp
Word Timeout Function is NOT set to OFF. The maximum temperature of the heatsink has been
If par.8-04 Control Word Timeout Function is set to exceeded. The temperature fault will not be reset un-
Stop and Trip, a warning appears and the adjustable til the temperature falls below a defined heatsink
frequency drive ramps down until it trips, while giv- temperature. The trip and reset point are different
ing an alarm. based on the drive power size.
Troubleshooting: Troubleshooting:
Check connections on the serial communication Ambient temperature too high.
cable. Too long motor cable.
Increase par.8-03 Control Word Timeout Time Incorrect clearance above and below the drive.
Check the operation of the communication Dirty heatsink.
equipment.
Blocked air flow around the drive.
Verify proper installation based on EMC require-
ments. Damaged heatsink fan.
For the D, E, and F Frame drives, this alarm is based
WARNING on the temperature measured by the heatsink sensor
Live Electrical Components! mounted inside the IGBT modules. For the F Frame
drives, this alarm can also be caused by the thermal
sensor in the rectifier module.
WARNING 23, Internal fan fault
Troubleshooting:
The fan warning function is an extra protection func-
tion that checks if the fan is running / mounted. The
fan warning can be disabled in par.14-53 Fan Moni- Check soft charge fuses.
tor ([0] Disabled). IGBT thermal sensor.
For the D, E, and F Frame drives, the regulated volt-
age to the fans is monitored. WARNING
Troubleshooting: Disconnect power before proceeding.
Check soft charge fuses.

Troubleshooting
ALARM 30, Motor phase U missing 0 Serial port cannot be initialized. Serious hardware
failure
Motor phase U between the adjustable frequency 256-258 Power EEPROM data is defect or too old
drive and the motor is missing. 512 Control board EEPROM data is defect or too old
513 Communication time out reading EEPROM data
Turn off the adjustable frequency drive and check 514 Communication time out reading EEPROM data
motor phase U. 515 Application Orientated Control cannot recognize the
EEPROM data
516 Cannot write to the EEPROM because a write com-
WARNING mand is on progress
517 Write command is under timeout
Disconnect power before proceeding. 518 Failure in the EEPROM
519 Missing or invalid Barcode data in EEPROM
783 Parameter value outside of min/max limits
ALARM 31, Motor phase V missing 1024- A CAN message that has to be sent, couldn't be sent
1279
Motor phase V between the adjustable frequency 1281 Digital Signal Processor flash timeout
drive and the motor is missing. 1282 Power micro software version mismatch
1283 Power EEPROM data version mismatch
Turn off the adjustable frequency drive and check 1284 Cannot read Digital Signal Processor software ver-
motor phase V. sion
1299 Option SW in slot A is too old
1300 Option SW in slot B is too old
WARNING 1302 Option SW in slot C1 is too old
1315 Option SW in slot A is not supported (not allowed)
Disconnect power before proceeding. 1316 Option SW in slot B is not supported (not allowed)
1318 Option SW in slot C1 is not supported (not allowed)
1379 Option A did not respond when calculating Platform
ALARM 32, Motor phase W missing Version.
1380 Option B did not respond when calculating Platform
Motor phase W between the adjustable frequency Version.
drive and the motor is missing. 1536 An exception in the Application Orientated Control
is registered. Debug information written in keypad
Turn off the adjustable frequency drive and check 1792 DSP watchdog is active. Debugging of power part
motor phase W. data Motor Orientated Control data not transferred
correctly
2049 Power data restarted
WARNING 2064-207 H081x: option in slot x has restarted
2
Disconnect power before proceeding. 2080-208 H082x: option in slot x has issued a power-up wait
8
2096-210 H083x: option in slot x has issued a legal power-up
ALARM 33, Inrush fault 4 wait
2304 Could not read any data from power EEPROM
Too many power-ups have occurred within a short 2305 Missing SW version from power unit
time period. Let unit cool to operating temperature. 2314 Missing power unit data from power unit
2315 Missing SW version from power unit
WARNING/ALARM 34, Fieldbus communica-
tion fault ALARM 39, Heatsink sensor
The serial communication bus on the communication No feedback from the heatsink temperature sensor.
option card is not working.
The signal from the IGBT thermal sensor is not avail-
WARNING/ALARM 35, Out of frequency rang- able on the power card. The problem could be on the
es: power card, on the gate drive card, or the ribbon ca-
This warning is active if the output frequency has ble between the power card and gate drive card.
reached the high limit (set in par. 4-53) or low limit WARNING 40, Overload of Digital Output Ter-
(set in par. 4-52). In Process Control, Closed-loop (. 1-00) minal 27
this warning is displayed.
Check the load connected to terminal 27 or remove
WARNING/ALARM 36, Mains failure short-circuit connection. Check par.5-01 Terminal 27
This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage Mode.
to the adjustable frequency drive is lost and par. WARNING 41, Overload of Digital Output Ter-
14-10 Line Failure is NOT set to OFF. Check the fuses minal 29
to the adjustable frequency drive
Check the load connected to terminal 29 or remove
ALARM 38, Internal fault short-circuit connection. Check par.5-02 Terminal 29
It may be necessary to contact your Trane supplier. Mode.
Some typical alarm messages:

Troubleshooting
WARNING 42, Overload of Digital Output on ALARM 57, AMA timeout

X30/6 or Overload of Digital Output on X30/7 Try to start the AMA again a number of times, until
For X30/6, check the load connected to X30/6 or re- the AMA is carried out. Please note that repeated runs
move short-circuit connection. Check par.5-32 Term may heat the motor to a level where the resistances
X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101). Rs and Rr are increased. In most cases, however, this
is not critical.
For X30/7, check the load connected to X30/7 or re-
move short-circuit connection. Check par.5-33 Term ALARM 58, AMA internal fault
X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101). Contact your Trane supplier.
ALARM 46, Power card supply WARNING 59, Current limit
The supply on the power card is out of range. The current is higher than the value in par.4-18 Cur-
There are three power supplies generated by the rent Limit.
switch mode power supply (SMPS) on the power
WARNING 60, External interlock
card: 24 V, 5 V, +/-18 V. When powered with three-
phase AC line voltage, all three supplied are moni- External interlock has been activated. To resume nor-
tored. mal operation, apply 24 Vdc to the terminal program-
med for external interlock and reset the adjustable
WARNING 47, 24 V supply low frequency drive (via serial communication, digital I/
The 24 Vdc is measured on the control card. O, or by pressing the reset button on the keypad).
WARNING 48, 1.8 V supply low WARNING 61, Tracking error
The 1.8 Vdc supply used on the control card is outside An error has been detected between the calculated
of allowable limits. The power supply is measured on motor speed and the speed measurement from the
the control card. feedback device. The function for warning/alarm/dis-
able is set in 4-30, Motor Feedback Loss Function, error
WARNING 49, Speed limit
setting in 4-31, Motor Feedback Speed Error, and the
When the speed is not within the specified range in allowed error time in 4-32, Motor Feedback Loss Time-
par. 4-11 and par. 4-13, the drive will show a warning.
out. During a commissioning procedure the function
When the speed is below the specified limit in par.
may be effective.
1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM] (except when starting or
stopping), the drive will trip. WARNING 62, Output frequency at maximum
limit
ALARM 50, AMA calibration failed
The output frequency is higher than the value set in
Contact your Trane supplier.
par.4-19 Max Output Frequency
ALARM 51, AMA check Unom and Inom WARNING 64, Voltage limit
The setting of motor voltage, motor current, and mo-
The load and speed combination demands a motor
tor power is presumably wrong. Check the settings.
voltage higher than the actual DC link voltage.
ALARM 52, AMA low Inom WARNING/ALARM/TRIP 65, Control card
The motor current is too low. Check the settings. overtemperature
ALARM 53, AMA big motor Control card overtemperature: The cutout tempera-
The motor is too big for the AMA to be carried out. ture of the control card is 176F [80C].
ALARM 54, AMA small motor WARNING 66, Heatsink temperature low
The motor is too big for the AMA to be carried out. This warning is based on the temperature sensor in
the IGBT module.
ALARM 55, AMA Parameter out of range
ALARM 67, Option module configuration has
The parameter values found from the motor are out-
changed
side acceptable range.
One or more options have either been added or re-
ALARM 56, AMA interrupted by user moved since the last power-down.
The AMA has been interrupted by the user.

Troubleshooting
ALARM 68, Safe stop activated ALARM 92, No flow

Safe stop has been activated. To resume normal op- A no-load situation has been detected in the system.
eration, apply 24 Vdc to terminal 37, then send a reset See parameter group 22-2.
signal (via Bus, Digital I/O, or by pressing the reset
ALARM 93, Dry pump
key. See par. .
A no-flow situation and high speed indicates that the
ALARM 69, Power card temperature pump has run dry. See parameter group 22-2.
The temperature sensor on the power card is either
ALARM 94, End of curve
too hot or too cold.
Feedback stays lower than the setpoint which may
Troubleshooting: indicate leakage in the pipe system.
Check the operation of the door fans.
ALARM 95, Broken belt
Make sure that the filters for the door fans are not
blocked. Torque is below the torque level set for no load, in-
dicating a broken belt. See parameter group 22-6.
Make sure that the connector plate is properly
installed on IP 21 and IP 54 (NEMA 1 and NEMA ALARM 96, Start delayed
12) drives. Motor start has been delayed due to short-cycle pro-
tection active. See parameter group 22-7.
ALARM 70, Illegal FC Configuration
Actual combination of control board and power WARNING 97, Stop delayed
board is illegal. Stopping the motor has been delayed due to short
cycle protection is active. See parameter group 22-7.
ALARM 72, Dangerous failure
Safe stop with trip lock. Unexpected signal levels on WARNING 98, Clock fault
safe stop. Clock Fault. Time is not set or RTC clock (if mounted)
has failed. See parameter group 0-7.
Warning 76, Power Unit Set-up
The required number of power units does not match WARNING 201, Fire Mode was Active
the detected number of active power units. Fire mode has been active.
Troubleshooting: WARNING 202, Fire Mode Limits Exceeded
WARNING 73, Safe stop auto restart Fire mode has suppressed one or more warranty
voiding alarms.
Safe stopped. Note that with automatic restart ena-
bled, the motor may start when the fault is cleared. WARNING 203, Missing Motor
WARNING 77, Reduced power mode: A multi-motor underload situation was detected, this
could be due to, for example, a missing motor.
This warning indicates that the drive is operating in
reduced power mode (i.e., less than the allowed num- WARNING 204, Locked Rotor
ber of inverter sections). This warning will be gener- A multi-motor overload situation was detected,
ated on power cycle when the drive is set to run with which could be due to, e.g., a locked rotor.
fewer inverters and will remain on.
ALARM 244, Heatsink temperature
ALARM 79, Illegal power section configuration
This alarm is only for F Frame drives. It is equivalent
The scaling card is the incorrect t number or not in- to Alarm 29. The report value in the alarm log indi-
stalled. Also MK102 connector on the power card cates which power module generated the alarm:
could not be installed.
1 = left most inverter module.
ALARM 80, Drive initialized to default value
2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 drive.
Parameter settings are initialized to default settings
after a manual reset. 2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 drive.
ALARM 91, Analog input 54 wrong settings 3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 drive.
Switch S202 has to be set in position OFF (voltage 5 = rectifier module.

input) when a KTY sensor is connected to analog in-
put terminal 54.

Troubleshooting
the label on the unit. Remember to select Save to

ALARM 245, Heatsink sensor
EEPROM to complete.
to Alarm 39. The report value in the alarm log indi- ALARM 251, New type code
cates which power module generated the alarm: The adjustable frequency drive has a new type code.
2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 drive.
5 = rectifier module.
ALARM 246, Power card supply
to Alarm 46. The report value in the alarm log indi-
cates which power module generated the alarm:
ALARM 247, Power card temperature
ALARM 248, Illegal power section configura-
tion
ALARM 250, New spare part
The power or switch mode power supply has been
exchanged. The adjustable frequency drive type code
must be restored in the EEPROM. Select the correct
type code in par.14-23 Typecode Setting according to

Parameter Lists
Parameter Lists TR200
Default settings
Changes during operation:
TRUE means that the parameter can be changed while the adjustable frequency drive is in operation, and
FALSE means that the adjustable frequency drive must be stopped before a change can be made.
4 set-up:
'All set-up': the parameter can be set individually in each of the four set-ups, i. e., one single parameter can have
four different data values.
1 set-up: data value will be the same in all set-ups.
SR: N/A:
Size related No default value available.
Conversion index:
This number refers to a conversion figure used when writing or reading by means of an adjustable frequency
drive.
Conv. index 100 67 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6

Conv. factor 1 1/60 1000000 100000 10000 1000 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Data type Description Type

2 Integer 8 Int8
3 Integer 16 Int16
4 Integer 32 Int32
5 Unsigned 8 Uint8
6 Unsigned 16 Uint16
7 Unsigned 32 Uint32
9 Visible String VisStr
33 Normalized value 2 bytes N2
35 Bit sequence of 16 Boolean variables V2
54 Time difference w/o date TimD

Parameter Lists
0-** Operation and Display
Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change dur- Conver- Type
No. # ing operation sion index
0-0* Basic Settings
0-01 Language [0] English 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-02 Motor Speed Unit [1] Hz 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-03 Regional Settings [0] International 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-04 Operating State at Power-up [0] Resume All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-05 Local Mode Unit [0] As Motor Speed Unit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-1* Set-up Operations
0-10 Active Set-up [1] Set-up 1 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-11 Programming Set-up [9] Active Set-up All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-12 This Set-up Linked to [0] Not linked All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
0-14 Readout: Prog. Set-ups / Channel 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
0-2* LCP Display
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 1602 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-23 Display Line 2 Large 1613 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-24 Display Line 3 Large 1502 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-25 My Personal Menu ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
0-3* LCP Cust. Readout
0-30 Custom Readout Unit [1] % All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-31 Custom Readout Min Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
0-32 Custom Readout Max Value 100.00 CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
VisStr[2
0-37 Display Text 1 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 5]
VisStr[2
VisStr[2
0-4* LCP Keypad
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-5* Copy/Save
0-50 LCP Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-51 Set-up Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-6* Password
0-60 Main Menu Password 100 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-65 Personal Menu Password 200 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-7* Clock Settings
TimeOf-
0-70 Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Day
0-71 Date Format null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-72 Time Format null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-74 DST/Summertime [0] OFF 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
TimeOf-
0-76 DST/Summertime Start ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Day
TimeOf-
0-77 DST/Summertime End ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Day
0-79 Clock Fault null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-81 Working Days null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
TimeOf-
0-82 Additional Working Days ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Day
TimeOf-
0-83 Additional Non-Working Days ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Day
VisStr[2
0-89 Date and Time Readout 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 5]

Parameter Lists
1-** Load / Motor
No. # ing opera- sion index
tion
1-00 Configuration Mode null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-03 Torque Characteristics [3] Auto Energy Optim. VT All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-2* Motor Data
1-20 Motor Power [kW] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 1 Uint32
1-21 Motor Power [HP] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-22 Motor Voltage ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-23 Motor Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-24 Motor Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 67 Uint16
1-28 Motor Rotation Check [0] OFF All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-3* Addl. Motor Data
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
1-39 Motor Poles ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
1-5* Load-Indep. Setting
1-50 Motor Magnetization at Zero Speed 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetizing [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetizing [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-6* Load-Depend. Settg.
1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-61 High Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-62 Slip Compensation 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-64 Resonance Dampening 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant 5 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
1-7* Start Adjustments
1-71 Start Delay 0.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-73 Flying Start [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-8* Stop Adjustments
1-80 Function at Stop [0] Coast All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-87 Trip Speed Low [Hz] 0.0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-9* Motor Temperature
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection [4] ETR trip 1 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-91 Motor External Fan [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
1-93 Thermistor Source [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

Parameter Lists
2-** Brakes
tion
2-0* DC Brake
2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
2-01 DC Brake Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-02 DC Braking Time 10.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-03 DC Brake Cut-in Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
2-04 DC Brake Cut-in Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-1* Brake Energy Funct.
2-10 Brake Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
2-13 Brake Power Monitoring [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-15 Brake Check [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-16 AC Brake Max. Current 100.0 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
2-17 Over-voltage Control [2] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-** Reference / Ramps
tion
3-0* Reference Limits
3-02 Minimum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-03 Maximum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-04 Reference Function null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-1* References
3-10 Preset Reference 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
3-13 Reference Site [0] Linked to Hand / Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-14 Preset Relative Reference 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
3-15 Reference 1 Source [1] Analog input 53 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-16 Reference 2 Source [20] Digital pot.meter All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-17 Reference 3 Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
3-4* Ramp 1
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-5* Ramp 2
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp-up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-8* Other Ramps
3-80 Jog Ramp Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-9* Digital Pot. meter
3-90 Step Size 0.10 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-91 Ramp Time 1.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-92 Power Restore [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-93 Maximum Limit 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-94 Minimum Limit 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-95 Ramp Delay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 TimD

Parameter Lists
4-** Limits / Warnings
tion
4-1* Motor Limits
4-10 Motor Speed Direction [2] Both directions All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode 100.0 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-18 Current Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
4-19 Max Output Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
4-5* Adj. Warnings
4-50 Warning Current Low 0.00 A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-51 Warning Current High ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-52 Warning Speed Low 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-53 Warning Speed High outputSpeedHighLimit (P413) All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-54 Warning Reference Low -999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-55 Warning Reference High 999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-56 Warning Feedback Low -999999.999 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-57 Warning Feedback High 999999.999 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function [2] Trip 1000 ms All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-6* Speed Bypass
4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-62 Bypass Speed to [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up [0] OFF All set-ups FALSE - Uint8

Parameter Lists
5-** Digital In / Out
tion
5-0* Digital I/O mode
5-00 Digital I/O Mode [0] PNP - Active at 24 V All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-1* Digital Inputs
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8] Start All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input [14] Jog All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-3* Digital Outputs
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-31 Terminal 29 digital Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-4* Relays
5-40 Function Relay null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-41 On Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-42 Off Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-5* Pulse Input
5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 100 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 100 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
5-6* Pulse Output
5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27 5000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29 5000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6 5000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-9* Bus Controlled
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16

Parameter Lists
6-** Analog In / Out
tion
6-0* Analog I/O Mode
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-02 Fire Mode Live Zero Timeout Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-1* Analog Input 53
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current 4.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-13 Terminal 53 High Current 20.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-17 Terminal 53 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-2* Analog Input 54
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current 4.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current 20.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-3* Analog Input X30/11
6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-37 Term. X30/11 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-4* Analog Input X30/12
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-47 Term. X30/12 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-5* Analog Output 42
6-50 Terminal 42 Output null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale 100.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-6* Analog Output X30/8
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale 100.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-63 Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
6-64 Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16

Parameter Lists
8-** Communication and Options
8-01 Control Site null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-02 Control Source null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-03 Control Timeout Time ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint32
8-04 Control Timeout Function [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function [1] Resume set-up 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-06 Reset Control Timeout [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger [0] Disable 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-1* Control Settings
8-10 Control Profile [0] FC profile All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW [1] Profile Default All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-3* FC Port Settings
8-30 Protocol null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-31 Address ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-32 Baud Rate null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-35 Minimum Response Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-36 Maximum Response Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-37 Maximum Inter-Char Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -5 Uint16
8-4* FC MC protocol set
8-40 Telegram selection [1] Standard telegram 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-5* Digital/Bus
8-50 Coasting Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-52 DC Brake Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-53 Start Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-54 Reverse Select null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-55 Set-up Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-56 Preset Reference Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-7* BACnet
8-70 BACnet Device Instance 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
8-72 MS/TP Max Masters 127 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-73 MS/TP Max Info Frames 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
8-74 "I-Am" Service [0] Send at power-up 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
VisStr[2
8-75 Initialization Password ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 0]
8-8* FC Port Diagnostics
8-80 Bus Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-81 Bus Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-83 Slave Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-84 Slave Messages Sent 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-85 Slave Timeout Errors 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-89 Diagnostics Count 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int32
8-9* Bus Jog
8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed 100 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed 200 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
8-94 Bus Feedback 1 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 N2

Parameter Lists
11-** LonWorks
11-0* LonWorks ID
11-00 Neuron ID 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[6]
11-1* LON Functions
11-10 Drive Profile [0] VSD profile All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
11-15 LON Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
11-17 XIF Revision 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[5]
11-18 LonWorks Revision 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[5]
11-2* LON Param. Access
11-21 Store Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-** Smart Logic Controller
tion
13-0* SLC Settings
13-00 SL Controller Mode null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-01 Start Event null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-02 Stop Event null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-03 Reset SLC [0] Do not reset SLC All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-1* Comparators
13-10 Comparator Operand null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-11 Comparator Operator null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-12 Comparator Value ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
13-2* Timers
13-20 SL Controller Timer ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 TimD
13-4* Logic Rules
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-5* States
13-51 SL Controller Event null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-52 SL Controller Action null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

Parameter Lists
14-** Special Functions
tion
14-0* Inverter Switching
14-00 Switching Pattern null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-01 Switching Frequency null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-03 Overmodulation [1] On All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-04 PWM Random [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-1* Mains On/Off
14-10 Mains Failure [0] No function All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance [0] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-2* Reset Functions
14-20 Reset Mode null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-21 Automatic Restart Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-22 Operation Mode [0] Normal operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-23 Typecode Setting null 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-28 Production Settings [0] No action All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-29 Service Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
14-3* Current Limit Ctrl.
14-30 Current Lim Cont, Proportional Gain 100 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
14-31 Current Lim Contr, Integration Time 0.020 s All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time 26.0 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
14-4* Energy Optimizing
14-40 VT Level 66 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetization ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency 10 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-43 Motor Cos-Phi ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
14-5* Environment
14-50 RFI 1 [1] On 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-52 Fan Control [0] Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-53 Fan Monitor [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-55 Output Filter [0] No Filter 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units ExpressionLimit 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint8
14-6* Auto Derate
14-60 Function at Overtemperature [0] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-61 Function at Inverter Overload [0] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-62 Inv. Overload Derate Current 95 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

Parameter Lists
15-** Adjustable Frequency Drive Information
Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during Conver- Type
No. # operation sion index
15-0* Operating Data
15-00 Operating Hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-01 Running Hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-02 kWh Counter 0 kWh All set-ups FALSE 75 Uint32
15-03 Power-ups 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-04 Over Temps 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-05 Over Volts 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-06 Reset kWh Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-08 Number of Starts 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-1* Data Log Settings
15-10 Logging Source 0 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
15-11 Logging Interval ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 TimD
15-12 Trigger Event [0] FALSE 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
15-13 Logging Mode [0] Log always 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-14 Samples Before Trigger 50 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
15-2* Historic Log
15-20 Historic Log: Event 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-21 Historic Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-22 Historic Log: Time 0 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
15-23 Historic Log: Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 TimeOfDay
15-3* Alarm Log
15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-31 Alarm Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
15-32 Alarm Log: Time 0s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-33 Alarm Log: Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 TimeOfDay
15-4* Drive Identification
15-40 FC Type 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[6]
15-41 Power Section 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-42 Voltage 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-43 Software Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[5]
15-44 Ordered Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-45 Actual Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-46 Adj Freq Dr Ordering No. 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-47 Power Card Ordering No. 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-48 LCP ID Num. 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-49 SW ID Control Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-50 SW ID Power Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-51 Adj Freq Dr Serial No. 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[10]
15-53 Power Card Serial Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[19]
15-6* Option Ident
15-60 Option Mounted 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-61 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-62 Option Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-63 Option Serial No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[18]
15-70 Option in Slot A 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-71 Slot A Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-72 Option in Slot B 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-73 Slot B Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-74 Option in Slot C0 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-75 Slot C0 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-76 Option in Slot C1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-77 Slot C1 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-9* Parameter Info
15-92 Defined Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-93 Modified Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-98 Drive Identification 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-99 Parameter Metadata 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16

Parameter Lists
16-** Data Readouts
tion
16-0* General Status
16-00 Control Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-01 Reference [Unit] 0.000 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-02 Reference % 0.0 % All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-03 Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-05 Main Actual Value [%] 0.00 % All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
16-09 Custom Readout 0.00 CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-1* Motor Status
16-10 Power [kW] 0.00 kW All set-ups FALSE 1 Int32
16-11 Power [hp] 0.00 hp All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-12 Motor voltage 0.0 V All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-13 Frequency 0.0 Hz All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-14 Motor Current 0.00 A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-15 Frequency [%] 0.00 % All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
16-16 Torque [Nm] 0.0 Nm All set-ups FALSE -1 Int32
16-17 Speed [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-18 Motor Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-22 Torque [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-26 Power Filtered [kW] 0.000 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-27 Power Filtered [hp] 0.000 hp All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-3* Drive Status
16-30 DC Link Voltage 0V All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-32 Brake Energy /s 0.000 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-33 Brake Energy /2 min 0.000 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-34 Heatsink Temp. 0 C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-35 Inverter Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-36 Inv. Nom. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-37 Inv. Max. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-38 SL Controller State 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-39 Control Card Temp. 0 C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-40 Logging Buffer Full [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
16-49 Current Fault Source 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
16-50 External Reference 0.0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-52 Feedback [Unit] 0.000 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-53 Digi Pot Reference 0.00 N/A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int16
16-54 Feedback 1 [Unit] 0.000 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-58 PID Output [%] 0.0 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Int16
16-6* Inputs & Outputs
16-60 Digital Input 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-62 Analog Input 53 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-64 Analog Input 54 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-66 Digital Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-68 Pulse Input #33 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-71 Relay Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-72 Counter A 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-73 Counter B 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-75 Analog In X30/11 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-76 Analog In X30/12 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA] 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-84 Comm. Option Status 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-85 FC Port CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-86 FC Port REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-9* Diagnosis Readouts
16-90 Alarm Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-91 Alarm word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-92 Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-93 Warning word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-94 Ext. Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-95 Ext. Status Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-96 Maintenance Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32

Parameter Lists
18-** Info & Readouts
18-0* Maintenance Log
18-00 Maintenance Log: Item 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
18-01 Maintenance Log: Action 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
18-02 Maintenance Log: Time 0s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
TimeOf-
18-03 Maintenance Log: Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Day
18-1* Fire Mode Log
18-10 Fire Mode Log: Event 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
18-11 Fire Mode Log: Time 0s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
TimeOf-
18-12 Fire Mode Log: Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Day
18-3* Inputs & Outputs
18-30 Analog Input X42/1 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
18-33 Analog Out X42/7 [V] 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
18-5* Ref. & Feedb.
18-50 Sensorless Readout [unit] 0.000 SensorlessUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32

Parameter Lists
20-** FC Closed-loop
20-0* Feedback
20-00 Feedback 1 Source [2] Analog input 54 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion [0] Linear All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-03 Feedback 2 Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-06 Feedback 3 Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb. 0.000 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb. 100.000 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
20-2* Feedback/Setpoint
20-20 Feedback Function [3] Minimum All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-21 Setpoint 1 0.000 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
20-3* Feedb. Adv. Conv.
20-30 Refrigerant [0] R22 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-31 User-defined Refrigerant A1 10.0000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
20-32 User-defined Refrigerant A2 -2250.00 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
20-33 User-defined Refrigerant A3 250.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
20-34 Fan 1 Area [m2] 0.500 m2 All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
20-35 Fan 1 Area [in2] 750 in2 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
20-36 Fan 2 Area [m2] 0.500 m2 All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
20-37 Fan 2 Area [in2] 750 in2 All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
20-38 Air Density Factor [%] 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
20-6* Sensorless
20-60 Sensorless Unit null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
VisStr[25
20-69 Sensorless Information 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 ]
20-7* PID Autotuning
20-70 Closed-loop Type [0] Auto 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-71 PID Performance [0] Normal 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-72 PID Output Change 0.10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
20-73 Minimum Feedback Level -999999.000 ProcessCtrlUnit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
20-74 Maximum Feedback Level 999999.000 ProcessCtrlUnit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
20-79 PID Autotuning [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-8* PID Basic Settings
20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
20-84 On Reference Bandwidth 5% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
20-9* PID Controller
20-91 PID Anti Windup [1] On All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-93 PID Proportional Gain 0.50 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
20-94 PID Integral Time 20.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
20-95 PID Differentiation Time 0.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
20-96 PID Diff. Gain Limit 5.0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

Parameter Lists
21-** Ext. Closed-loop
tion
21-0* Ext. CL Autotuning
21-00 Closed-loop Type [0] Auto 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-01 PID Performance [0] Normal 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-02 PID Output Change 0.10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
21-03 Minimum Feedback Level -999999.000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-04 Maximum Feedback Level 999999.000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-09 PID Autotuning [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-1* Ext. CL 1 Ref./Fb.
21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit [1] % All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-11 Ext. 1 Minimum Reference 0.000 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-12 Ext. 1 Maximum Reference 100.000 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-13 Ext. 1 Reference Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-15 Ext. 1 Setpoint 0.000 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-17 Ext. 1 Reference [Unit] 0.000 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-18 Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit] 0.000 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-19 Ext. 1 Output [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
21-2* Ext. CL 1 PID
21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain 0.01 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time 10000.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
21-23 Ext. 1 Differentation Time 0.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit 5.0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
21-4* Ext. CL 2 PID
21-6* Ext. CL 3 PID

Parameter Lists
22-** Application Functions
tion
22-0* Miscellaneous
22-00 External Interlock Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-01 Power Filter Time 0.50 s 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
22-2* No-Flow Detection
22-20 Low Power Auto Set-up [0] OFF All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
22-21 Low Power Detection [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-22 Low Speed Detection [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-23 No-Flow Function [0] OFF All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-24 No-Flow Delay 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-26 Dry Pump Function [0] OFF All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-27 Dry Pump Delay 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-3* No-Flow Power Tuning
22-30 No-Flow Power 0.00 kW All set-ups TRUE 1 Uint32
22-31 Power Correction Factor 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-32 Low Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
22-33 Low Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
22-34 Low Speed Power [kW] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 1 Uint32
22-35 Low Speed Power [HP] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
22-36 High Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
22-37 High Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
22-38 High Speed Power [kW] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 1 Uint32
22-39 High Speed Power [HP] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
22-4* Sleep Mode
22-40 Minimum Run Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-41 Minimum Sleep Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference 10 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
22-45 Setpoint Boost 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
22-46 Maximum Boost Time 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-5* End of Curve
22-50 End of Curve Function [0] OFF All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-51 End of Curve Delay 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-6* Broken Belt Detection
22-60 Broken Belt Function [0] OFF All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-61 Broken Belt Torque 10 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
22-62 Broken Belt Delay 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-7* Short Cycle Protection
22-75 Short Cycle Protection [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
start_to_start_min_on_time
22-76 Interval between Starts (P2277) All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-77 Minimum Run Time 0s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-78 Minimum Run Time Override [0] Disabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
22-79 Minimum Run Time Override Value 0.000 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
22-8* Flow Compensation
22-80 Flow Compensation [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-81 Square-linear Curve Approximation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
22-82 Work Point Calculation [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
22-84 Speed at No-Flow [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
22-86 Speed at Design Point [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
22-87 Pressure at No-Flow Speed 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
22-88 Pressure at Rated Speed 999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
22-89 Flow at Design Point 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
22-90 Flow at Rated Speed 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32

Parameter Lists
23-** Time-based Functions
23-0* Timed Actions
TimeOf-
DayWo-
23-00 ON Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Date
23-01 ON Action [0] DISABLED 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
TimeOf-
DayWo-
23-02 OFF Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Date
23-03 OFF Action [0] DISABLED 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-04 Occurrence [0] All days 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-1* Maintenance
23-10 Maintenance Item [1] Motor bearings 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
23-11 Maintenance Action [1] Lubricate 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
23-12 Maintenance Time Base [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
23-13 Maintenance Time Interval 1h 1 set-up TRUE 74 Uint32
23-14 Maintenance Date and Time ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
23-1* Maintenance Reset
23-15 Reset Maintenance Word [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-16 Maintenance Text 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[20]
23-5* Energy Log
23-50 Energy Log Resolution [5] Last 24 Hours 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-51 Period Start ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
23-53 Energy Log 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
23-54 Reset Energy Log [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-6* Trending
23-60 Trend Variable [0] Power [kW] 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-61 Continuous Bin Data 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
23-62 Timed Bin Data 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
23-63 Timed Period Start ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
23-64 Timed Period Stop ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
23-65 Minimum Bin Value ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
23-66 Reset Continuous Bin Data [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-67 Reset Timed Bin Data [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-8* Payback Counter
23-80 Power Reference Factor 100 % 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
23-81 Energy Cost 1.00 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
23-82 Investment 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
23-83 Energy Savings 0 kWh All set-ups TRUE 75 Int32
23-84 Cost Savings 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32

Parameter Lists
24-** Application Functions 2
tion
24-0* Fire Mode
24-00 Fire Mode Function [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
24-01 Fire Mode Configuration [0] Open-loop All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
24-02 Fire Mode Unit null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
24-03 Fire Mode Min Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
24-04 Fire Mode Max Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
24-05 Fire Mode Preset Reference 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
24-06 Fire Mode Reference Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
24-07 Fire Mode Feedback Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
24-09 Fire Mode Alarm Handling [1] Trip, Critical Alarms 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
24-1* Drive Bypass
24-10 Drive Bypass Function [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
24-11 Drive Bypass Delay Time 0s 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
24-9* Multi-Motor Funct.
24-90 Missing Motor Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
24-91 Missing Motor Coefficient 1 0.0000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -4 Int32
24-95 Locked Rotor Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
24-96 Locked Rotor Coefficient 1 0.0000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -4 Int32

Index
Index
"
"i-am" Service 8-74 4-99
,
, 0-4* 4-16
1
1-3* Adv. Motor Data 4-25
A
Abbreviations 2-2
Ac Brake Max. Current 2-16 4-37
Access To Main Menu W/o Password 0-61 4-19
Access To Personal Menu W/o Password 0-66 4-19
Active Set-up 0-10 4-5
Actual Typecode String 15-45 4-137
Additional Non-working Days 0-83 4-21
Additional Working Days 0-82 4-21
Address 8-31 4-96
Adj Freq Dr Ordering No. 15-46 4-137
Adj Freq Dr Serial No. 15-51 4-138
Adjustable Frequency Drive Closed-loop 4-153
Aeo Minimum Magnetization 14-41 4-127
[Air Density Factor %] 20-38 4-164
Alarm Log 4-136
Alarm Log: Date And Time 15-33 4-136
Alarm Log: Error Code 15-30 4-136
Alarm Log: Time 15-32 4-136
Alarm Log: Value 15-31 4-136
Alarm Word 5-5
Alarm Word 16-90 4-148
Alarm Word 2 16-91 4-149
Alarm/warning Code List 5-2
Alarms And Warnings 5-1
Analog In X30/11 16-75 4-147
Analog In X30/12 16-76 4-147
Analog Input 53 16-62 4-145
Analog Input 54 16-64 4-146
Analog Inputs 2-4
[Analog Out X30/8 Ma] 16-77 4-147
[Analog Output 42 Ma] 16-65 4-146
Auto Derate 4-129
Auto Energy Optimization Compressor 4-22
Auto Energy Optimization Vt 4-23
[Auto On] Key On Lcp 0-42 4-17
Automatic Motor Adaptation (ama) 1-29 4-25
Automatic Restart Time 14-21 4-124
B
Bacnet 4-99
Bacnet Device Instance 8-70 4-99
Brake Check 2-15 4-36
Brake Control 5-9
Brake Energy /2 Min 16-33 4-142
Brake Energy /s 16-32 4-142

Index
Brake Function 2-10 4-35

Brake Power Limit (kw) 2-12 4-35
Brake Power Monitoring 2-13 4-36
Brake Resistor (ohm) 2-11 4-35
Braking Energy 2-5
Break-away Torque 2-4
Broken Belt Delay 22-62 4-191
Broken Belt Detection 4-190
Broken Belt Function 22-60 4-191
Broken Belt Torque 22-61 4-191
Bus Controlled 4-82
Bus Error Count 8-81 4-100
Bus Feedback 1 8-94 4-101
Bus Jog 1 Speed 8-90 4-101
Bus Jog 2 Speed 8-91 4-101
Bus Message Count 8-80 4-100
[Bypass Speed From Hz] 4-61 4-50
[Bypass Speed From Rpm] 4-60 4-50
[Bypass Speed To Hz] 4-63 4-50
[Bypass Speed To Rpm] 4-62 4-50
C
Changes Made 3-9
Changing A Data Value 3-17
Changing A Group Of Numeric Data Values 3-17
Changing A Text Value 3-17
Changing Data 3-16
Changing Parameter Data 3-8
Clock Fault 0-79 4-21
Clock Settings, 0-7* 4-20
Closed-loop Type 20-70 4-166, 4-170
Coast Inverse 3-10
Coasting 2-3, 3-6
Coasting Select 8-50 4-97
Comm. Option Status 16-84 4-148
Communication Option 5-11
Comparator Operand 13-10 4-109
Comparator Operator 13-11 4-109
Comparator Value 13-12 4-110
Configurable Status Word Stw 8-13 4-95
Configuration 4-95
Configuration Mode 1-00 4-22
Continuous Bin Data 23-61 4-205
Control Card Temp. 16-39 4-143
Control Profile 8-10 4-95
Control Site 8-01 4-92
Control Source 8-02 4-93
Control Timeout Function 8-04 4-93
Control Timeout Time 8-03 4-93
Control Word 16-00 4-140
Cooling 4-31
Copyright, Limitation Of Liability And Revision Rights 2-1
Cost Savings 23-84 4-208
Counter A 16-72 4-147
Counter B 16-73 4-147
Current Fault Source 16-49 4-143
Current Lim Cont, Proportional Gain 14-30 4-126

Index
Current Lim Contr, Integration Time 14-31 4-127

Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time 14-32 4-127
Current Limit 4-18 4-48
Current Limit Control 4-126
Custom Readout 16-09 4-140
Custom Readout Max Value 0-32 4-15
Custom Readout Min Value 0-31 4-15
Custom Readout Unit 0-30 4-13
D
Data Log Settings 4-132
Date And Time 0-70 4-20
Date And Time Readout 0-89 4-22
Date Format 0-71 4-20
Dc Brake Current 2-01 4-34
[Dc Brake Cut-in Speed Hz] 2-04 4-35
[Dc Brake Cut-in Speed Rpm] 2-03 4-34
Dc Brake Select 8-52 4-97
Dc Braking Time 2-02 4-34
Dc Hold/preheat Current 2-00 4-34
Dc Link 5-8
Dc Link Voltage 16-30 4-142
Default Settings 6-1
Default Settings 3-18
Defined Parameters 15-92 4-139
Definitions 2-3
Diagnosis Trigger 8-07 4-94
Digi Pot Reference 16-53 4-144
Digital & Relay Bus Control 5-90 4-82
Digital Input 16-60 4-144
Digital Inputs, 5-1* Continued 4-54, 4-57
[Digital Output Bin] 16-66 4-146
Display Line 1.1 Small 0-20 4-7
Display Line 1.3 Small, 0-22 4-12
Display Line 2 Large, 0-23 4-12
Display Text 1 0-37 4-15
Disposal Instructions 1-5
Domain 11-01 4-102
Drive Bypass Delay Time 24-11 4-214
Drive Bypass Function 24-10 4-213
[Drive Bypass] Key On Lcp 0-45 4-18
Drive Identification 4-136, 4-139
Drive Information 4-130
Drive Profile 11-10 4-102
Dst/summertime 0-74 4-20
Dst/summertime End 0-77 4-21
Dst/summertime Start 0-76 4-21
E
Electrical Ratings 1-4
Electronic Waste 1-5
End-of-timeout Function 8-05 4-94
Energy Cost 23-81 4-208
Energy Log 4-199, 4-202
Energy Log Resolution 23-50 4-201
Energy Optimization 4-127
Energy Savings 23-83 4-208

Index
Environment 4-128
Etr 4-142
Example Of Changing Parameter Data 3-8
Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit 21-24 4-176
Ext. 1 Differentation Time 21-23 4-176
Ext. 1 Feedback Source 21-14 4-174
[Ext. 1 Feedback Unit] 21-18 4-175
Ext. 1 Integral Time 21-22 4-176
Ext. 1 Maximum Reference 21-12 4-173
Ext. 1 Minimum Reference 21-11 4-173
Ext. 1 Normal/inverse Control 21-20 4-175
[Ext. 1 Output %] 21-19 4-175
Ext. 1 Proportional Gain 21-21 4-175
Ext. 1 Ref./feedback Unit 21-10 4-172
Ext. 1 Reference Source 21-13 4-174
[Ext. 1 Reference Unit] 21-17 4-175
Ext. 1 Setpoint 21-15 4-175
[Ext. 2 Output %] 21-39 4-179
[Ext. 3 Output %] 21-59 4-183
Ext. Status Word 16-94 4-149
Ext. Status Word 2 16-95 4-149
Extended Cl Autotuning 4-170
Extended Status Word 5-7
Extended Status Word 2 5-7
External Interlock Delay 22-00 4-184
External Reference 16-50 4-143
F
[Fan 1 Area In2] 20-35 4-164
[Fan 1 Area M2] 20-34 4-164
[Fan 2 Area In2] 20-37 4-164
[Fan 2 Area M2] 20-36 4-164
Fan Control 14-52 4-128

Index
Fan Monitor 14-53 4-128

Fault Messages 5-8
Fc Port Ctw 1 16-85 4-148
Fc Port Ref 1 16-86 4-148
Fc Type 15-40 4-136
Feedback 4-153
Feedback & Setpoint 4-160
Feedback 1 Conversion 20-01 4-154
Feedback 1 Source 20-00 4-153
Feedback 1 Source Unit 20-02 4-154
[Feedback 1 Unit] 16-54 4-144
Feedback Adv. Conversion 4-163
Feedback Function 20-20 4-160
[Feedback Unit] 16-52 4-144
Fieldbus Ctw 1 16-80 4-148
Fieldbus Ref 1 16-82 4-148
Fire Mode Alarm Handling 24-09 4-211
Fire Mode Function 24-00 4-210
Fire Mode Live Zero Timeout Function 6-02 4-84
Fire Mode Log: Date And Time 18-12 4-152
Fire Mode Log: Event 18-10 4-152
Fire Mode Log: Time 18-11 4-152
Fire Mode Max Reference 24-04 4-211
Fire Mode Preset Reference 24-05 4-211
Fire Mode Reference Source 24-06 4-211
Flying Start 1-73 4-29
Freeze Output 2-3
Frequency 16-13 4-141
[Frequency %] 16-15 4-141
Function At Inverter Overload 14-61 4-130
Function At Mains Imbalance 14-12 4-123
Function At Overtemperature 14-60 4-129
Function At Stop 1-80 4-30
Function Relay 5-40 4-74
Function Set-ups 3-10
G
General Settings, 1-0* 4-22
Graphical Display 3-1
H
[Hand On] Key On Lcp 0-40 4-16
Heatsink Temp. 16-34 4-142
High Speed Load Compensation 1-61 4-28
Historic Log 4-135
Historic Log: Date And Time 15-23 4-136
Historic Log: Event 15-20 4-135
Historic Log: Time 15-22 4-135
Historic Log: Value 15-21 4-135
How To Operate The Graphical 3-1

Index
I
Initialization 3-18
Initialization Password 8-75 4-100
Installation At High Altitudes 1-2
Interval Between Starts 22-76 4-192
Inv. Max. Current 16-37 4-143
Inv. Nom. Current 16-36 4-142
Inv. Overload Derate Current 14-62 4-130
Inverter Thermal 16-35 4-142
Investment 23-82 4-208
Iron Loss Resistance (rfe) 1-36 4-26
J
Jog 2-3
Jog Ramp Time 3-80 4-44
[Jog Speed Hz] 3-11 4-38
[Jog Speed Rpm] 3-19 4-41
K
Kty Sensor 5-9
Kwh Counter 15-02 4-131
L
Language 0-01 4-2
Language Package 1 4-2
Language Package 2 4-2
Lcp Copy 0-50 4-18
Lcp Id Num. 15-48 4-137
Leds 3-1, 3-3
Lg-0# Maintenance Log 4-151
Line Power On/off 4-121
Line Power Supply 2-7
Literature 2-2
Live Zero Timeout Function 6-01 4-83
Live Zero Timeout Time 6-00 4-83
Local Mode Unit 0-05 4-4
Local Reference 4-3
Logging Buffer Full 16-40 4-143
Logging Interval 15-11 4-133
Logging Mode 15-13 4-134
Logging Source 15-10 4-132
Loggings 3-9
Logic Rule Boolean 1 13-40 4-110
Logic Rule Operator 1 13-41 4-113
Logic Rule Operator 2 13-43 4-115
Lon Warning Word 11-15 4-102
Lonworks 4-102
Lonworks Revision 11-18 4-103
Low Speed Detection 22-22 4-186
Low Speed Load Compensation 1-60 4-28
M
[Main Actual Value %] 16-05 4-140
Main Menu - Adjustable Frequency Drive Information - Group 15 4-130
Main Menu Mode 3-5, 3-8
Main Menu Mode 3-15

Index
Main Menu Password 0-60 4-19

Main Menu Structure 4-1
Main Reactance 4-25
Main Reactance (xh) 1-35 4-26
Mains Failure 14-10 4-121
Mains Voltage At Mains Fault 14-11 4-123
Maintenance Action 23-11 4-198
Maintenance Date And Time 23-14 4-199
Maintenance Item 23-10 4-197
Maintenance Log: Action 18-01 4-151
Maintenance Log: Date And Time 18-03 4-151
Maintenance Log: Item 18-00 4-151
Maintenance Log: Time 18-02 4-151
Maintenance Text 23-16 4-199
Maintenance Time Base 23-12 4-198
Maintenance Time Interval 23-13 4-199
Maintenance Word 16-96 4-149
Manual Initialization 3-18
Max Output Frequency 4-19 4-48
Maximum Boost Time 22-46 4-190
Maximum Feedback Level 20-74 4-166, 4-171
Maximum Inter-char Delay 8-37 4-97
Maximum Limit 3-93 4-45
Maximum Reference 3-03 4-37
Maximum Reference/feedb. 20-14 4-159
Maximum Response Delay 8-36 4-96
[Min Speed For Function At Stop Hz] 1-82 4-30
[Min Speed For Function At Stop Rpm] 1-81 4-30
[Min Speed Normal Magnetizing Hz] 1-52 4-28
[Min Speed Normal Magnetizing Rpm] 1-51 4-27
Minimum Aeo Frequency 14-42 4-127
Minimum Bin Value 23-65 4-206
Minimum Feedback Level 20-73 4-166, 4-171
Minimum Limit 3-94 4-45
Minimum Reference 3-02 4-37
Minimum Reference/feedb. 20-13 4-159
Minimum Response Delay 8-35 4-96
Minimum Run Time 22-40 4-189, 4-192
Minimum Sleep Time 22-41 4-189
Missing Motor Phase Function 4-58 4-50
Modified Parameters 15-93 4-139
Motor Cos-phi 14-43 4-127
Motor Current 1-24 4-24, 4-141
Motor External Fan 1-91 4-32
Motor Frequency 1-23 4-24
Motor Magnetization At Zero Speed 1-50 4-27
Motor Nominal Speed 1-25 4-24
Motor Poles 1-39 4-27
[Motor Power Hp] 1-21 4-23
[Motor Power Kw] 1-20 4-23
Motor Protection 4-31
Motor Rotation Check 1-28 4-24
Motor Speed Direction 4-10 4-46
[Motor Speed High Limit Hz] 4-14 4-47
[Motor Speed High Limit Rpm] 4-13 4-47
[Motor Speed Low Limit Hz] 4-12 4-47
[Motor Speed Low Limit Rpm] 4-11 4-47
Motor Speed Unit 0-02 4-3
Motor Status 4-141

Index
Motor Thermal 16-18 4-142

Motor Thermal Protection 1-90 4-31
Motor Voltage 16-12 4-141
Motor Voltage 1-22 4-23
Ms/tp Max Info Frames 8-73 4-99
Ms/tp Max Masters 8-72 4-99
My Personal Menu 3-8, 4-12
N
Neuron Id 11-00 4-102
No Operation 3-10
No Trip At Inverter Overload 4-129
Node Id 11-03 4-102
No-flow Delay 22-24 4-186
No-flow Function 22-23 4-186
Number Of Starts 15-08 4-132
O
Occurrence 23-04 4-195
Off Action 23-03 4-194
Off Delay, Relay 5-42 4-77
Off Time 23-02 4-194
[Off/reset] Key On Lcp 0-44 4-17
[Off] Key On Lcp 0-41 4-16
On Action 23-01 4-193
On Delay, Relay 5-41 4-77
On Reference Bandwidth 20-84 4-167
On Time 23-00 4-192
Operating Hours 15-00 4-130
Operating Mode 4-3
Operating State At Power-up 0-04 4-3
Operation Mode 14-22 4-124
Option Ident. 4-138
Option In Slot A 15-70 4-138
Option In Slot B 15-72 4-138
Option In Slot C0 15-74 4-139
Option In Slot C1 15-76 4-139
Option Mounted 15-60 4-138
Option Ordering No 15-62 4-138
Option Serial No 15-63 4-138
Option Sw Version 15-61 4-138
Ordered Typecode String 15-44 4-137
Over Temps 15-04 4-131
Over Volts 15-05 4-131
Overmodulation 14-03 4-121
Over-voltage Control 2-17 4-37
P
Parameter Data 3-8
Parameter Info 4-139
Parameter Metadata 15-99 4-139
Parameter Selection 3-16
Parameter Set-up 3-8
Parity / Stop Bits 8-33 4-96
Period Start 23-51 4-201
Personal Menu Password 0-65 4-19
Pid Anti Windup 20-91 4-168
Pid Autotuning 4-165
Pid Autotuning 20-79 4-167, 4-171

Index
Pid Basic Settings 4-167

Pid Controller 4-168
Pid Diff. Gain Limit 20-96 4-169
Pid Differentiation Time 20-95 4-169
Pid Integral Time 20-94 4-168
Pid Normal/ Inverse Control 20-81 4-167
[Pid Output %] 16-58 4-144
Pid Output Change 20-72 4-166, 4-171
Pid Performance 20-71 4-166, 4-171
Pid Proportional Gain 20-93 4-168
[Pid Start Speed Hz] 20-83 4-167
[Pid Start Speed Rpm] 20-82 4-167
Power Card Ordering No. 15-47 4-137
Power Card Serial Number 15-53 4-138
[Power Hp] 16-11 4-141
[Power Kw] 16-10 4-141
Power Reference Factor 23-80 4-208
Power Restore 3-92 4-45
Power Section 15-41 4-137
Power-ups 15-03 4-131
Preset Reference 3-10 4-38
Preset Reference Select 8-56 4-99
Preset Relative Reference 3-14 4-39
Production Settings 14-28 4-126
Programming Set-up 0-11 4-5
Protection Mode 2-8
Protocol 8-30 4-95
Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 5-54 4-78
Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 5-59 4-79
[Pulse Input #29 Hz] 16-67 4-146
[Pulse Input #33 Hz] 16-68 4-146
Pulse Out #27 Bus Control 5-93 4-82
Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset 5-94 4-82
Pulse Out #29 Bus Control 5-95 4-82
Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset 5-96 4-82
Pulse Out #x30/6 Bus Control 5-97 4-82
Pulse Out #x30/6 Timeout Preset 5-98 4-82
[Pulse Output #27 Hz] 16-69 4-146
[Pulse Output #29 Hz] 16-70 4-146
Pulse Output Max Freq #27 5-62 4-80
Pulse Output Max Freq #29 5-65 4-81
Pulse Output Max Freq #x30/6 5-68 4-81
Pwm Random 14-04 4-121
Q
Quick Menu 3-4
Quick Menu Mode 3-4, 3-8
Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio At Decel. End 3-84 4-44
Quick Transfer Of Parameter Settings Between Multiple Adjustable Frequency Drives 3-7
R
Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time 3-42 4-42
Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time 3-41 4-42
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio At Accel. End 3-46 4-42
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio At Accel. Start 3-45 4-42
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio At Decel. End 3-48 4-43
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio At Decel. Start 3-47 4-43
Ramp 1 Type 3-40 4-42
Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time 3-52 4-43

Index
Ramp 2 Ramp-up Time 3-51 4-43

Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio At Accel. End 3-56 4-43
Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio At Accel. Start 3-55 4-43
Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio At Decel. End 3-58 4-44
Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio At Decel. Start 3-57 4-43
Ramp Delay 3-95 4-45
Ramp Time 3-91 4-45
Rated Motor Speed 2-3
Rcd 2-6
Readout And Programming Of Indexed Parameters 3-17
Readout: Linked Set-ups 0-13 4-7
Readout: Prog. Set-ups / Channel 0-14 4-7
Reference % 16-02 4-140
Reference 1 Source 3-15 4-39
Reference Function 3-04 4-38
Reference Site 3-13 4-39
[Reference Unit] 16-01 4-140
Refrigerant 20-30 4-163
Regional Settings 0-03 4-3
[Relay Output Bin] 16-71 4-147
Relay Outputs 4-66
Reset Continuous Bin Data 23-66 4-206
Reset Control Timeout 8-06 4-94
Reset Energy Log 23-54 4-202
Reset Kwh Counter 15-06 4-131
Reset Maintenance Word 23-15 4-199
Reset Mode 14-20 4-123
Reset Running Hours Counter 15-07 4-131
Reset Slc 13-03 4-108
Reset Timed Bin Data 23-67 4-206
[Reset] Key On Lcp 0-43 4-17
Resonance Dampening 1-64 4-29
Resonance Dampening Time Constant 1-65 4-29
Reverse Select 8-54 4-98
Rfi 1 14-50 4-128
Running Hours 15-01 4-131
S
Safety Note 1-1
Safety Precautions 2-7
Safety Regulations 1-2
Samples Before Trigger 15-14 4-134
Semi-auto Bypass Set-up 4-64 4-51
Serial Communication 2-4
Service Code 14-29 4-126
Setpoint 1 20-21 4-162
Setpoint 2 20-22 4-162
Setpoint 3 20-23 4-162
Setpoint Boost 22-45 4-190
Set-up Copy 0-51 4-19
Set-up Select 8-55 4-98
Short Cycle Protection 4-191
Sl Controller Action 13-52 4-118
Sl Controller Event 13-51 4-117
Sl Controller Mode 13-00 4-104
Sl Controller State 16-38 4-143
Sl Controller Timer 13-20 4-110

Index
Slave Error Count 8-83 4-100

Slave Messages Rcvd 8-82 4-100
Slave Messages Sent 8-84 4-100
Slave Timeout Errors 8-85 4-100
Sleep Mode 4-186
Slip Compensation 1-62 4-29
Slip Compensation Time Constant 1-63 4-29
Slot A Option Sw Version 15-71 4-138
Slot B Option Sw Version 15-73 4-138
Slot C0 Option Sw Version 15-75 4-139
Slot C1 Option Sw Version 15-77 4-139
Software Version 15-43 4-137
Special Functions 4-120
[Speed Rpm] 16-17 4-141
Start Delay 1-71 4-29
Start Event 13-01 4-105
Start Select 8-53 4-98
Stator Leakage Reactance 4-25
Stator Resistance (rs) 1-30 4-26
Status 3-4
Status Messages 3-1
Status Word 16-03 4-140
Step Size 3-90 4-45
Step-by-step 3-17
Stop Event 13-02 4-106
Subnet Id 11-02 4-102
Sw Id Control Card 15-49 4-137
Sw Id Power Card 15-50 4-137
Switching Frequency 14-01 4-120
Switching Pattern 14-00 4-120
Synchronous Motor Speed 2-3
T
Telegram Selection 8-40 4-97
Term X30/6 Digi Out (mcb 101) 5-32 4-71
Term X30/7 Digi Out (mcb 101) 5-33 4-73
Term. 29 High Frequency 5-51 4-78
Term. 29 High Ref./feedb. Value 5-53 4-78
Term. 29 Low Frequency 5-50 4-78
Term. 29 Low Ref./feedb. Value 5-52 4-78
Term. 33 High Frequency 5-56 4-79
Term. 33 High Ref./feedb. Value 5-58 4-79
Term. 33 Low Frequency 5-55 4-78
Term. 33 Low Ref./feedb. Value 5-57 4-79
Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant 6-36 4-87
Term. X30/11 High Ref./feedb. Value 6-35 4-87
Term. X30/11 Live Zero 6-37 4-87
Term. X30/11 Low Ref./feedb. Value 6-34 4-87
Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant 6-46 4-88
Term. X30/12 High Ref./feedb. Value 6-45 4-88
Term. X30/12 Live Zero 6-47 4-88
Term. X30/12 Low Ref./feedb. Value 6-44 4-88
Terminal 18 Digital Input 5-10 4-60
Terminal 27 Mode 5-01 4-51
Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable 5-60 4-80
Terminal 29 Mode 5-02 4-52
Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable 5-63 4-80

Index
Terminal 42 Output 6-50 4-89

Terminal 42 Output Bus Control 6-53 4-91
Terminal 42 Output Max Scale 6-52 4-90
Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 6-51 4-90
Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset 6-54 4-91
Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 6-16 4-85
Terminal 53 High Current 6-13 4-85
Terminal 53 High Ref./feedb. Value 6-15 4-85
Terminal 53 High Voltage 6-11 4-84
Terminal 53 Live Zero 6-17 4-85
Terminal 53 Low Current 6-12 4-84
Terminal 53 Low Ref./feedb. Value 6-14 4-85
Terminal 53 Low Voltage 6-10 4-84
Terminal 53 Switch Setting 16-61 4-145
Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 6-26 4-86
Terminal 54 High Current 6-23 4-86
Terminal 54 High Ref./feedb. Value 6-25 4-86
Terminal 54 High Voltage 6-21 4-86
Terminal 54 Live Zero 6-27 4-86
Terminal 54 Low Current 6-22 4-86
Terminal 54 Low Ref./feedb. Value 6-24 4-86
Terminal 54 Low Voltage 6-20 4-85
Terminal 54 Switch Setting 16-63 4-146
Terminal X30/11 High Voltage 6-31 4-87
Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage 6-30 4-87
Terminal X30/12 High Voltage 6-41 4-88
Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage 6-40 4-88
Terminal X30/2 Digital Input 5-16 4-63
Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable 5-66 4-81
Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale 6-62 4-92
Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale 6-61 4-92
Terminal X30/8 Output 6-60 4-91
Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control 6-63 4-92
Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset 6-64 4-92
Thermal Load 4-27, 4-142
Thermistor 4-31
Thermistor 2-6
Thermistor Source 1-93 4-33
This Set-up Linked To 0-12 4-5
Time Format 0-72 4-20
Timed Actions 4-192
Timed Bin Data 23-62 4-205
Timed Period Start 23-63 4-205
Timed Period Stop 23-64 4-206
[Torque %] 16-22 4-142
Torque Characteristics 1-03 4-22
Torque Limit Generator Mode 4-17 4-47
Torque Limit Motor Mode 4-16 4-47
[Torque Nm] 16-16 4-141
Trend Variable 23-60 4-204
Trending 4-203
Trigger Event 15-12 4-133
Trip At Motor Speed Low Limit 4-30
Trip Delay At Inverter Fault 14-26 4-126
Trip Delay At Torque Limit 14-25 4-126
Trip Reset 4-123
[Trip Speed Low Hz] 1-87 4-31

Index
[Trip Speed Low Rpm] 1-86 4-31

Troubleshooting 5-1
Typecode Setting 14-23 4-125
U
User-defined Refrigerant A1 20-31 4-163
V
Voltage 15-42 4-137
Vt Level 14-40 4-127
Vvcplus 2-6
W
Wake-up Ref./fb Difference 22-44 4-190
[Wake-up Speed Hz] 22-43 4-190
[Wake-up Speed Rpm] 22-42 4-189
Warning Against Unintended Start 1-2
Warning Current High 4-51 4-49
Warning Current Low 4-50 4-48
Warning Feedback High 4-57 4-49
Warning Feedback Low 4-56 4-49
Warning Reference High 4-55 4-49
Warning Reference Low 4-54 4-49
Warning Speed High 4-53 4-49
Warning Word 5-6
Warning Word 16-92 4-149
Warning Word 2 16-93 4-149, 5-6
Working Days 0-81 4-21
X
Xif Revision 11-17 4-103

Programming Guide
TR200
Literature order number BAS-SVP04B-EN

Date
Substitutes BAS-SVP04A-EN
www.trane.com
For more information, contact your local Trane Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to
office or e-mail us at comfort@trane.com change design and specifications without notice.
BAS-SVP04A-EN
May 2009 BAS-SVP04A-EN
130R0449 MG12J122 Rev. 2009-05-29
*MG12J122*

Trane TR200 Programming Guide

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationTrane TR200 Programming Guide

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Trane TR200 Programming Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Trane TR200 Programming Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Programming Guide

Literature order number BAS-SVP04A-EN

130R0449 MG12J122 Rev. 2009-05-29

How to Program 3-1

Local Control Panel 3-1

Parameter Description 4-1

Parameter Selection 4-1

Main Menu - Operation and Display - Group 0 4-1

Main Menu - Load and Motor - Group 1 4-22

Main Menu - Brakes - Group 2 4-34

Main Menu - Reference/Ramps - Group 3 4-37

Main Menu - Limits/Warnings - Group 4 4-46

Main Menu - Digital In/Out - Group 5 4-51

TR200 Programming Guide -1

Main Menu - Communications and Options - Group 8 4-92

Main Menu - LonWorks - Group 11 4-102

Main Menu - Smart Logic - Group 13 4-104

Main Menu - Special Functions -Group 14 4-120

Main Menu - Adjustable Frequency Drive Information - Group

Main Menu - Data Readouts - Group 16 4-140

Main Menu - Data Readouts 2 - Group 18 4-151

Main Menu - Adjustable Frequency Drive Closed-loop - Group

Main Menu - Extended Closed-loop - TR200 - Group 21 4-169

Main Menu - Application Functions - TR200 - Group 22 4-184

Main Menu - Time-based Functions - TR200 - Group 23 4-192

Main Menu - Application Functions 2 - Group 24 4-209

Parameter Lists 6-1

Parameter Lists TR200 6-1

-2 TR200 Programming Guide

TR200 Programming Guide -3

Indicates default setting

High Voltage Warning

TR200 Programming Guide 1-1

1-2 TR200 Programming Guide

Voltage (V) Min. Waiting Time (Minutes)

TR200 Programming Guide 1-3

Before commencing repair work

Single phase applications.

Fuses and circuit breakers for overcurrent and short-circuit protection

1-4 TR200 Programming Guide

Software Version and Approvals: TR200

Equipment containing electrical components may not be disposed of together

TR200 Programming Guide 1-5

1-6 TR200 Programming Guide

TR200 Programming Guide 2-1

Available literature for TR200

2-2 TR200 Programming Guide

Input: Group 1 Reset, Coasting stop, Reset and Coasting

TR200 Programming Guide 2-3

2-4 TR200 Programming Guide

TR200 Programming Guide 2-5

2-6 TR200 Programming Guide

Power Factor 3 x U x I 1 cos

The power factor for 3-phase control: I 1 x cos 1 I1

TR200 Programming Guide 2-7

2-8 TR200 Programming Guide

1. Graphical display with Status lines.

a. Status line: Status messages displaying icons